810975
1
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/732
Pagina verder
IS300h_EE
Pictorial index
Search by illustration
1
For safety
and security
Make sure to read through them
2
Instrument cluster
How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of warning
lights and indicators, etc.
3
Operation of
each component
Opening and closing the doors and windows, adjustment
before driving, etc.
4
Driving
Operations and advice which are necessary for driving
5
Lexus Display
Audio system
Operating the Lexus Display Audio system
6
Interior features
Usage of the interior features, etc.
7
Maintenance
and care
Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures
8
When trouble
arises
What to do in case of malfunction or emergency
9
Vehicle
specifications
Vehicle specifications, customizable features, etc.
Index
Search by symptom
Search alphabetically
TABLE OF CONTENTS2
IS300h_EE
For your information...................................8
Reading this manual.................................. 12
How to search ............................................. 13
Pictorial index.............................................. 14
1-1. For safe use
Before driving.................................34
For safe driving...............................36
Seat belts ..........................................38
SRS airbags .....................................43
Airbag manual
on-off system................................53
Pop Up Hood .................................55
Safety information
for children................................... 58
Child restraint systems ...............59
Installing child restraints.............67
Exhaust gas precautions............76
1-2. Hybrid system
Hybrid system features............... 77
Hybrid system
precautions....................................81
1-3. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system ......................86
Double locking system ...............99
Alarm ...............................................100
2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and
indicators.....................................108
Gauges and meters .....................113
Multi-information display...........119
Energy monitor/
consumption screen ...............136
3-1. Key information
Keys .................................................. 146
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
and trunk
Doors ............................................... 152
Trunk ................................................159
Smart entry &
start system.................................165
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats.................................... 205
Rear seats......................................207
Driving position memory........209
Head restraints............................. 214
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel ..............................217
Inside rear view mirror.............. 219
Outside rear
view mirrors................................ 221
1
For safety and security
2
Instrument cluster
3
Operation of
each component
3
1
9
8
7
6
4
3
2
IS300h_EE
5
3-5. Opening, closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows...........................225
Moon roof.....................................229
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle.....................234
Cargo and luggage.................... 241
Trailer towing
(vehicles without a
towing package)......................242
Trailer towing
(vehicles with a
towing package)......................243
4-2. Driving procedures
Power (ignition) switch.............251
EV drive mode ............................256
Hybrid transmission................. 258
Turn signal lever .........................265
Parking brake ..............................267
ASC
(Active Sound Control)........268
4-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch.........................269
Automatic High Beam.............272
Fog light switch ...........................276
Windshield wipers
and washer................................. 277
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel
tank cap...................................... 285
4-5. Using the driving
support systems
Lexus Safety System + .............289
PCS
(Pre-Collision System) ..........301
LDA
(Lane Departure Alert
with steering control) .............312
RSA (Road Sign Assist)...........320
Dynamic radar
cruise control............................325
Cruise control .............................337
Lexus parking
assist-sensor............................... 341
Lexus parking assist
monitor....................................... 350
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor)..............366
BSM function.........................373
RCTA function......................376
Driving mode
select switch...............................381
Driving assist systems.............. 385
4-6. Driving tips
Hybrid vehicle
driving tips...................................391
Winter driving tips .....................394
4
Driving
TABLE OF CONTENTS4
IS300h_EE
5-1. Basic Operations
Lexus Display Audio
system ......................................... 400
Steering wheel
audio switches......................... 405
USB/AUX ports ........................406
5-2. Setup
Setup menu.................................. 409
General settings..........................410
Voice settings...............................413
Display settings............................ 414
5-3. Using the audio system
Selecting the
audio source...............................416
Optimal use of the
audio system............................... 417
Audio settings...............................418
Audio menu screen
operation ....................................422
5-4. Using the radio
Radio operation..........................425
5-5. Playing an audio CD and
MP3/WMA/AAC discs
CD player operation ................427
5-6. Using an external device
Listening to an iPod...................433
Using USB
memory device........................437
Using the AUX port .................442
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
Steps for using Bluetooth
®
devices.........................................443
Registering a Bluetooth
®
device...........................................445
Selecting a Bluetooth
®
device...........................................446
Connecting a Bluetooth
®
audio player...............................447
Connecting a Bluetooth
®
phone ...........................................448
Displaying a Bluetooth
®
device details............................449
Detailed Bluetooth
®
settings........................................ 450
5-8. Bluetooth
®
Audio
Listening to Bluetooth
®
Audio............................................. 451
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
Using a Bluetooth
®
Phone...........................................452
Making a call................................454
Receiving a call...........................457
Speaking on the phone........... 458
Using a Bluetooth
®
phone messages......................460
Using the steering
wheel switches .........................463
Bluetooth
®
phone settings ..........................464
5
Lexus Display Audio system
5
1
9
8
7
6
4
3
2
IS300h_EE
5
5-10. Phonebook
Contact settings .........................466
Messaging setting......................469
5-11. Bluetooth
®
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting)...................470
Bluetooth
®
...................................473
5-12. Other function
“Information” screen................ 485
MirrorLink™ ................................486
USB photo ................................... 490
Speech command
system ..........................................492
6-1. Basic operation of the
Remote Touch screen
Remote Touch.............................496
10.3-inch display .......................500
6-2. Using the air
conditioning system
Automatic air
conditioning system.............. 502
Heated steering wheel/
seat heaters/
seat ventilators ..........................515
6-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list........................... 517
Interior lights...........................518
Personal lights........................518
6-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features ........... 520
Glove box ................................521
Console box............................ 521
•Cup holders/
Bottle holders ........................522
Trunk features .............................524
6-5. Using the other interior
features
Other interior features ............527
Sun visors ................................527
Vanity mirrors........................527
Clock........................................ 528
Power outlet...........................529
Armrest................................... 530
Rear sunshade...................... 530
Assist grips..............................532
Coat hooks.............................532
6
Interior features
TABLE OF CONTENTS6
IS300h_EE
7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.................534
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior................. 538
7-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements..............................541
7-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions................................543
Hood ...............................................545
Positioning a floor jack.............546
Engine compartment................547
12-volt battery..............................554
Tires .................................................557
Replacing the tire........................ 571
Tire inflation pressure...............577
Wheels............................................579
Air conditioning filter.................581
Electronic key battery............. 583
Checking and
replacing fuses ........................ 586
Light bulbs.................................... 590
8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ..................602
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency................................ 603
If the vehicle is trapped in
rising water................................604
8-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed............................... 605
If you think something
is wrong........................................610
If a warning light turns on or
a warning buzzer sounds........611
If a warning message
is displayed..................................618
If you have a flat tire
(vehicles with emergency
tire puncture repair kit) ........648
If you have a flat tire
(vehicles with
run-flat tires)..............................663
If the hybrid system
will not start................................664
If the electronic key does
not operate properly .............666
If the 12-volt battery
is discharged.............................669
If your vehicle overheats.........674
If the vehicle
becomes stuck .........................679
7
Maintenance and care
8
When trouble arises
7
1
9
8
7
6
4
3
2
IS300h_EE
5
9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)...................682
Fuel information..........................694
9-2. Customization
Customizable features ............696
9-3. Initialization
Items to initialize.........................705
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting)...............................708
Alphabetical index...................................712
9
Vehicle specifications Index
For vehicles with a 10.3-inch display, refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTI-
MEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL” for information regarding the equip-
ment listed below.
Navigation system Audio/video system
Toyota Motor Europe NV/SA, Avenue du Bourget 60 - 1140 Brussels, Bel-
gium www.toyota-europe.com
8
IS300h_EE
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including
options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your
vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However,
because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to
make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your
vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Both genuine Lexus and a wide variety of other spare parts and accessories for Lexus
vehicles are currently available on the market. Should it be determined that any of the
genuine Lexus parts or accessories supplied with the vehicle need to be replaced, Lexus
recommends that genuine Lexus parts or accessories, be used to replace them. Other
parts or accessories of matching quality can also be used. Lexus cannot accept any liabil-
ity or guarantee spare parts and accessories which are not genuine Lexus products, nor
for replacement or installation involving such parts. In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from the use of non-genuine Lexus spare parts or accessories may
not be covered under warranty.
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
9
IS300h_EE
The installation of an RF-transmitter system in your vehicle could affect electronic sys-
tems such as:
Hybrid system
Lexus Safety System +
Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
Cruise control system
Anti-lock brake system
Vehicle dynamics integrated management
SRS airbag system
Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation
of an RF-transmitter system.
Further information regarding frequency bands, power levels, antenna positions and
installation provisions for the installation of RF-transmitters, is available on request at any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles emit approximately the same
amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gasoline powered vehicles or
home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic shielding.
Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the radio frequency transmitter (RF-trans-
mitter).
The vehicle is equipped with sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such
as:
The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is
equipped.
These computers do not record conversations or sounds, and only record images out-
side of the vehicle in certain situations.
Engine speed / Electric motor speed (traction motor speed)
Accelerator status
•Brake status
Vehicle speed
Operation status of the driving assist systems, such as the ABS and pre-collision sys-
tem
Installation of an RF-transmitter system
Vehicle data recording
10
IS300h_EE
Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose malfunctions, conduct
research and development, and improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle
is leased
In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as
they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS
airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or
by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer
before you scrap your vehicle.
For Russia:
TECHNICAL REGULATION OF THE CUSTOMS UNION “ON THE SAFETY
OF WHEELED VEHICLES” TR CU 018/2011 Attachment No.3, Section 2
(Requirements for vehicles concerning their interior noise), Table 2.1, Remarks 3
This vehicle may not be used for public purposes (as taxis, for example).
Scrapping of your Lexus
Noise levels inside the vehicle
Your vehicle contains batteries and/or accumulators. Do not discard them into the
environment but cooperate with separate collection (Directive 2006/66/EC).
11
IS300h_EE
WARNING
General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and
certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which
could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or
pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the
driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a
collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.
General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use
the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a
danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon
roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold tem-
peratures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
12
IS300h_EE
WARNING:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury
to people.
NOTICE:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a mal-
function in the vehicle or its equipment.
Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in
numerical order.
Indicates the action (pushing,
turning, etc.) used to operate
switches and other devices.
Indicates the outcome of an
operation (e.g. a lid opens).
Indicates the component or posi-
tion being explained.
Means “Do not”, “Do not do this”,
or “Do not let this happen”.
Reading this manual
13
IS300h_EE
Searching by name
Alphabetical index................. P. 712
Searching by installation position
Pictorial index .............................P. 14
Searching by symptom or sound
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) ................P. 708
Searching by title
Table of contents .........................P. 2
How to search
14
IS300h_EE
Pictorial index
Pictorial index
Exterior
The shape of the headlights may differ depending on the grade, etc. (P. 590)
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 152
Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 152
Opening/closing the side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 225
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 666
Warning lights/warning messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 613, 621
Trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 159
Opening from inside the cabin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 159
Opening from outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 159
Opening by using the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 666
Warning lights/warning messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 613, 621
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 221
Adjusting the mirror angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 221
Folding the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 222
Driving position memory
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 209
Defogging the mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 510
1
2
3
15
Pictorial index
IS300h_EE
Windshield wipers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 277
Precautions against winter season. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 394
To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 511
Precautions against car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 536
Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 285
Refueling method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 285
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 684
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 557
Tire size/inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 691
Winter tires/tire chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 394
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 557
Coping with flat tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 648, 663
Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 545
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 545
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 686
Coping with overheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 674
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 621
Headlights/front position lights/daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . .P. 269
Turn signal lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 265
Tail lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 269
Stop lights
Emergency brake signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 386
Rear fog light
*
3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 276
Back up light
*
2
Shifting the shift lever to R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 258
Rear fog light
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 276
Back up light
*
3
Shifting the shift lever to R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 258
License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 269
4
5
6
7
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P. 590, Watts: P. 693)
8
9
10
11
12
13
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: Left-hand drive vehicles
*
3
: Right-hand drive vehicles
16
Pictorial index
IS300h_EE
Instrument panel (Left-hand drive vehicles)
Power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 251
Starting the hybrid system/changing the modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 251
Emergency stop of the hybrid system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 603
When the hybrid system will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 664
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 642
Shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 258
Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 258
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 605
When the shift lever does not move. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 263
Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 113
Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 113
Warning lights/indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 108
When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 611
1
2
3
17
Pictorial index
IS300h_EE
Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 119
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 119
Energy monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 136
When the warning messages are displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 618
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 267
Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 267
Precautions against winter season. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 395
Warning buzzer/message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 618
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 265
Headlight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 269
Headlights/front position lights/tail lights/daytime running lights . . . . . . P. 269
Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 276
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 277
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 277
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 553
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 635
Emergency flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 602
Trunk opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 159
Hood lock release lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 545
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 217
Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 217
Driving position memory
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 209
Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 217
Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 217
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 502
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 502
Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 510
Audio system
*
1, 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 400
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 400
Hands-free system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 452
Trunk opener main switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: For vehicles with a 10.3-inch display, refer to
“NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
18
Pictorial index
IS300h_EE
Switches (Left-hand drive vehicles)
Automatic High Beam switch
*
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 272
Windshield wiper de-icer switch
*
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 511
ASC (Active Sound Control) switch
*
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 268
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 123
Instrument panel light control switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 116
Rear sunshade switch
*
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 530
Lexus parking assist-sensor switch
*
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 341
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) main switch
*
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 366
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
19
Pictorial index
IS300h_EE
Driving position memory switches
*
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 209
Outside rear view mirror switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 221
Door lock switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 155
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 225
Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 225
Tire pressure warning reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 559
1
2
3
4
5
6
*
: If equipped
20
Pictorial index
IS300h_EE
Audio remote control switches
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 405
Paddle shift switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 260
Meter control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 122
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 331
Cruise control switch
*
2
Cruise control
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 337
Dynamic radar cruise control
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 325
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) switch
*
2
. . . . . . P. 312
Talk switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 463
Telephone switches
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 463
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
21
Pictorial index
IS300h_EE
Seat heater switches
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 516
Seat ventilator switches
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 516
Heated steering wheel switch
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 515
Driving mode select switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 381
VSC OFF switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 387
Snow mode switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 259
EV drive mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 256
Remote Touch
*
2, 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 496
Lexus Display Audio controller
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 402
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
1
: For vehicles with a 10.3-inch display, refer to
“NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*
2
: If equipped
*
3
: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
22
Pictorial index
IS300h_EE
Interior (Left-hand drive vehicles)
SRS airbags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 43
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 34
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 205
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 214
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 38
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 521
Inside lock buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 155
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 522
Assist grips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 532
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
23
Pictorial index
IS300h_EE
Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 219
Sun visors
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 527
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 527
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 518
Personal lights
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 518
Moon roof switches
*
3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 229
Intrusion sensor cancel switch
*
3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 103
Intrusion sensor and tilt sensor cancel switch
*
3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 103
1
2
3
4
5
6
*
1
: NEVER use a rearward facing child re-
straint on a seat protected by an AC-
TIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur. (P. 74)
*
2
: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.
*
3
: If equipped
24
Pictorial index
IS300h_EE
Instrument panel (Right-hand drive vehicles)
Power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 251
Starting the hybrid system/changing the modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 251
Emergency stop of the hybrid system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 603
When the hybrid system will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 664
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 642
Shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 258
Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 258
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 605
When the shift lever does not move. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 263
Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 113
Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 113
Warning lights/indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 108
When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 611
1
2
3
25
Pictorial index
IS300h_EE
Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 119
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 119
Energy monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 136
When the warning messages are displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 618
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 267
Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 267
Precautions against winter season. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 395
Warning buzzer/message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 618
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 265
Headlight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 269
Headlights/front position lights/tail lights/daytime running lights . . . . . . P. 269
Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 276
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 277
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 277
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 553
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 635
Emergency flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 602
Trunk opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 159
Hood lock release lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 545
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 217
Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 217
Driving position memory
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 209
Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 217
Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 217
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 502
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 502
Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 510
Audio system
*
1, 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 400
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 400
Hands-free system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 452
Trunk opener main switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: For vehicles with a 10.3-inch display, refer to
“NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
26
Pictorial index
IS300h_EE
Switches (Right-hand drive vehicles)
Instrument panel light control switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 116
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 123
ASC (Active Sound Control) switch
*
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 268
Automatic High Beam switch
*
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 272
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) main switch
*
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 366
Lexus parking assist-sensor switch
*
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 341
Rear sunshade switch
*
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 530
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
27
Pictorial index
IS300h_EE
Tire pressure warning reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 559
Outside rear view mirror switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 221
Driving position memory switches
*
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 209
Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 225
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 225
Door lock switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 155
1
2
3
4
5
6
*
: If equipped
28
Pictorial index
IS300h_EE
Audio remote control switches
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 405
Paddle shift switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 260
Meter control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 122
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 331
Cruise control switch
*
2
Cruise control
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 337
Dynamic radar cruise control
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 325
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) switch
*
2
. . . . . . P. 312
Talk switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 463
Telephone switches
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 463
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
29
Pictorial index
IS300h_EE
Driving mode select switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 381
VSC OFF switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 387
EV drive mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 256
Snow mode switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 259
Seat heater switches
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 516
Seat ventilator switches
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 516
Heated steering wheel switch
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 515
Remote Touch
*
2, 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 496
Lexus Display Audio controller
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 402
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
1
: For vehicles with a 10.3-inch display, refer to
“NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*
2
: If equipped
*
3
: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
30
Pictorial index
IS300h_EE
Interior (Right-hand drive vehicles)
SRS airbags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 43
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 34
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 205
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 214
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 38
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 521
Inside lock buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 155
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 522
Assist grips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 532
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
31
Pictorial index
IS300h_EE
Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 219
Sun visors
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 527
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 527
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 518
Personal lights
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 518
Moon roof switches
*
3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 229
Intrusion sensor cancel switch
*
3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 103
Intrusion sensor and tilt sensor cancel switch
*
3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 103
1
2
3
4
5
6
*
1
: NEVER use a rearward facing child re-
straint on a seat protected by an AC-
TIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur. (P. 74)
*
2
: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.
*
3
: If equipped
32
Pictorial index
IS300h_EE
33
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
1-1. For safe use
Before driving.................................34
For safe driving ..............................36
Seat belts..........................................38
SRS airbags.....................................43
Airbag manual
on-off system ...............................53
Pop Up Hood.................................55
Safety information
for children ...................................58
Child restraint systems...............59
Installing child restraints............. 67
Exhaust gas precautions............ 76
1-2. Hybrid system
Hybrid system features ...............77
Hybrid system precautions........ 81
1-3. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system......................86
Double locking system...............99
Alarm ...............................................100
34
IS300h_EE
1-1. For safe use
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and
model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.
Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into
the floor mat eyelets.
Turn the upper knob of each retain-
ing hook (clip) to secure the floor
mats in place.
*
: Always align the marks.
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.
Before driving
Floor mat
1
*
2
35
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the ped-
als while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to
stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
When installing the driver’s floor mat
Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles,
even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.
Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
Before driving
Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in
the correct place with all the provided retain-
ing hooks (clips). Be especially careful to per-
form this check after cleaning the floor.
With the hybrid system stopped and the shift
lever in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor
to make sure it does not interfere with the
floor mat.
36
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
Adjust the angle of the seatback so
that you are sitting straight up and so
that you do not have to lean forward
to steer. (P. 205)
Adjust the seat so that you can
depress the pedals fully and so that
your arms bend slightly at the elbow
when gripping the steering wheel.
(P. 205)
Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to
the top of your ears. (P. 214)
Wear the seat belt correctly. (P. 38)
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehi-
cle. (P. 38)
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 59)
For safe driving
For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position before
driving.
Correct driving posture
1
2
Correct use of the seat belts
3
4
37
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and outside
rear view mirrors properly. (P. 219, 221)
Adjusting the mirrors
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effec-
tiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.
Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop
the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mech-
anism may also be damaged.
Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.
When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving
and take a break immediately.
38
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
Extend the shoulder belt so that it
comes fully over the shoulder, but
does not come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoulder.
Position the lap belt as low as possi-
ble over the hips.
Adjust the position of the seatback.
Sit up straight and well back in the
seat.
Do not twist the seat belt.
To fasten the seat belt, push the plate
into the buckle until a click sound is
heard.
To release the seat belt, press the
release button.
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle.
Correct use of the seat belts
Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Release button
1
2
39
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
Push the seat belt shoulder anchor
down while pressing the release but-
ton.
Push the seat belt shoulder anchor
up.
Move the height adjuster up and down
as needed until you hear a click.
The pretensioners help the seat belts to
quickly restrain the occupants by
retracting the seat belts when the vehi-
cle is subjected to certain types of
severe frontal or side collision.
The pretensioners do not activate in the
event of a minor frontal impact, a minor
side impact, a rear impact or a vehicle
rollover.
Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)
1
2
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
40
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
After the rear center seat belt has been used
Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you
lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can
move around fully.
Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 59)
When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, follow
the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (P. 38)
Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first
collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
Seat belt regulations
If seat belt regulations exist in the country where you reside, please contact any autho-
rized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer for seat belt
replacement or installation.
Stow the buckle as shown.
41
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
Wearing a seat belt
Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
Always wear a seat belt properly.
Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more
than one person at once, including children.
Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt
and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The
seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in
the seats.
Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt
in the proper way. (P. 38)
Women who are pregnant should position the
lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the
same manner as other occupants, extending
the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder
and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of
the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the
pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer
death or serious injury as a result of sudden
braking or a collision.
42
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
WARNING
People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 38)
When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around
a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the
belt.
Seat belt pretensioners
If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the
seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder.
The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to
do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious
injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. (P. 39)
Seat belt damage and wear
Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in
the door.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do
not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an
occupant from death or serious injury.
Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a
serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.
Have any necessary repairs carried out by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer. Inappropriate handling may lead to
incorrect operation.
43
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from
impact with interior components
SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work
together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
1
2
3
4
44
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag sys-
tem is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. As the airbags deploy, a chemi-
cal reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help
restrain the motion of the occupants.
SRS airbag system components
Airbag manual on-off switch
Front passenger airbag
Curtain shield airbags
Knee airbags
“PASSENGER AIR BAG” indica-
tor lights
Seat belt pretensioners and force
limiters
Side impact sensors (front)
Front side airbags
SRS warning light
Driver airbag
Side impact sensors (rear)
Driver’s seat position sensor
Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
Airbag sensor assembly
Front impact sensors
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
45
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
WARNING
SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or seri-
ous injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 50 - 75 mm (2 - 3 in.) of inflation,
placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear
margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to
your breastbone. If you sit less than 250 mm (10 in.) away now, you can change your
driving position in several ways:
Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals com-
fortably.
Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 250 mm (10 in.) dis-
tance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of
the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road,
raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle
has that feature.
If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward
your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended above, while still maintaining control
of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.
46
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
WARNING
SRS airbag precautions
The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The
front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback
adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously
injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recom-
mends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and prop-
erly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front
passenger seat. (P. 59)
Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean
against the dashboard.
Do not allow a child to stand in front of the
SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the
knees of a front passenger.
Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold
items on their knees.
Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail
or the front, side and rear pillars.
47
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
WARNING
SRS airbag precautions
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items
could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS cur-
tain shield airbags deploy.
If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to
remove it.
Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate
as they may interfere with inflation of the SRS airbags. Such accessories may prevent
the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags
to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passen-
ger seats toward the door or put their head or
hands outside the vehicle.
Do not attach anything to or lean anything
against areas such as the dashboard, steering
wheel pad and lower portion of the instru-
ment panel.
These items can become projectiles when the
SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags
deploy.
Do not attach anything to areas such as a door,
windshield glass, side door glass, front or rear
pillar, roof side rail and assist grip. (Except for
the speed limit sticker P. 652)
48
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
WARNING
SRS airbag precautions
Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag compo-
nents.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have
deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or
window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any resi-
due as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and
front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without
consulting any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing
death or serious injury.
Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument
panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails
Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant
compartment
Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows or winches
Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system
Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios (RF-transmitter) and
CD players
49
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the
extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.
A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the
front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot for several
minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
The windshield may crack.
The hybrid system will be stopped and fuel supply to the engine will be stopped.
(P. 82)
All of the doors will be unlocked. (P. 158)
SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set thresh-
old level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 20 - 30 km/h [12 - 18
mph] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:
If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move
or deform on impact
If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the
front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck
Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will
activate.
SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that
exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force
produced by an approximately 1500 kg [3300 lb.] vehicle colliding with the vehicle
cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate
speed of 20 - 30 km/h [12 - 18 mph]).
Both SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision.
50
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision
The SRS front airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)
The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear
collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a
collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of
the SRS front airbags may occur.
Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard sur-
face
Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
Landing hard or falling
Collision from the side
Collision from the rear
Vehicle rollover
51
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield
airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a
collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment.
The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear
collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear
collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.
Collision from the side to the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment
Collision from the side at an angle
Collision from the front
Collision from the rear
Vehicle rollover
Collision from the rear
Vehicle rollover
52
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
When to contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer
In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer as soon as
possible.
Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident that
was not severe enough to cause the SRS front
airbags to inflate.
A portion of a door or its surrounding area is
damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was
involved in an accident that was not severe
enough to cause the SRS side and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.
The pad section of the steering wheel, dash-
board near the front passenger airbag or
lower portion of the instrument panel is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
The surface of the seats with the SRS side
airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or
roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing
the SRS curtain shield airbags inside is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
53
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
“PASSENGER AIR BAG” indicator
The “ON” indicator light turns on when
the airbag system is on (only when the
power switch is in ON mode).
Airbag manual on-off switch
Insert the mechanical key into the cylin-
der and rotate to the “OFF” position.
The “OFF” indicator light turns on (only
when the power switch is in ON mode).
Airbag manual on-off system
This system deactivates the front passenger airbag and front passenger knee
airbag.
Only deactivate the airbags when using a child restraint system on the front
passenger seat.
1
2
Deactivating the front seat passenger airbag and front passenger knee
airbag
54
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
“PASSENGER AIR BAG” indicator information
If any of the following problems occur, it is possible that there is a malfunction in the sys-
tem. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Neither “ON” nor “OFF” comes on.
The indicator light does not change when the airbag manual on-off switch is switched
to “ON” or “OFF”.
WARNING
When installing a child restraint system
For safety reasons, always install a child restraint system in a rear seat. In the event that
the rear seat cannot be used, the front seat can be used as long as the airbag manual
on-off system is set to off.
If the airbag manual on-off system is left on, the strong impact of the airbag deployment
(inflation) may cause serious injury or even death.
When a child restraint system is not installed on the front passenger seat
Ensure that the airbag manual on-off system is set to on.
If it is left off, the airbag may not deploy in the event of an accident, which may result in
serious injury or even death.
55
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
When the sensors located at the back of the front bumper detect an impact with
a body, such as a pedestrian, which meets or exceeds the threshold level while
the vehicle is being driven within the operational speed range, the system
becomes operational and raises the rear portion of the hood.
Sensors
Hood
Lifters
Pop Up Hood
In the event of a frontal collision with a body, such as a pedestrian, the Pop Up
Hood system raises the rear portion of the hood to reduce the possibility of a
serious impact to the pedestrian’s head area by adding clearance to the
engine compartment.
Pop Up Hood mechanism
1
2
3
56
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
The Pop Up Hood will operate when the vehicle detects an impact such as the
following:
The front bumper detects a frontal impact equivalent to or greater than that of
a pedestrian while the vehicle being driven within the operational speed range
of approximately 25 to 55 km/h (16 to 34 mph). (The system is operated by
an impact of threshold level or greater, even in the case of a minor collision
that may not leave a trace on the front bumper. Also, depending on the impact
conditions or vehicle speed, the system may be operated by a collision with a
light or small object or a small animal.)
In other situations the system may operate when an impact is applied to the
lower part of the vehicle or front bumper, such as the following:
Colliding with a curb
Falling into a deep hole
•Landing hard
Hitting the slope of a parking lot, an undulating road, a protruding object or
falling object
Pop Up Hood operational conditions
WARNING
When the Pop Up Hood is operated
Do not pull the hood lock release lever. Doing so after the Pop Up Hood has oper-
ated will further raise the hood and may cause an injury.
Do not drive with the hood raised, as doing so may block the driver’s vision, possibly
causing an accident.
Do not forcibly push down the hood. As the popped up hood cannot be lowered by
hand, doing so may deform the hood or cause an injury.
If the Pop Up Hood has operated, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer. If the Pop Up
Hood has operated, stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Do not touch the lifters immediately after the Pop Up Hood has operated, as the lift-
ers may be hot and burn you.
57
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
Pop Up Hood precautions
Before scrapping your vehicle, make sure to contact any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
The Pop Up Hood system cannot be reused once it has operated. Have it replaced by
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Conditions under which the Pop Up Hood may not operate properly
The Pop Up Hood may not operate properly under the following conditions:
If a pedestrian collides with the right or left corner of the front bumper or the side of the
vehicle. As such impacts may be difficult to detect, the system may not operate.
If the vehicle speed is not detected correctly, such as if the vehicle is sliding sideways,
the system may not operate properly.
Conditions under which the Pop Up Hood may not operate
The Pop Up Hood may not operate in the following situations:
Colliding with a lying pedestrian
A frontal impact applied to the front bumper while driving at speeds outside of the
operational speed range
A side impact or rear impact
A vehicle rollover (In some accident situations, the Pop Up Hood may operate.)
NOTICE
Pop Up Hood precautions
Make sure to close the hood before driving, as the system may not operate properly if
the hood is not fully closed.
Make sure that all 4 tires are of the specified size and inflated to the specified tire
pressure (P. 691). If tires of a different size are used, the system may not operate
properly.
If something has hit the area around the front bumper, the sensors may be damaged
even if the Pop Up Hood has not operated. Have the vehicle inspected by any autho-
rized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Do not remove or repair the parts or wiring of the Pop Up Hood, as doing so may
cause accidental operation or prevent the system from operating properly. If repair or
replacement is necessary, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Do not remove such components as the front bumper, hood or suspension, or
replace them with non-genuine parts, as doing so may prevent the system from oper-
ating properly.
Do not install anything to the front bumper or hood, as doing so may prevent the sen-
sors from detecting an impact correctly and prevent the system from operating prop-
erly.
Do not close the hood with force or apply load to the lifters, as doing so may damage
the lifters and prevent the system from operating properly.
Do not modify the suspension, as changes made to the vehicle height may prevent
the system from operating properly.
58
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental con-
tact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.
Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to avoid
children opening the door while driving or operating the power window acci-
dentally.
Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body
parts, such as the power window, hood, trunk, seats etc.
Safety information for children
Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
WARNING
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use
the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a
danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof
or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold tempera-
tures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
59
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer
than installing one on the front passenger seat.
Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to
the age and size of the child.
For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint
system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 67)
If child restraint system regulations exist in the country where you reside,
please contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer for the child restraint system installation.
Lexus recommends that you use a child restraint system which conforms to
the regulation ECE No.44.
Child restraint systems
Lexus strongly urges the use of child restraint systems.
Points to remember
60
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 5 groups according to the
regulation ECE No.44:
Group 0: Up to 10 kg (22 lb.) (0 - 9 months)
Group 0
+
: Up to 13 kg (28 lb.) (0 - 2 years)
Group I: 9 to 18 kg (20 to 39 lb.) (9 months - 4 years)
Group II: 15 to 25 kg (34 to 55 lb.) (4 years - 7 years)
Group III: 22 to 36 kg (49 to 79 lb.) (6 years - 12 years)
In this owner’s manual, the following 3 types of popular child restraint systems
that can be secured with the seat belts are explained:
Types of child restraints
Baby seat
Child seat
Equal to Group 0 and 0
+
of ECE
No.44
Equal to Group 0
+
and I of ECE
No.44
Junior seat
Equal to Group II and III of ECE No.44
61
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
Information provided in the table shows your child restraint system suitability for
various seating positions.
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
U: Suitable for “universal” category child restraint system approved for the
use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category child restraint system
approved for the use in this mass group.
L1: Suitable for “LEXUS G 0
+
, BABY SAFE PLUS with SEAT BELT FIXA-
TION, BASE PLATFORM” (0 to 13 kg [0 to 28 lb.]) approved for the use
in this mass group.
L2: Suitable for “LEXUS KIDFIX” (15 to 36 kg [34 to 79 lb.]) approved for the
use in this mass group.
X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.
Child restraint system suitability for various seating positions
Front passenger seat
Rear seat
Airbag manual
on-off switch
ON OFF Outboard Center
0
Up to 10 kg (22 lb.)
(0 - 9 months)
X
Never put U
*
1
U
*
3
L1
*
3
X
0
+
Up to 13 kg (28 lb.)
(0 - 2 years)
X
Never put U
*
1
U
*
3
L1
*
3
X
I
9 to 18 kg
(20 to 39 lb.)
(9 months - 4 years)
Rear-
facing — X
Never put U
*
1
U
*
3
X
Forward-
facing — UF
*
1
II, III
15 to 36 kg
(34 to 79 lb.)
(4 - 12 years)
UF
*
1, 2
U
*
1, 2
U
*
2, 3
L2
*
2, 3
X
Mass groups
Seating
position
62
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
NOTE:
*
1
: Adjust the front seatback to the most upright position. Move the front seat cushion to
the fully rearward.
Adjust the seat cushion to the highest position. When the child restraint system
touched the ceiling, lower the seat position.
Follow these procedures
For installing a baby seat with support base
If the baby seat interferes with the seatback when latching the baby seat into the
support base, adjust the seatback rearward until there is no interference.
For installing a forward-facing child seat
If there is gap between the child seat and the seatback, tilt the seatback rearward
until good contact is achieved.
If the seatbelt shoulder anchor is ahead of the child seat belt guide, move the seat
cushion forward.
For installing a junior seat
If the child in your child restraint system is in a very upright position, adjust the
seatback to the most comfortable position.
If the seat belt shoulder anchor is ahead of the child seat belt guide, move the seat
cushion forward.
*
2
: Remove the head restraint if it interferes with your child restraint system.
*
3
: When using the left side seat for the child restraint system, do not sit in the center seat.
The child restraint system mentioned in the table may not be available outside of
the EU area.
Other child restraint systems which are different from the systems mentioned in
the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must be carefully checked
with the child restraint system manufacturer and retailer.
63
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
Information provided in the table shows your child restraint system suitability for
various seating positions.
Child restraint system suitability for various seating positions
(with ISOFIX rigid anchors)
Mass groups Size
class Fixture
Vehicle ISOFIX
positions Recommended
Child Restraint
Systems
Rear outboard
Carrycot
FISO/L1 X -
GISO/L2 X -
(1) X -
Group 0
Up to 10 kg
(22 lb.)
EISO/R1 IL
*
“LEXUS MINI”,
“LEXUS MIDI”
(1) X -
Group 0+
Up to 13 kg
(28 lb.)
EISO/R1 IL
*
“LEXUS MINI”,
“LEXUS MIDI”
DISO/R2 IL
*
CISO/R3 IL
*
(1) X -
Group I
9 to 18 kg
(20 to 39 lb.)
DISO/R2 IL
*
-
CISO/R3 IL
*
BISO/F2 IUF
*
, IL
*
“LEXUS MIDI”
B1 ISO/F2X IUF
*
, IL
*
“LEXUS MIDI”,
“LEXUS DUO+”
AISO/F3 IUF
*
, IL
*
“LEXUS MIDI”
(1) X -
64
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
(1) For the child restraint system which do not carry the ISO/XX size class
identification (A to G), for the applicable mass group, the car manufacturer
shall indicate the vehicle specific ISOFIX child restraint system(s) recom-
mended for each position.
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward-facing child restraint systems of universal cat-
egory approved for use in this mass group.
IL: Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems of the categories for “specific
vehicles”, “restricted”, or “semi-universal”, approved for use in this mass
group.
X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass
group and/or this size class.
*
: Remove the head restraint if it interferes with your child restraint system. Do not sit on
rear center seat when child restraint system is installed to rear left seat.
When using a “LEXUS MINI” or “LEXUS MIDI”, adjust the support leg and the
ISOFIX connectors as follows:
Lock the support leg where 4th hole
can be seen. (“LEXUS MIDI” rear-
facing, “LEXUS MINI”)
Lock the support leg where 6th hole
can be seen. (“LEXUS MIDI” for-
ward-facing only)
Lock the ISOFIX connectors where
numbers 4 and 5 can be seen.
The child restraint system mentioned in the table may not be available outside of
the EU area.
Other child restraint systems which are different from the systems mentioned in
the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must be carefully checked
with the child restraint system manufacturer and retailer.
1
2
3
65
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat
Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the
vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 38)
When you have to use a child restraint system
on the front passenger seat, adjust the following:
The seatback to the most upright position
The seat cushion to the highest position
The seat cushion to the fully rearward position
WARNING
Using a child restraint system
The use of a child restraint system not suitable for the vehicle may not properly secure
the infant or child. It may result in death or serious injury (in the event of sudden braking
or an accident).
66
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Child restraint precautions
For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be
properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age
and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint
system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between
you and the vehicle’s interior. This may cause death or serious injury to the child in the
event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the
size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is
safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
Never use a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat when the
airbag manual on-off switch is on. (P. 53)
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger air-
bag can cause death or serious injury to the child.
A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap
should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap
anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and
always move the seat as far back as possible because the front passenger airbag
could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or
seriously injured.
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front, center and rear pillars or roof side rails from which
the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in
the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield air-
bags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child
restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured
properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden
stop, sudden swerve or accident.
When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around
a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the
belt.
When the child restraint system is not in use
Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do
not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.
If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or
store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event
of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
67
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
Seat belts (An ELR belt requires a lock-
ing clip)
ISOFIX rigid anchors
Lower anchors are provided for the out-
board rear seats, behind the anchor
covers.
Anchor brackets (for top strap)
An anchor bracket is provided for the
outboard rear seats.
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly secure
child restraints to the seats using a seat belt or ISOFIX rigid anchors. Attach
the top strap when installing a child restraint.
68
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
Rear-facing Baby seat/child seat
Place the child restraint system
on the rear seat facing the rear of
the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
If your child restraint system is not
equipped with a lock-off (a seat belt
locking feature), secure the child
restraint system using a locking clip.
After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that
it is installed securely.
Installing child restraints using a seat belt
1
2
69
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
Forward-facing Child seat
Remove the head restraint if it
interferes with your child restraint
system.
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
If your child restraint system is not
equipped with a lock-off (a seat belt
locking feature), secure the child
restraint system using a locking clip.
After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that
it is installed securely.
1
2
3
70
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
Junior seat
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
Sit the child in the child restraint
system. Fit the seat belt to the
child restraint system according
to the manufacturer’s instructions
and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is cor-
rectly positioned over the child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P. 38)
Push the buckle release button and fully
retract the seat belt.
1
2
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
71
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
Remove the head restraint if it inter-
feres with your child restraint system.
Latch the buckles onto the exclusive
fixing bars.
If the child restraint has a top strap, the
top strap should be latched onto the
anchor bracket.
Installation with ISOFIX rigid anchor
1
2
72
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
Remove the head restraint if it inter-
feres with your child restraint system.
Secure the child restraint system
using the seat belt or ISOFIX rigid
anchors.
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap.
Make sure the top strap is securely
latched.
When installing a child restraint system
You need a locking clip to install the child restraint system. Follow the instructions pro-
vided by the manufacturer of the system. If your child restraint system does not provide a
locking clip, you can purchase the following item from any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer:
Locking clip for child restraint system
(Part No. 73119-22010)
Child restraint systems with a top strap
1
2
3
73
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
WARNING
When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the
child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers
may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerv-
ing or an accident.
If the driver’s seat interferes with the child
restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand rear seat (left-hand
drive vehicles) or the left-hand rear seat
(right-hand drive vehicles).
Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does
not interfere with the child restraint system.
When installing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious
injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).
74
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
WARNING
When installing a child restraint system
Never use a rear-facing child restraint system
on the front passenger seat when the airbag
manual on-off switch is on. (P. 53)
The force of the rapid inflation of the front
passenger airbag can cause death or serious
injury to children in the event of an accident.
There is a label(s) on the passenger side sun
visor, indicating it is forbidden to attach a
rear-facing child restraint system to the front
passenger seat.
Details of the label(s) are shown in the illus-
tration below.
75
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
WARNING
When installing a child restraint system
If child restraint system regulations exist in the country where you reside, please con-
tact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer for the child restraint system installation.
When a junior seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s
neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. Failing to do so may result in
death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an acci-
dent.
Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure
that it has been securely installed.
After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the lower anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the
anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system. Make sure
the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to
the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerve or an
accident.
76
1-1. For safe use
IS300h_EE
Exhaust gas precautions
Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if inhaled.
WARNING
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident
caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
Important points while driving
Keep the trunk lid closed.
If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the trunk lid is closed, open the
windows and have the vehicle inspected at any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer as soon as possible.
When parking
If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the
hybrid system.
Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system on for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure
that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build-up, or where it is
snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the hybrid system is operat-
ing, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused
by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle
inspected and repaired by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
77
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
1-2. Hybrid system
The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item.
Gasoline engine
Electric motor (traction motor)
Hybrid system features
Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from conven-
tional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics of your
vehicle, and operate it with care.
The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an electric
motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving fuel effi-
ciency and reducing exhaust emissions.
1
2
78
1-2. Hybrid system
IS300h_EE
When stopped/during start off
The gasoline engine stops
*
when the vehicle is stopped. During start off, the
electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At slow speeds or when
traveling down a gentle slope, the engine is stopped
*
and the electric motor
(traction motor) is used.
When the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) is not being
charged.
*
: When the hybrid battery (traction battery) requires charging or the engine is warm-
ing up, etc., the gasoline engine will not automatically stop. (P. 79)
During normal driving
The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor (traction
motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction battery) as necessary.
When accelerating sharply
When the accelerator pedal is depressed heavily, the power of the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) is added to that of the gasoline engine via the electric
motor (traction motor).
When braking (regenerative braking)
The wheels operate the electric motor (traction motor) as a power generator,
and the hybrid battery (traction battery) is charged.
79
1-2. Hybrid system
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
Regenerative braking
In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and decelera-
tion force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery).
The accelerator pedal is released while driving with the shift lever in D or S.
The brake pedal is depressed while driving with the shift lever in D or S.
EV indicator
Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop
The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop automati-
cally in the following conditions:
During gasoline engine warm-up
During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging
When the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is high or low
When the heater is switched on
Charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)
As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery does not
need to be charged from an outside source. However, if the vehicle is left parked for a
long time the hybrid battery (traction battery) will slowly discharge. For this reason, be
sure to drive the vehicle at least once every few months for at least 30 minutes or 16 km
(10 miles). If the hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes fully discharged and you are
unable to start the hybrid system, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus autho-
rized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Charging the 12-volt battery
P. 671
The EV indicator comes on when the vehicle is
driven using only the electric motor (traction
motor) or the gasoline engine is stopped.
80
1-2. Hybrid system
IS300h_EE
After the 12-volt battery has discharged or when the terminal has been removed and
installed during exchange, etc.
The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is being driven by the hybrid battery
(traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle
There may be no engine sound or vibration even though the vehicle is able to move with
the “READY” indicator is illuminated. For safety, apply the parking brake and make sure
to shift the shift lever to P when parked.
The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is operating and
are not a malfunction:
Motor sounds may be heard from under the vehicle.
Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) behind the rear seats
when the hybrid system starts or stops.
Relay operating sounds such as a snap or soft clank will be emitted from the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery), under the rear seats, when the hybrid system is started or
stopped.
Sounds from the hybrid system may be heard when the trunk lid is open.
Sounds may be heard from the transmission when the gasoline engine starts or stops,
when driving at low speeds, or during idling.
Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply.
Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal is depressed
or as the accelerator pedal is released.
Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops.
Cooling fan sounds may be heard from the air intake vent on the right side of the rear
seatback.
Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal
Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal. Do not dispose of the
vehicle yourself.
Customization
Settings (e.g. on/off operation of the EV indicator) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 696)
81
1-2. Hybrid system
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item.
Hybrid system precautions
Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it is a high voltage system
(about 650 V at maximum) as well as contains parts that become extremely
hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey the warning labels attached to
the vehicle.
Warning label
Power control unit
Electric motor (traction motor)
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
Service plug
High voltage cables (orange)
Air conditioning compressor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
82
1-2. Hybrid system
IS300h_EE
There is an air intake vent on the right
side of the rear seatback for the pur-
pose of cooling the hybrid battery
(traction battery). If the vent becomes
blocked, the hybrid battery may over-
heat, leading to a reduction in hybrid
battery output.
When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor, the emergency
shut off system blocks the high voltage current and stops the fuel pump to mini-
mize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage. If the emergency shut off system
activates, your vehicle will not restart. To restart the hybrid system, contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in the hybrid
system or an improper operation is attempted.
If a warning message is shown on the
multi-information display, read the
message and follow the instructions.
(
P. 618)
Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent
Emergency shut off system
Hybrid warning message
83
1-2. Hybrid system
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed, or the 12-volt battery is dis-
connected
The hybrid system may not start. In this case, try to start the system again. If the “READY”
indicator does not come on, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Running out of fuel
When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be started, refuel the
vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel level warning light (P. 613)
go off. If there is only a small amount of fuel, the hybrid system may not be able to start.
(The standard amount of fuel is about 10 L [2.7 gal., 2.2 Imp. gal.], when the vehicle is on
a level surface. This value may vary when the vehicle is on a slope. Add extra fuel when
the vehicle is inclined.)
Electromagnetic waves
High voltage parts and cables on hybrid vehicles incorporate electromagnetic shield-
ing, and therefore emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as
conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances.
Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced radio parts.
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a limited service life. The lifespan of the hybrid
battery (traction battery) can change in accordance with driving style and driving condi-
tions.
Declaration of conformity
This model conforms to hydrogen emissions according to regulation ECE100 (Battery
electric vehicle safety).
84
1-2. Hybrid system
IS300h_EE
WARNING
High voltage precautions
This vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC and
AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric shock that
may result in death or serious injury.
Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts, cables or their
connectors.
The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage. Be
careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey the warn-
ing labels attached to the vehicle.
Road accident cautions
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury:
Pull your vehicle off the road, apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, and
turn the hybrid system off.
Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables and connectors.
If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may
occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.
If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch the fluid as it may be strong alkaline electrolyte
from the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact with your skin or
eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water or, if possible, boric acid
solution. Seek immediate medical attention.
If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible. Never use a
fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even a small amount of
water may be dangerous.
If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with rear wheels raised. If the wheels con-
nected to the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground when towing, the
motor may continue to generate electricity. This may cause a fire. (P. 605)
Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked onto
the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as soon as
possible.
Never try to open the service plug access
hole located under the luggage under tray.
The service plug is used only when the vehicle
is serviced and is subject to high voltage.
85
1-2. Hybrid system
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
Never resell, hand over or modify the hybrid battery. To prevent accidents, hybrid
batteries that have been removed from a disposed vehicle are collected through any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer. Do
not dispose of the battery yourself.
Unless the battery is properly collected, the following may occur, resulting in death
or serious injury:
The hybrid battery may be illegally disposed of or dumped, and it is hazardous to
the environment or someone may touch a high voltage part, resulting in an electric
shock.
The hybrid battery is intended to be used exclusively with your hybrid vehicle. If
the hybrid battery is used outside of your vehicle or modified in any way, accidents
such as electric shock, heat generation, smoke generation, an explosion and elec-
trolyte leakage may occur.
When reselling or handing over your vehicle, the possibility of an accident is
extremely high because the person receiving the vehicle may not be aware of these
dangers.
If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been removed, there is
a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their connectors
are touched. In the event that your vehicle must be disposed of, the hybrid battery
must be disposed of by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer. If the hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, it may cause
electric shock that can result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent
Do not place objects that will block the air intake vent. The hybrid battery (traction
battery) may overheat and be damaged.
Clean the air intake vent regularly to prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery)
from overheating.
Do not get water or foreign materials in the air intake vent as this may cause a short
circuit and damage the hybrid battery (traction battery).
Do not carry large amounts of water such as water cooler bottles in the vehicle. If
water spills onto the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery may be damaged.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
86
IS300h_EE
1-3. Theft deterrent system
The indicator light flashes after the
power switch has been turned off to
indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after
the power switch has been turned to
ACCESSORY or ON mode to indi-
cate that the system has been canceled.
System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.
Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key registered to the security system (key
with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
Immobilizer system
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the hybrid sys-
tem from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s
on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee
absolute security against all vehicle thefts.
87
1-3. Theft deterrent system
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
Certifications for the immobilizer system
88
1-3. Theft deterrent system
IS300h_EE
89
1-3. Theft deterrent system
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
90
1-3. Theft deterrent system
IS300h_EE
91
1-3. Theft deterrent system
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
92
1-3. Theft deterrent system
IS300h_EE
93
1-3. Theft deterrent system
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
94
1-3. Theft deterrent system
IS300h_EE
95
1-3. Theft deterrent system
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
96
1-3. Theft deterrent system
IS300h_EE
97
1-3. Theft deterrent system
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
98
1-3. Theft deterrent system
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of
the system cannot be guaranteed.
99
1-3. Theft deterrent system
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
Vehicles employing this system have
labels on the window glass of both front
doors.
Turn the power switch off, have all the passengers exit the vehicle and ensure that
all the doors are closed.
Using the entry function:
Touch the sensor area on the outside door handle twice within 5 seconds.
Using the wireless remote control:
Press twice within 5 seconds.
Using the entry function: Hold the outside door handle.
Using the wireless remote control: Press .
Double locking system
Unauthorized access to the vehicle is prevented by disabling the door unlock-
ing function from both the interior and exterior of the vehicle.
Setting the double locking system
Canceling the double locking system
WARNING
Double locking system precaution
Never activate the double locking system when there are people in the vehicle
because all the doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle.
100
1-3. Theft deterrent system
IS300h_EE
The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is detected.
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set:
A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the
entry function (if equipped) or wireless remote control. (The door will lock
again automatically.)
The hood is opened.
The intrusion sensor detects something moving inside the vehicle. (An
intruder gets in the vehicle.) (if equipped)
The tilt sensor detects a change of vehicle inclination. (if equipped)
Close the doors, trunk and hood, and
lock all the doors using the entry func-
tion (if equipped) or wireless remote
control. The system will be set automat-
ically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from being
on to flashing when the system is set.
Alarm
: If equipped
The alarm
Setting the alarm system
101
1-3. Theft deterrent system
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm:
Unlock the doors or open the trunk using the entry function (if equipped) or
wireless remote control.
Start the hybrid system. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few
seconds.)
System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the follow-
ing:
Nobody is in the vehicle.
The windows and moon roof (if equipped) are closed before the alarm is set.
No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
Deactivating or stopping the alarm
102
1-3. Theft deterrent system
IS300h_EE
Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
Alarm-operated door lock
In the following cases, depending on the situation, the door may automatically lock to
prevent improper entry into the vehicle:
When a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door and the alarm is activated.
While the alarm is activated, a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door.
When recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery
The doors are unlocked using the mechanical
key.
The trunk is opened using the mechanical key.
A person inside the vehicle opens a door or
the trunk or hood, or unlocks the vehicle.
The 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced
when the vehicle is locked. (P. 671)
103
1-3. Theft deterrent system
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
The intrusion sensor detects intruders or movement in the vehicle.
The tilt sensor detects changes in vehicle inclination, such as when the vehicle
is towed away.
This system is designed to deter and prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee
absolute security against all intrusions.
Setting the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor
The intrusion sensor and tilt sensor will be set automatically when the alarm is
set. (P. 100)
Canceling the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor
If you are leaving pets or other moving things inside the vehicle, make sure to
disable the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor before setting the alarm, as they will
respond to movement inside the vehicle.
Turn the power switch off.
Press the intrusion sensor and tilt
sensor cancel switch.
Press the switch again to re-enable
the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor.
Each time the intrusion sensor is
canceled/set, a message will be
shown on the multi-information dis-
play in the instrument cluster.
NOTICE
To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of
the system cannot be guaranteed.
Intrusion sensor (if equipped) /Intrusion sensor and tilt sensor (if
equipped)
1
2
104
1-3. Theft deterrent system
IS300h_EE
Canceling and automatic re-enabling of the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor
The alarm will still be set even when the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor are canceled.
After the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor are canceled, pressing the power switch or
unlocking the doors using the entry function (if equipped) or wireless remote control
will re-enable the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor.
The intrusion sensor and tilt sensor will automatically be re-enabled when the alarm
system is deactivated.
Intrusion sensor detection considerations
The sensor may trigger the alarm in the following situations:
Places with extreme vibrations or noises, or situations in which the vehicle is subject to
repeated impacts or vibrations:
When parked in a parking garage
When the vehicle is transported on a ferry, trailer, train, etc.
When ice adhering to the vehicle is removed
When the vehicle is in an automatic or high-pressure car wash
When in a hail or lightning storm
A window or the moon roof is open.
In this case, the sensor may detect the follow-
ing:
Wind or the movement of objects such as
leaves and insects inside the vehicle
Ultrasonic waves emitted from devices
such as the intrusion sensors of other vehi-
cles
The movement of people outside the vehi-
cle
Unstable items, such as dangling accessories
or clothes hanging on the coat hooks, are in
the vehicle.
105
1-3. Theft deterrent system
1
For safety and security
IS300h_EE
Tilt sensor detection considerations
The sensor may trigger the alarm in the following situations:
The vehicle is transported by a ferry, trailer, train, etc.
The vehicle is parked in a parking garage.
The vehicle is inside a car wash that moves the vehicle.
Any of the tires loses air pressure.
The vehicle is jacked up.
An earthquake occurs or the road caves in.
NOTICE
To ensure the intrusion sensor function correctly
Installing accessories other than genuine Lexus parts or leaving objects between the
driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat may reduce the detection performance.
To ensure that the sensors operate properly,
do not touch or cover them.
Do not spray air fresheners or other products
directly into the sensor holes.
106
1-3. Theft deterrent system
IS300h_EE
107
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights
and indicators............................108
Gauges and meters.....................113
Multi-information display ..........119
Energy monitor/
consumption screen............... 136
108
IS300h_EE
2. Instrument cluster
Except F SPORT models
F SPORT models
The units used on the meters may differ depending on the target region.
Warning lights and indicators
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and center panel
inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all warning
lights and indicators illuminated.
109
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle systems.
*
1
: These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that a
system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or
after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come
on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
*
2
: This light illuminates on the center panel.
Warning lights
*
1
Brake system warning light
(P. 611)
*
1
(if equipped)
PCS warning light
(P. 613)
*
1
Brake system warning light
(P. 611)
*
1
Slip indicator (P. 613)
*
1
(if equipped)
Charging system warning
light (P. 611)
Open door warning light
(P. 613)
*
1
Malfunction indicator
lamp (P. 611)
Low fuel level warning light
(P. 613)
*
1
SRS warning light
(P. 612)
Driver’s and front passen-
ger’s seat belt reminder light
(P. 614)
*
1
ABS warning light
(P. 612)
*
2
Rear passengers’ seat belt
reminder lights (P. 614)
Parking brake warning light
(P. 612)
*
1
Master warning light
(P. 614)
*
1
Electric power steering
system warning light
(P. 612)
*
1
Tire pressure warning light
(P. 614)
(if equipped)
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert) indicator(P. 612)
110
2. Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various sys-
tems.
Indicators
Turn signal indicator
(P. 265)
*
2
(if equipped)
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert) indicator (P. 312)
Tail light indicator
(P. 269)
(if equipped)
Lexus parking assist-sensor
indicator (P. 341)
Headlight high beam
indicator (P. 269)
*
1, 2
Slip indicator (P. 386)
*
1
(if equipped)
Automatic High Beam
indicator (P. 272)
*
1
VSC OFF indicator
(P. 387)
Rear fog light indicator
(P. 276)
*
1, 3
(if equipped)
PCS warning light
(P. 305)
(if equipped)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 325, 337)
*
4, 5
(if equipped)
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
outside rear view mirror
indicators (P. 366)
(if equipped)
Dynamic radar cruise con-
trol indicator (P. 325)
*
6
Security indicator
(P. 86, 100)
(if equipped)
Cruise control “SET”
indicator (P. 325, 337)
*
7
Low outside temperature
indicator (P. 113)
(if equipped)
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert) indicator (P. 312)
“READY” indicator
(P. 251)
(if equipped)
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert) indicator (P. 312) EV indicator (P. 79)
111
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
*
1
: These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that a
system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or
after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come
on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
*
2
: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*
3
: The light comes on when the system is turned off.
*
4
: In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators illuminate
in the following situations:
When the power switch is turned to ON mode while the BSM main switch is set to
ON.
When the BSM main switch is set to ON while the power switch is in ON mode.
If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators will
turn off after a few seconds.
If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do not turn off,
there may be a malfunction in the system.
If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
*
8
EV drive mode indicator
(P. 256)
*
9
(if equipped)
“SPORT S” indicator
(P. 381)
*
9
EV drive mode indicator
(P. 256)
*
9
(if equipped)
“SPORT S+” indicator
(P. 381)
*
8
Eco drive mode indicator
(P. 381)
*
9
(if equipped)
“CUSTOMIZE” indicator
(P. 381)
*
9
Eco drive mode indicator
(P. 381)
Snow mode indicator
(P. 259)
*
8
“SPORT” indicator
(P. 381)
*
1, 6
“PASSENGER AIR
BAG” indicator
(P. 53)
*
9
(if equipped)
“SPORT” indicator
(P. 381)
112
2. Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
*
5
: This light illuminates on the outside rear view mirrors.
*
6
: This light illuminates on the center panel.
*
7
: When the outside temperature is approximately 3°C (37°F) or lower, the indicator
will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on.
*
8
: Except F SPORT models
*
9
: F SPORT models
WARNING
If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when
you start the hybrid system, this could mean that these systems are not available to help
protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reli-
able repairer immediately if this occurs.
113
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Except F SPORT models
F SPORT models
When the main meter is moved to the right, some of the meter displays and
the gauge layout will change.
Main meter in center position
Gauges and meters
114
2. Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Main meter moved to the right
The units used on the meters may differ depending on the target region.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
Hybrid System Indicator
Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level (P. 117)
This display changes to a tachometer depending on the drive mode, and can be set
to show the tachometer in any drive mode on the settings display. (P. 128)
Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°C (-40°F) to 50°C
(122°F). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient tempera-
ture is 3°C (37°F) or lower.
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (P. 119)
Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction (P. 618)
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Shift position and shift range (P. 258)
Odometer and trip meter display (P. 133)
1
2
3
7
4
5
6
7
8
115
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Rev indicator (F SPORT models)
When the engine speed reaches a
set speed, a ring-shaped indicator
will be displayed on the tachometer.
The desired engine speed at which
the Rev indicator will begin to be dis-
played can be set on of the multi-
information display. (P. 128)
Rev peak (F SPORT models)
The engine speed reaches or
exceeds 4000 r/min, an afterimage
of the tachometer will be displayed
at the highest engine speed for
approximately 0.5 seconds.
116
2. Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Main meter (F SPORT models)
Moves between center and right-
side positions.
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Darker
Brighter
The meters and display illuminate when
The power switch is in ON mode.
Instrument panel brightness adjustment
The instrument panel brightness levels when the tail lights are on and off can be adjusted
individually. However, when the surroundings are bright (daytime, etc.), turning on the tail
lights will not change the instrument panel brightness.
Changing the display
Instrument panel light control
1
2
117
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Hybrid System Indicator
Charge area
Shows regenerative charging.
Hybrid Eco area
Shows that gasoline engine power is not being used very often.
The gasoline engine will automatically stop and restart under various conditions.
Eco area
Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner.
Power area
Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is being exceeded (during full power driving
etc.)
Depending on the selected driving mode, the Hybrid System Indicator or tachometer
will be displayed. The Hybrid System Indicator or tachometer can be set to always be
displayed on of the multi-information display. (P. 128)
The Hybrid System Indicator is displayed in the following situations:
When the tachometer setting is set to change according to the driving mode and a
driving mode other than sport mode is selected
When the tachometer setting is set to always display the Hybrid System Indicator
By keeping the indicator needle (except F SPORT models) or bar display (F SPORT
models) within the Eco area, more Eco-friendly driving can be achieved.
Charge area indicates regeneration
*
status. Regenerated energy will be used to
charge the hybrid battery (traction battery).
*
: When used in this manual, regeneration refers to the conversion of energy created by
the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy.
Except F SPORT models
F SPORT models
1
2
3
4
118
2. Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Tachometer
Hybrid System Indicator switches to the tachometer when driving mode is in sport mode.
The settings of the tachometer display can be changed on the multi-information display.
(P. 128)
Engine speed
On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is precisely controlled in order to help improve fuel
efficiency and reduce exhaust emissions etc.
There are times when the engine speed that is displayed may differ even when vehicle
operation and driving conditions are the same.
Outside temperature display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the
display may take longer than normal to change.
When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 20 km/h [12 mph])
When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a
garage, tunnel, etc.)
When “” or “E” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning.
Take your vehicle to any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
Pop-up display
In some situations, such as when a switch operation is performed, a pop-up display will
be temporarily displayed on the multi-information display or the odometer/trip meter
screen (F SPORT models).
Some pop-up displays can be set on/off. (P. 128)
Customization
The meter display can be customized on the multi-information display. (P. 128)
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the engine and its components
Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates
the maximum engine speed.
The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red
zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the
engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 674)
119
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related
data, such as the current outside temperature. The multi-information display can
also be used to change the display settings and other settings.
Except F SPORT models
Menu icon display area
Displays the following items.
When a menu icon is not selected, the outside temperature is displayed.
•Menu icons (P. 124)
•Outside temperature (P. 113)
Content display area
A variety of information can be displayed by selecting a menu icon. Additionally,
warning or advice pop-up displays will be displayed in some situations.
•Menu icon content (P. 124)
Warning message (P. 618)
Indicator/shift position display area
Displays the following items:
Indicators (P. 108)
•Shift position display (P. 258)
RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped) (P. 320)
Multi-information display
Summary of functions
1
2
3
120
2. Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Odometer/trip meter display area (P. 133)
Displays the following items:
Odometer/trip meter
Distance until next engine oil change
•Speed warning
Meter control switches (P. 122)
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button (P. 123)
F SPORT models
Main meter in center position
Main meter moved to the right
4
5
6
121
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Outside temperature (P. 113)
Indicator/shift position display area
Displays the following items:
Indicators (P. 108)
•Shift position display (P. 258)
RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped) (P. 320)
Content display area
Main meter in center position:
Displays various drive information on the main meter. Additionally, warning or
advice pop-up displays will be displayed in some situations.
Drive information (P. 125)
Warning message (P. 618)
Main meter moved to the right:
A variety of information can be displayed by selecting a menu icon. Additionally,
warning or advice pop-up displays will be displayed in some situations.
•Menu icon content (P. 124)
Warning message (P. 618)
Odometer/trip meter display area (P. 133)
Displays the following items:
Odometer/trip meter
Distance until next engine oil change
•Speed warning
Menu icons (P. 124)
Meter control switches (P. 122)
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button (P. 123)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
122
2. Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Using the content display area
The content display area is operated using the meter control switches.
: Select menu icons
: Change displayed con-
tent, scroll up/down the
screen and move the
cursor
Press: Enter/Set
Press and hold: Reset
Return to the previous screen
Pressing and holding the switch will display the first screen of the selected menu
icon.
Except F SPORT models
Press: Display the top screen
Press and hold: Register current screen as the top screen
F SPORT models
Move the main meter
When the main meter moves to the right, the menu icons will be displayed on the
left side.
Registering a top screen (except F SPORT models)
The displayed top screen can be changed to a registered screen of your
choice.
To register a screen as the top screen, display the desired screen and press
and hold .
A message asking to confirm if registration is desired will be displayed. If the
selected screen cannot be registered, a registration failure message will be dis-
played.
When no screen has been registered, the drive information screen will be dis-
played.
Using the multi-information display
1
2
3
4
4
123
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Resetting drive information
To reset the average fuel economy (after reset)/average vehicle speed (after
reset)/elapsed time (after reset) that are displayed on , display the desired
item and press and hold .
If both of the displayed items are resettable, a message will be displayed asking
which item(s) to reset.
Using the odometer/trip meter display area
Items in this area are operated using the odometer/trip meter and trip meter
reset button.
Press: Change displayed item
Each time the button is pressed, the
displayed item will be changed.
Press and hold: Reset
Display the desired trip meter and
press and hold the button to reset the
trip meter.
124
2. Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Select a menu icon to display its content.
Drive information (P. 125)
Select to display various drive data.
Navigation system-linked display (if equipped)
Select to display the following navigation system-linked information.
•Route guidance
Compass display (heading-up display)
Audio system-linked display (if equipped)
Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the meter using the meter
control switches.
Driving assist system information (if equipped)
Select to display the operational status of the following systems:
Cruise control (P. 337)
Dynamic radar cruise control (P. 325)
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) (P. 312)
RSA (Road Sign Assist) (P. 320)
Warning message display (P. 618)
Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a malfunction is
detected.
Settings display (P. 128)
Select to change the meter display settings and other settings.
Menu icons
125
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
F SPORT models: Some drive information items can only be displayed when the
main meter is in the center position or when it is moved to the right.
Drive information 1/Drive information 2/Drive information 3
Displays drive information such as the following.
F SPORT models (when the main meter is in the center position): Each item is dis-
played separately.
Drive information 1
Current fuel consumption
Average fuel economy (after reset)
Drive information 2
Distance (driving range)
Average vehicle speed (after reset)
Drive information 3
Average fuel economy (after refuel)
Elapsed time (after start)
Displayed items (listed below) can be changed on . (P. 128)
Drive information (
)
Item Content
Current fuel consumption Displays instantaneous current fuel consumption
Average fuel
economy
After reset Displays average fuel consumption since display
reset
*
1, 2
After start Displays average fuel consumption since hybrid
system start
*
2
After refuel Displays average fuel consumption since refuel
*
2, 3
Average
vehicle
speed
After reset Displays average vehicle speed since display
reset
*
1
After start Displays average vehicle speed since hybrid sys-
tem start
Elapsed time After reset Displays elapsed time since display reset
*
1
After start Displays elapsed time since hybrid system start
Distance Driving range Displays driving range with remaining fuel
*
3, 4
After start Displays drive distance since vehicle start
Other Blank No item
126
2. Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
*
1
: Resetting: P. 123
*
2
: Use the displayed fuel consumption as a reference.
*
3
: When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be
updated.
When refueling, turn the power switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the
power switch off, the display may not be updated.
*
4
: This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the
actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
Energy monitor
P. 136
G-force (if equipped)
*
1
Displays lateral G-forces on the vehicle.
Acceleration G-force on the
vehicle
Current G-force value (analyzed
value of front/rear and left/right
G-forces)
Record of the maximum G-forces
This display is intended for use as a guideline. Depending on factors such as the
road surface condition, temperature and vehicle speed, the display may not show
the actual condition of the vehicle.
Resetting the record of maximum G-forces
Press and hold to reset the record.
Peak hold function
If lateral G-forces of 0.5 G or greater are generated, the G-force value
display will turn amber and be held for 2 seconds.
*
1
: For F SPORT models, this item is not available when the main meter is in the center
position.
1
2
3
127
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Vehicle sway warning (if equipped)
*
1
Detects the sway of the vehicle within a lane, which is often associated with a
decrease in the driver’s attention level, and displays the decrease in attention
using a bar display.
The shorter the bar length, the more the driver may need to rest.
This display is a part of the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) sys-
tem. The display is enabled when the operating conditions of the vehicle sway
warning are met. (P. 312)
*
1
: For F SPORT models, this item is not available when the main meter is in the center
position.
Units (if equipped)
*
2
The units of measure used can be changed while driving.
Unlike the units setting performed on , the units setting performed on can
be changed while driving.
*
2
: For F SPORT models, this item is not available when the main meter is in the right-side
position.
Blank (No items)
Displays no drive information contents.
128
2. Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Changing settings
Use the meter control switches on the steering wheel to change settings.
Press or to select .
Operate the switches to select a desired item.
Change the setting by referring to the message displayed on the screen.
Setting items
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) (if equipped)
(P. 312)
The following LDA system settings can be changed:
Settings display (
)
1
2
3
Item Settings Details
Steering assist On Select to enable/disable steering
wheel assistance.
Off
Alert
Select to set a vibrator or buzzer as
the notification method used to warn
the driver.
Sensitivity High Select to set the warning sensitivity.
Standard
Sway warning On Select to enable/disable the vehicle
sway warning.
Off
Sway sensitivity
High
Select to set the vehicle sway warning
sensitivity.
Standard
Low
129
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
PCS (Pre-collision system) (if equipped) (P. 301)
The following pre-collision system settings can be changed:
Speed Warning (P. 133)
The following speed warning settings can be changed:
*
: Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.
Item Settings Details
PCS On Select to enable/disable the pre-colli-
sion system.
Off
Warning sensitivity Select to change the warning timing.
Item Settings Details
Speed warning On Select to enable/disable the speed
warning.
Off
Speed setting 30 to 260 km/h
(20 to 160 mph)
*
Select to set the vehicle speed at
which the speed warning will begin
operating.
130
2. Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped) (P. 320)
The following RSA settings can be changed:
*
: Vehicles with a navigation system
Item Settings Details
RSA On Select to enable/disable the RSA.
Off
Excess speed
notification
No notification Select to set the notification method
used to warn the driver if the vehicle
speed exceeds the speed displayed
on the speed limit sign on the multi-
information display.
Display only
Display and buzzer
Excess speed notifica-
tion level
10 km/h (5 mph) Select to set the speed threshold over
which the excess speed notification
will start to operate when a speed
limit sign is displayed on the multi-
information display.
5 km/h (3 mph)
2 km/h (1 mph)
Other notifications
No notification Select to set the notification method
used to warn the driver if the system
detects the following:
The vehicle is overtaking when a no
overtaking sign is displayed on the
multi-information display.
The vehicle is entering a no-entry
area when a no-entry sign is dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play.
*
Display only
Display and buzzer
131
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Vehicle settings
Meter settings
Item Settings Details
Oil maintenance
Engine oil maintenance data reset
Select to reset the engine oil mainte-
nance information (message indicat-
ing maintenance is required and
distance until the next oil change)
after engine oil maintenance is per-
formed. (P. 549)
Item Settings Details
Language Select to change the language dis-
played.
Units Select to change the units of measure
displayed.
(EV indicator) On Select to enable/disable the EV indi-
cator. (P. 79)
Off
Switch settings (except F SPORT mod-
els)
Select to display how to change the
top screen.
Drive information 1 Select to select up to 2 items that will
be displayed on each Drive informa-
tion screen (Drive information 1
screen, Drive information 2 screen,
and Drive information 3 screen)
respectively.
(Selectable items: P. 125)
Drive information 2
Drive information 3
132
2. Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Pop-up display
Intersection guid-
ance (if equipped)
Select to enable/disable the pop-up
display.
Incoming calls (if
equipped)
Brightness adjust-
ment
Color (except F
SPORT models) 2 available colors Select to set the color of the cursor on
the multi-information display.
Needle (F SPORT
models) 3 available colors Select to set the tachometer needle
color.
Tachometer setting
Change according
to driving mode Select to set the tachometer or
Hybrid System Indicator to always be
displayed or be changed to automati-
cally according to the driving mode.
Always tachometer
Always Hybrid Sys-
tem Indicator
Rev indicator (F
SPORT models)
On Select to enable/disable the Rev indi-
cator. (P. 115)
Off
Rev setting
Select to set the desired engine speed
at which the Rev indicator will begin
to be displayed.
Selectable engine speed range:
2000 r/min to 6000 r/min
Rev peak (F SPORT
models)
On Select to enable/disable the Rev peak.
(P. 115)
Off
Default setting Select to reset the meter display set-
tings to the default setting.
Item Settings Details
133
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Display items
Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter A/trip meter B
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last
reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different dis-
tances independently.
To reset, display the desired trip meter and press and hold the odometer/trip meter
and trip meter reset button.
Distance until next engine oil change
Displays the distance the vehicle can be driven until an oil change is neces-
sary.
Pop-up display
In some situations the following will be temporarily displayed:
Distance until next engine oil change
Displays the distance until the next engine oil change. This display will be dis-
played in the following situations:
When the power switch is turned to ON mode.
When a warning message indicating that oil maintenance should be performed
soon or is required is displayed.
Speed warning
When set to on, the vehicle speed at which the speed warning will start oper-
ating will be displayed. If the vehicle exceeds the set speed, the speed display
will flash and a buzzer will sound.
To display the odometer, etc. while the speed warning is set to on, press the odome-
ter/trip meter and trip meter reset button. (If the button has not been operated for a
certain amount of time, the speed warning will be displayed.)
The speed at which the speed warning will start operating can be changed on .
(P. 128)
Odometer/trip meter display area
134
2. Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Background color of the indicator/shift position display area (except F SPORT models)
The background color of the indicator/shift position display area is changed according to
the driving mode as follows (P. 381):
Eco drive mode: Blue
Sport mode: Red
G-force display (if equipped)
The G-force values may not be zero even when the vehicle is parked, such as when it is
parked on an incline.
Suspension of the settings display
Some settings cannot be changed while driving. When changing settings, park the
vehicle in a safe place.
If a warning message is displayed, operation of the settings display will be suspended.
Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic
of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.
Customization
Some functions can be customized. (P. 128, 696)
WARNING
Caution for use while driving
When operating the multi-information display while driving, pay extra attention to the
safety of the area around the vehicle.
Do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving as you may fail
to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.
The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information
display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond
slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number
appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing
rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or
injury.
Cautions during setting up the display
As the hybrid system needs to be operating during setting up the display, ensure that
the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a
garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter
the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
135
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
While setting up the display
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while
setting up the display features.
136
2. Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Energy monitor/consumption screen
You can view the status of your hybrid system on the multi-information display
and the audio system.
Vehicles with a 10.3-inch display: The energy monitor or consumption screen
can be displayed and operated on the side display.
Multi-information display
Audio system screen
Meter control switches
“MENU” button
Lexus Display Audio controller
Remote Touch knob
“ENTER” button
*
1
: Vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio sys-
tem
*
2
: Vehicles with a 10.3-inch display
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
*
1
*
2
137
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Lexus Display Audio screen
Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus
Display Audio controller, and then
select “Car” on the “MENU” screen.
If the “Energy monitor” screen does not
appear, move the controller to the right
and select “Energy”.
10.3-inch display
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, and then select on
the “Menu” screen.
If the “Trip information” or “Past record”
screen is displayed, select “Energy”.
Multi-information display
Press the “” or “” of the meter control switches and select , and then press
the “” or “ to select the energy monitor display.
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
Energy monitor
Audio system screen Multi-information display
When the vehicle is
powered by the elec-
tric motor (traction
motor)
138
2. Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
When the vehicle is
powered by both the
gasoline engine and
the electric motor
(traction motor)
When the vehicle is
powered by the gaso-
line engine
When the vehicle is
charging the hybrid
battery (traction bat-
tery)
When there is no
energy flow
Hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery) status
Low Full Low Full
Audio system screen Multi-information display
139
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Trip information
Lexus Display Audio screen
Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller, and then
select “Car” on the “MENU” screen.
If the “Trip information” screen does not appear, move the controller to the right
and select “Trip information”.
Fuel consumption in the past 15
minutes
Current fuel consumption
Regenerated energy in the past
15 minutes
One symbol indicates 50 Wh.
Up to 5 symbols are shown.
Average vehicle speed since the
hybrid system was started.
Elapsed time since the hybrid system was started.
Cruising range (P. 142)
Fuel consumption
1
2
3
4
5
6
140
2. Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
10.3-inch display
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, and then select on the
“Menu” screen.
If the “Energy monitor” or “Past record” screen is displayed, select “Trip informa-
tion”.
Resetting the consumption data
Fuel consumption in the past 15
minutes
Current fuel consumption
Regenerated energy in the past
15 minutes
One symbol indicates 50 Wh.
Up to 5 symbols are shown.
Average vehicle speed since the hybrid system was started.
Elapsed time since the hybrid system was started.
Cruising range (P. 142)
Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color into past
averages and averages attained since the power switch was last turned to ON
mode. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
The image is an example only.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
141
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Past record
Lexus Display Audio screen
Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller, and then
select “Car” on the “MENU” screen.
If the “Past record” screen does not appear, move the controller to the right and
select “Past record”.
Previous fuel consumption record
Current fuel consumption
Best recorded fuel consumption
10.3-inch display
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, and then select on the
“Menu” screen.
If the “Energy monitor” or “Trip information” screen is displayed, select “Past
record”.
Resetting the past record data
Best recorded fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption
Previous fuel consumption record
Updating the average fuel con-
sumption data
The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past averages
and the average fuel consumption since the last updated. Use the displayed
average fuel consumption as a reference.
The image is an example only.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
142
2. Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Updating the past record data
Vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio system
Update the average fuel consumption by moving the controller to the left and select
“Update” to measure the current fuel consumption again.
Vehicles with a 10.3-inch display
Update the average fuel consumption by selecting “Update” to measure the current fuel
consumption again.
Resetting the data
Vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio system
The fuel consumption data can be deleted by moving the controller to the left and select
“Clear”.
Vehicles with a 10.3-inch display
The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”.
Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel
remaining.
This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
143
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Vehicle information can be displayed on the side display (P. 501), then select
” or “” to select the desired screen.
Fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption
and regenerated energy for the past 10
minutes in 1 minute intervals, as well as
the cruising range.
Past record
Displays the average fuel consumption
and highest fuel consumption.
Trip information
Displays the cruising range, average
fuel consumption and the amount of
time elapsed since the hybrid system
was started.
Using the side display (vehicles with a 10.3-inch display)
144
2. Instrument cluster
IS300h_EE
Energy monitor
Displays the hybrid system operation
and energy recovery states.
The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
145
3
Operation of
each component
IS300h_EE
3-1. Key information
Keys...................................................146
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
and trunk
Doors............................................... 152
Trunk................................................ 159
Smart entry & start system...... 165
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats.....................................205
Rear seats......................................207
Driving position
memory.......................................209
Head restraints.............................214
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel..............................217
Inside rear view mirror ..............219
Outside rear view mirrors........221
3-5. Opening, closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows ..........................225
Moon roof.....................................229
146
IS300h_EE
3-1. Key information
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
Operating the smart entry & start
system (P. 165)
Operating the wireless remote con-
trol function
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
Card key (electronic key)
(if equipped)
Operating the smart entry & start sys-
tem (P. 165)
Locks the doors (P. 152)
Closes the windows and moon roof
*
(P. 152)
Unlocks the doors (P. 152)
Opens the windows and moon roof
*
(P. 152)
Opens the trunk (P. 160)
*
: These settings must be customized at any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus autho-
rized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Keys
The keys
1
2
3
4
Wireless remote control
1
2
3
4
5
147
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
To take out the mechanical key, push
the release button and take the key out.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the key only
has grooves on one side. If the key can-
not be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it
over and re-attempt to insert it.
After using the mechanical key, store it
in the electronic key. Carry the mechan-
ical key together with the electronic key.
If the electronic key battery is depleted
or the entry function does not operate
properly, you will need the mechanical
key. (P. 666)
Using the mechanical key
148
3-1. Key information
IS300h_EE
Card key (if equipped)
The card key is not waterproof.
The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only if a problem
arises, such as when the card key does not operate properly.
If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the lock release button using a
pen tip etc. If it is still difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc.
When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant
Set the luggage security system (P. 161) on and lock the glove box (P. 521) as cir-
cumstances demand.
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the elec-
tronic key only.
If you lose your mechanical keys
New genuine mechanical keys can be made by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer using the other mechanical key and the key
number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your
wallet, not in the vehicle.
To store the mechanical key in the card key,
insert it while pressing the lock release button.
If the battery cover is not installed and the bat-
tery falls out or if the battery was removed
because the key got wet, reinstall the battery
with the positive terminal facing the Lexus
emblem.
149
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any but-
tons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an electronic
key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally.
Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere
with the operation of the aircraft.
Electronic key battery depletion
The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is about a year and a
half.)
If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the hybrid system is
stopped. (P. 644)
As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted
even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the elec-
tronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 583)
The smart entry & start system or the wireless remote control does not operate.
The detection area becomes smaller.
The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 1 m (3 ft.) of the
following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
Personal computers
Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
Table lamps
Induction cookers
Replacing the battery
P. 583
Confirmation of the registered key number
The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask any autho-
rized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer for details.
If a wrong key is used
The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.
150
3-1. Key information
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
To prevent key damage
Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to
such materials.
Do not disassemble the keys.
Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.
Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio
systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-fre-
quency therapy equipment.
Carrying the electronic key on your person
Carry the electronic key 10 cm (3.9 in.) or more away from electric appliances that are
turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 10 cm (3.9 in.) of the
electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.
In case of a smart entry & start system malfunction or other key-related problems
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle, including the
card key, to any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
151
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
When an electronic key is lost
If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer
immediately with all remaining electronic keys and the card key that were provided
with your vehicle.
Handling the card key
Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key into the card key. Doing
so may damage the card key.
If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode.
If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water etc. is spilled on the key, immedi-
ately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals. (To remove the
battery cover, lightly grasp and pull it.) If the battery is corroded, have any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer replace the bat-
tery.
Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover.
Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.
If the battery cover is frequently removed, the battery cover may become loose.
When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery.
Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rapidly.
The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the follow-
ing situations:
The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins and keys.
The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as the tip of a mechanical pencil.
The surface of the card key is wiped with thinner or benzene.
152
IS300h_EE
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless
remote control or door lock switches.
Entry function (if equipped)
Carry the electronic key to enable this function.
Grip the handle to unlock the
doors.
Make sure to touch the sensor on the
back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the doors are locked.
Touch the lock sensor (indenta-
tion on the upper part of the door
handle) to lock the doors.
Check that the door is securely locked.
Wireless remote control
Locks all the doors
Press and hold to close the windows
and moon roof.
*
Check that the door is securely
locked.
Unlocks all the doors
Press and hold to open the windows
and moon roof.
*
*
: These settings must be customized at
any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
Doors
Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside
1
2
1
2
153
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
Operation signals
The emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked.
(Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are operating.
Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the
security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
Welcome light illumination control
The front position, tail and license plate lights automatically turn on at night when the
doors are unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control if the light switch
is in the “AUTO” position.
When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door han-
dle (vehicles with entry function)
Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds
continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle
once more.
Setting the alarm (if equipped)
Locking the doors will set the alarm system. (P. 100)
If the smart entry & start system or the wireless remote control does not operate prop-
erly
Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors. (P. 666)
Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. (P. 583)
If the door will not lock even when the topside
sensor area is touched, try touching both the
topside and underside sensor areas at the same
time.
154
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
When using the wireless remote control and operating the power window or moon
roof
Operate the power window or moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no
possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window or
moon roof. Also, do not allow children to operate the wireless remote control. It is pos-
sible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window or moon
roof.
Jam protection function
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function
intentionally.
The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the
window or moon roof fully closes.
155
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
Door lock switches
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
Inside lock buttons
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened by
pulling the inside handle even if the
lock buttons are in the lock position.
For the front doors
Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
Close the door while pulling the door handle.
The door cannot be locked if the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, or
the electronic key is left inside the vehicle. However, the key may not be detected cor-
rectly and the door may be locked.
For the rear doors
Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, or
the electronic key is left inside the vehicle. However, the key may not be detected cor-
rectly and the door may be locked.
Unlocking and locking the doors from the inside
1
2
1
2
Locking the doors from the outside without a key
1
2
1
2
156
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
The door cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle when the lock is set.
Unlock
Lock
These locks can be set to prevent chil-
dren from opening the rear doors. Push
down on each rear door switch to lock
both rear doors.
The following functions can be set or canceled:
For instructions on customizing, refer to P. 696.
Rear door child-protector lock
1
2
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
Function Operation
Speed linked door locking function
All the doors are locked when the vehicle
speed is approximately 20 km/h (12 mph) or
higher.
Shift position linked door locking
function
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all the
doors.
Shift position linked door unlocking
function
All doors are automatically unlocked when
shifting the shift lever to P.
Driver’s door linked door unlocking
function
All doors are automatically unlocked when
driver’s door is opened.
157
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
Switching the door unlock function (vehicles with entry function)
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote con-
trol.
Turn the power switch off.
Cancel the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor of the alarm system to prevent unintended
triggering of the alarm while changing the settings. (if equipped) (P. 103)
When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold , or
for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding .
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When
changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and
repeat step .)
For vehicles with an alarm: To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the
doors using the wireless remote control and open and close a door once after the set-
tings have been changed. (If a door is not opened within 30 seconds after is
pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.)
In a case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 101)
1
2
3
3
Multi-information
display Unlocking function Beep
(Left-hand drive
vehicles)
(Right-hand drive
vehicles)
Holding the driver’s door handle
unlocks only the driver’s door.
Exterior: Beeps 3 times
Interior: Pings once
Holding the front passenger’s
door handle unlocks all the
doors.
Holding either front door handle
unlocks all the doors.
Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Pings once
158
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
Impact detection door lock release system
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may
not operate.
Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 666)
Conditions affecting the operation of the smart entry & start system or wireless remote
control
P. 167
Customization
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 696)
WARNING
To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant being thrown out of the
vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.
Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
Be especially careful with the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the
inside lock buttons are in locked position.
Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.
159
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
Press the opener switch.
Trunk button
Vehicles with entry function:
While carrying the electronic key,
press the button on the trunk lid.
When all the doors are unlocked with
the power door lock system, the
trunk can be opened without carry-
ing the electronic key.
Vehicles without entry function:
Unlock all the doors with the power
door lock system and press the but-
ton on the trunk lid.
Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless
remote control.
Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
160
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
Wireless remote control
Press and hold the switch.
Using the trunk grip, lower the trunk
without applying force to the side and
push the trunk down from the outside
to close it.
When closing the trunk
161
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
To protect luggage stored in the trunk against theft, the luggage security system
can be set to on.
Folding type rear seats only: Move
the luggage security system levers to
the lock position.
To disable the trunk opener, turn the
main switch in the glove box off
On
Off
When the main switch is off, the trunk
lid cannot be opened even with the
wireless remote control or entry
function.
Luggage security system
1
2
1
2
162
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
Trunk light (if equipped)
The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.
Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside
When all doors are locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic key left inside the
trunk will sound an alarm.
In this case, the trunk lid can be opened pressing the trunk release button on the trunk
lid.
If the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key confine-
ment prevention function is activated so the trunk can be opened. In order to prevent
theft, take all electronic keys with you when leaving the vehicle.
If the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key may not be
detected depending on the location of the key and the surrounding radio wave condi-
tions. In this case, the key confinement prevention function cannot be activated, causing
the doors to lock when the trunk is closed. Make sure to check where the key is before
closing the trunk.
The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one of the doors is
unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk opener.
Using the mechanical key
The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (P. 666)
If the smart entry & start system or the wireless remote control does not operate prop-
erly
Use the mechanical key to unlock the trunk. (P. 666)
Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. (P. 583)
When leaving a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
P. 148
Customization
The trunk unlocking operation can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 696)
163
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Before driving
Make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may
open unexpectedly while driving and hit near-by objects or luggage in the trunk may
be thrown out, causing an accident.
Do not allow children to play in the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could suffer from heat exhaustion,
suffocation or other injuries.
Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to open unexpectedly, or cause the child’s hands,
head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
Important points while driving
Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are
susceptible to death or serious injury.
164
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening it.
Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.
When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the surround-
ing area is safe.
If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is
about to open or close.
Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may move
abruptly in strong wind.
Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. Such
additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to suddenly shut again after it is
opened.
The trunk lid may suddenly shut if it is not
opened fully. It is more difficult to open or
close the trunk lid on an incline than on a level
surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpect-
edly opening or closing by itself. Make sure
that the trunk lid is fully open and secure
before using the trunk.
When closing the trunk lid, take extra care to
prevent your fingers etc. from being caught.
When closing the trunk lid, make sure to
press it lightly on its outer surface. If the trunk
handle is used to fully close the trunk lid, it
may result in hands or arms being caught.
165
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
Locks and unlocks the doors (vehicles with entry function) (P. 152)
Opens the trunk (vehicles with entry function) (P. 159)
Starts the hybrid system (P. 251)
Antenna location
Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
Smart entry & start system
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic
key (including the card key) on your person, for example in your pocket. The
driver should always carry the electronic key.
Antennas outside the cabin (vehicles with
entry function)
Antennas inside the cabin
Antenna inside the trunk
Antenna outside the trunk (vehicles with
entry function)
When locking or unlocking the doors
(vehicles with entry function)
The system can be operated when the elec-
tronic key is within about 0.7 m (2.3 ft.) of
an outside door handle. (Only the doors
detecting the key can be operated.)
When opening the trunk (vehicles with
entry function)
The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 0.7 m (2.3
ft.) of the trunk release button.
When starting the hybrid system or changing power switch modes
The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.
1
2
3
4
166
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
Alarms and warning messages
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages shown on the
multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and accidents resulting
from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning mes-
sage on the multi-information display. (P. 618)
When only an alarm sounds, circumstances and correction procedures are as follows.
If a warning message is displayed indicating that there is a malfunction in the smart
entry & start system
P. 618
Battery-saving function (vehicles with entry function)
The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key bat-
tery and the 12-volt battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation
for a long time.
In the following situations, the smart entry & start system may take some time to unlock
the doors.
The electronic key has been left within approximately 2 m (6 ft.) of the outside of the
vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
The smart entry & start system has not been used for 5 days or longer.
If the smart entry & start system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors can-
not be unlocked at any door except the driver’s door. In this case, hold the driver’s door
handle, or use the wireless remote control or mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm
sounds once for 5
seconds
An attempt was made to lock
the vehicle while a door was
open.
Close all of the doors and
lock the doors again.
The trunk was closed while the
electronic key was still inside the
trunk and all the doors were
locked.
Retrieve the electronic key
from the trunk and close
the trunk lid.
Interior alarm pings
repeatedly
The power switch was turned to
ACCESSORY mode while the
driver’s door was open (The
driver’s door was opened when
the power switch was in
ACCESSORY mode).
Turn the power switch off
and close the driver’s door.
The power switch was turned off
while the driver’s door was open. Close the driver’s door.
167
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
Electronic Key battery-Saving Function
When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the elec-
tronic key from receiving radio waves.
Conditions affecting operation
The smart entry & start system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the
communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing
the smart entry & start system, wireless remote control and immobilizer system from
operating properly. (Ways of coping: P. 666)
When the electronic key battery is depleted
Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or
other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless com-
munication device
When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic
objects
Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
Metallic wallets or bags
•Coins
Hand warmers made of metal
Media such as CDs and DVDs
When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio
waves
Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
Digital audio players
Portable game systems
If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear win-
dow
Press twice while pressing and holding
. Confirm that the electronic key indica-
tor flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart
entry & start system cannot be used. To cancel
the function, press any of the electronic key but-
tons.
168
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
Note for the entry function (if equipped)
Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system
may not operate properly in the following cases:
The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear
bumper center when the trunk is opened.
Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets
when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be
detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the doors will become lockable from the
outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.
As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or
unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used
to unlock the vehicle.
The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle,
such as in the rain or in a car wash, when the electronic key is within the effective range.
(The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 30 seconds if the doors
are not opened and closed.)
If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near
the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry func-
tion. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
Touching the door lock or unlock sensor while wearing gloves may prevent lock or
unlock operation.
If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range,
the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In this case, follow the following correction
procedures to wash the vehicle:
Place the electronic key in a location 2 m (6 ft.) or more away from the vehicle. (Take
care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart entry & start sys-
tem. (P. 167)
If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car
wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will
sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.
The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc.
Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or use the lock sensor on the
lower part of the door handle.
A sudden handle operation or a handle operation immediately after entering the effec-
tive range may prevent the doors from being unlocked. Touch the door unlock sensor
and check that the doors are unlocked before pulling the door handle again.
Unlocking the vehicle may take more time if another electronic key is within the effec-
tive range.
169
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
Note for the push-start function
Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system
may not operate properly when the electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear
package tray or floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the hybrid system is
started or power switch modes are changed.
Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the hybrid
system if the electronic key is near the window.
When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
Vehicles with entry function: To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic
key within 2 m (6 ft.) of the vehicle.
The smart entry & start system can be deactivated in advance. (P. 696)
To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the elec-
tronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the
vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not
be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off
accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)
Do not leave the electronic key inside the luggage compartment.
The key confinement prevention function may not operate, depending on the location
of the key (close to a spare tire [if equipped], the inside edge of the luggage compart-
ment), conditions (inside a metal bag, close to metallic objects) and the radio waves in
the surrounding area. (P. 162)
If the smart entry & start system does not operate properly
Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(P. 666)
Starting the hybrid system: P. 667
Customization
Settings (e. g. smart entry & start system) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 696)
If the smart entry & start system has been deactivated in a customized setting
Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk:
Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (P. 152, 160, 666)
Starting the hybrid system and changing power switch modes:P. 667
Stopping the hybrid system: P. 252
170
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
Certification for the smart entry & start system
171
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
172
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
173
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
174
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
175
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
176
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
177
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
178
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
179
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
180
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
181
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
182
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
183
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
184
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
185
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
186
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
187
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
188
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
189
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
190
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
191
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
192
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
193
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
194
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
195
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
196
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
197
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
198
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
199
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
200
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
201
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
202
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
203
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
204
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-
pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable
distance between themselves and the smart entry & start system antennas.
(P. 165)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry
function can be disabled. Ask any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and
timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should dis-
able the entry function.
Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers,
cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibril-
lators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its opera-
tion under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.
Ask any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer
for details on disabling the entry function.
205
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Power seat
Manual seat
Front seats
Adjustment procedure
Seat position adjustment
Seatback angle adjustment
Seat cushion (front) angle adjust-
ment
Seat cushion (rear) angle adjust-
ment
Lumbar support adjustment (if
equipped)
Vertical height adjustment
1
2
3
4
5
6
206
3-3. Adjusting the seats
IS300h_EE
Power easy access system (if equipped)
The driver’s seat and steering wheel move in accordance with power switch mode and
the driver’s seat belt condition. (P. 209)
When adjusting the seat
Take care when adjusting the seat so that the head restraint does not touch the ceiling.
Vehicles with folding type rear seats: When folding down a rear seatback, if it interferes
with a front seatback, adjust the front seat position so that the seats no longer interfere
with each other. However, if adjusting the front seat position causes the correct driving
posture to not be maintained, return the rear seatback to its original position.
(P. 207)
WARNING
When adjusting the seat position
Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not
injured by the moving seat.
Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck.
Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat
more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces
directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk
of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
207
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
Check that the luggage security sys-
tem lever in the trunk is in the unlock
position.
Pull the seatback lock release lever
and fold the seatback down.
To return the rear seatbacks to their
original position, lift them up until they
lock.
P. 161
Rear seats (folding type)
: If equipped
The rear seatbacks can be folded down.
Folding down the rear seatbacks
1
2
Luggage security system
208
3-3. Adjusting the seats
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
When folding the rear seatbacks down
Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.
Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the trunk while driving.
Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
After returning the rear seatback to the upright position
Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.
Make sure that the seatback is securely
locked in position by lightly pushing it back
and forth.
If the seatback is not securely locked, the red
marking will be visible on the seatback lock
release knob. Make sure that the red marking
is not visible.
209
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
The seat and steering wheel are automatically adjusted to allow the driver to
enter and exit the vehicle easily.
When all of the following have been
performed, the driver’s seat and steer-
ing wheel are automatically adjusted to
a position that allows driver to enter
and exit the vehicle easily.
The shift lever has been shifted to P.
The power switch has been turned
off.
The driver’s seat belt has been unfastened.
When any of the following has been performed, the driver’s seat and steering
wheel automatically return to their original positions.
The power switch has been turned to ACCESSORY mode or ON mode.
The driver’s seat belt has been fastened.
Operation of the power easy access system
When exiting the vehicle, the power easy access system may not operate if the seat is
already close to the rearmost position, etc.
Customization
The seat movement amount settings of the power easy access system can be custom-
ized. (Customizable features: P. 696)
Driving position memory
: If equipped
This feature automatically adjusts the driver’s seat, steering wheel and out-
side rear view mirrors to make entering and exiting the vehicle easier or to
suit your preferences.
Power easy access system
210
3-3. Adjusting the seats
IS300h_EE
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat, steering wheel
and outside rear view mirrors) can be recorded and recalled by pressing a but-
ton.
Three different driving positions can be recorded into memory.
Recording procedure
Check that the shift lever is in P.
Turn the power switch to ON mode.
Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to the
desired positions.
While pressing the “SET” button,
or within 3 seconds after the
“SET” button is pressed, press
button “1”, “2” or “3” until the
buzzer sounds.
If the selected button has already
been preset, the previously recorded
position will be overwritten.
Recall procedure
Check that the shift lever is in P.
Turn the power switch to ON mode.
Press one of the buttons for the
driving position you want to recall
until the buzzer sounds.
Driving position memory
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
211
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
To stop the position recall operation part-way through
Perform any of the following operations:
Press the “SET” button.
Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.
Operate any of the seat adjustment switches (only cancels seat position recall).
Operate the tilt and telescopic steering control switch (only cancels steering wheel
position recall).
Seat positions that can be memorized (P. 205)
The adjusted positions other than the position adjusted by lumbar support switch can be
memorized.
Operating the driving position memory after turning the power switch off
Recorded seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is
opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again. Recorded steering wheel posi-
tion can be activated by pressing the power switch.
In order to correctly use the driving position memory function
If a seat position is already in the furthest possible position and the seat is operated in the
same direction, the recorded position may be slightly different when it is recalled.
212
3-3. Adjusting the seats
IS300h_EE
Each electronic key (including a card key) can be registered to recall your pre-
ferred driving position.
Registering procedure
Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing the
following:
Carry only the key you want to register, and then close the driver’s door. If 2 or
more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be recorded properly.
Check that the shift lever is in P.
Turn the power switch to ON mode.
Recall the driving position that you want to record.
While pressing the recalled but-
ton, press and hold the door lock
switch (either lock or unlock) until
the buzzer sounds.
If the button could not be registered,
the buzzer sounds continuously for
approximately 3 seconds.
Recall procedure
Make sure that the doors are locked before recalling the driving position.
Carry the electronic key that has been registered to the driving position,
and then unlock and open the driver’s door using the entry function or
wireless remote control.
The driving position will move to the recorded position (not including the steering
wheel). However, the seat will move to a position slightly behind the recorded posi-
tion in order to make entering the vehicle easier.
If the driving position is in a position that has already been recorded, the seat and
outside rear view mirrors will not move.
Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY mode or ON mode, or fasten a
seat belt.
The seat and steering wheel will move to the recorded position.
Memory recall function
1
2
3
4
1
2
213
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
Cancelation procedure
Carry only the key you want to cancel and then close the driver’s door. If 2 or
more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be canceled properly.
Turn the power switch to ON mode.
While pressing the “SET” button, press and hold the door lock switch
(either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds twice.
If the button could not be canceled, the buzzer sounds continuously for approxi-
mately 3 seconds.
Recalling the driving position using the memory recall function
Different driving positions can be registered for each electronic key. Therefore, the
driving position that is recalled may be different depending on the key being carried.
If a door other than the driver’s door is unlocked with the smart entry & start system, the
driving position cannot be recalled. In this case, press the driving position button which
has been set.
Customization
The unlock door settings of the memory recall function can be customized.
(Customizable features: P. 696)
WARNING
Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or
squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
1
2
214
3-3. Adjusting the seats
IS300h_EE
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Front seats
Lock release button
1
2
Rear seats
Lock release button
1
2
215
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
Removing the head restraints
Installing the head restraints
Front seats
Rear seats
Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock
release button.
If the head restraint touches the ceiling, making
the removal difficult, change the seat height or
angle.
Align the head restraint with the installation
holes and push it down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button when
lowering the head restraint.
Align the head restraint with the installation
holes and push it down to the lowest lock posi-
tion while pressing the lock release button.
Lock release button
Lock release button
Lock release button
216
3-3. Adjusting the seats
IS300h_EE
Adjusting the height of the head restraints
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.
Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted
so that the center of the head restraint is closest
to the top of your ears.
WARNING
Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are
locked in position.
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
217
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Power type
Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following directions:
Up
Down
Toward the driver
Away from the driver
Manual type
Hold the steering wheel and push
the lever down.
Adjust to the ideal position by mov-
ing the steering wheel horizontally
and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever up to
secure the steering wheel.
Steering wheel
Adjustment procedure
1
2
3
4
1
2
218
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
IS300h_EE
To sound the horn, press on or close to
the mark.
The steering wheel can be adjusted when (power type)
The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode
*
.
*
: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the steering wheel can be adjusted regardless of
power switch mode.
Automatic adjustment of the steering position (if equipped)
A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the
driving position memory system. (P. 209)
Power easy access system (if equipped)
The steering wheel and driver’s seat move in accordance with power switch mode and
the driver’s seat belt condition. (P. 209)
Horn
WARNING
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, result-
ing in death or serious injury.
After adjusting the steering wheel (manual type)
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident, and
resulting in death or serious injury. Also, the horn may not sound if the steering wheel is
not securely locked.
219
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.
Adjust the height of the rear view mir-
ror by moving it up and down.
Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by
operating the lever.
Normal position
Anti-glare position
Inside rear view mirror
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirma-
tion of the rear view.
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Anti-glare function
1
2
220
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
IS300h_EE
Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the
reflected light is automatically reduced.
Changing automatic anti-glare func-
tion mode
ON/OFF
When the automatic anti-glare func-
tion is in ON mode, the indicator illu-
minates.
The function will set to ON mode
each time the power switch is turned
to ON mode.
Pressing the button turns the function
to OFF mode. (The indicator also
turns off.)
To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)
Indicator
To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do
not touch or cover them.
WARNING
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
221
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
To select a mirror to adjust, press the
switch.
Left
Right
Pressing the same switch again will
put the switch in neutral.
To adjust the mirror, press the switch.
Up
Right
Down
Left
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjustment procedure
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
222
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
IS300h_EE
Using the switch
Press the switch to fold the mirrors.
Press it again to extend them to the
original position.
Setting automatic mode (if equipped)
Automatic mode allows the folding or extending of the mirrors to be linked to
locking/unlocking of the doors.
Press the “AUTO” switch to set auto-
matic mode.
The indicator will come on.
Pressing the switch once more will
return to manual mode.
Automatically folding and extending the mirrors
Indicator
223
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
When either “L” or “R” of the mirror select switch is selected, the outside rear
view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in
order to give a better view of the ground.
To disable this function, select neither “L” nor “R”.
Adjusting the mirror angle when the vehicle is reversing
With the shift lever in R, adjust the mirror angle at a desired position.
The adjusted angle will be memorized and the mirror will automatically tilt to
the memorized angle whenever the shift lever is shifted to R from next time.
The memorized downward tilt position of the mirror is linked to the normal position
(angle adjusted with the shift lever in other than R). Therefore, if the normal posi-
tion is changed after adjustment, the tilt position will also change.
When the normal position is changed, readjust the angle in reversing.
Mirror angle can be adjusted when
The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The automatic folding/extending mirror function will return to off as default. To turn the
function on, press the switch again to select on.
When the mirrors are fogged up
The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the
rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (P. 510)
Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle (if equipped)
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the
driving position memory. (P. 209)
Auto anti-glare function (if equipped)
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear
view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to
reduce reflected light. (P. 220)
Using automatic mode in cold weather
When automatic mode is used in cold weather, the door mirror could freeze up and
automatic stowing and return may not be possible. In this case, remove any ice and snow
from the door mirror, then either operate the mirror using manual mode or move the mir-
ror by hand.
Customization
The automatic mirror folding and extending operation can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 696)
Linked mirror function when reversing (if equipped)
224
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Important points while driving
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, result-
ing in death or serious injury.
Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted
before driving.
When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught
by the moving mirror.
When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.
225
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
Closing
One-touch closing
*
Opening
One-touch opening
*
*
: To stop the window partway, operate the
switch in the opposite direction.
Press the switch to lock the passenger
window switches.
The indicator will come on.
Use this switch to prevent children from
accidentally opening or closing a pas-
senger window.
Power windows
Opening and closing procedures
1
2
3
4
Window lock switch
Indicator
226
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
IS300h_EE
The power windows can be operated when
The power switch is in ON mode.
Operating the power windows after turning the hybrid system off
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the power
switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be oper-
ated once either front door is opened.
Jam protection function
If an object becomes jammed between the window and the window frame while the win-
dow is closing, window movement is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
Catch protection function
If an object becomes caught between the door and window while the window is opening,
window movement is stopped.
When the window cannot be opened or closed
When the jam protection function or catch protection function operates unusually and
the door window cannot be opened or closed, perform the following operations with the
power window switch of that door.
Stop the vehicle. With the power switch in ON mode, within 4 seconds of the jam pro-
tection function or catch protection function activating, continuously operate the
power window switch in the one-touch closing direction or one-touch opening direc-
tion so that the door window can be opened and closed.
If the door window cannot be opened and closed even when performing the above
operations, perform the following procedure for function initialization.
Turn the power switch to ON mode.
Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction and com-
pletely close the door window.
Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pulling the switch in the
one-touch closing direction, and hold it there for approximately 6 seconds or more.
Press and hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening direction. After
the door window is completely opened, continue holding the switch for an additional
1 second or more.
Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pushing the switch in the
one-touch opening direction, and hold it there for approximately 4 seconds or
more.
Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction again.
After the door window is completely closed, continue holding the switch for a fur-
ther 1 second or more.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.
If the window reverses and cannot be fully closed or opened, have the vehicle inspected
by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
227
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
Door lock linked window operation
The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.
*
(P. 666)
The power windows can be opened and closed using the wireless remote control.
*
(P. 152)
*
: These settings must be customized at any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus autho-
rized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
When the 12-volt battery is disconnected
The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after
reconnecting the 12-volt battery.
Power windows open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instru-
ment cluster when the power switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the
power windows open.
Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 696)
228
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Closing the windows
The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the operation
for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do
not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passen-
gers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it
is recommended to use the window lock switch. (P. 225)
Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a posi-
tion where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the power
windows, operate the power window after checking to make sure that there is no pos-
sibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window. Also do
not let a child operate window by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is
possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window.
When exiting the vehicle, turn the power switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle
along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that
may possibly lead to an accident.
Jam protection function
Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
The jam protection function may not work if something gets jammed just before the
window is fully closed. Be careful not to get any part of your body jammed in the win-
dow.
Catch protection function
Never use any part of your body or clothing to intentionally activate the catch protec-
tion function.
The catch protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the
window is fully opened. Be careful not to get any part of your body or clothing caught
in the window.
229
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
Opens the moon roof
*
The moon roof stops slightly before the
fully open position to reduce wind noise.
Press the switch again to fully open the
moon roof.
Closes the moon roof
*
*
: Lightly press either way of the moon
roof switch to stop the moon roof part-
way.
Tilts the moon roof up
*
Tilts the moon roof down
*
*
: Lightly press either way of the moon
roof switch to stop the moon roof part-
way.
Moon roof
: If equipped
Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and
down.
Opening and closing
1
2
Tilting up and down
1
2
230
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
IS300h_EE
The moon roof can be operated when
The power switch is in ON mode.
Operating the moon roof after turning the hybrid system off
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the power switch is
turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either
front door is opened.
Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is clos-
ing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open
automatically when the moon roof is opened.
Door lock linked moon roof operation
The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.
*
(P. 666)
The moon roof can be opened and closed using the wireless remote control.
*
(P. 152)
*
: These settings must be customized at any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus autho-
rized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
231
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
3
Operation of each component
IS300h_EE
When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.
*
1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.
*
2
Then it
will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down,
open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the
switch.
If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “UP” switch
*
1
until the moon roof moves into the tilt up position
and stops.
Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch again.
*
1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.
*
2
Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt
down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the
switch.
*
1
: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be per-
formed again from the beginning.
*
2
: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic
operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the “CLOSE” or “UP” switch,
and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt
down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed
and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure cor-
rectly, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
232
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
IS300h_EE
Moon roof open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instru-
ment cluster when the power switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the
moon roof open.
Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 696)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
Opening the moon roof
Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is
moving.
Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof
The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing operations.
In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child oper-
ate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts
caught in the moon roof.
Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a posi-
tion where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the moon
roof, operate the moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of
any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the moon roof. Also, do not let
a child operate moon roof by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is pos-
sible for children and other passengers to get caught in the moon roof.
When exiting the vehicle, turn the power switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle
along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that
may possibly lead to an accident.
Jam protection function
Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the
moon roof fully closes.
233
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle.....................234
Cargo and luggage.................... 241
Trailer towing
(vehicles without a
towing package)......................242
Trailer towing
(vehicles with a
towing package)......................243
4-2. Driving procedures
Power (ignition) switch.............251
EV drive mode ............................256
Hybrid transmission................. 258
Turn signal lever .........................265
Parking brake..............................267
ASC
(Active Sound Control)........268
4-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch.........................269
Automatic High Beam.............272
Fog light switch ...........................276
Windshield wipers
and washer................................. 277
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel
tank cap...................................... 285
4-5. Using the driving
support systems
Lexus Safety System +.............289
PCS
(Pre-Collision System).......... 301
LDA
(Lane Departure Alert
with steering control)..............312
RSA (Road Sign Assist) ..........320
Dynamic radar
cruise control............................325
Cruise control.............................337
Lexus parking
assist-sensor............................... 341
Lexus parking
assist monitor............................350
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor) .............366
BSM function.........................373
RCTA function......................376
Driving mode
select switch...............................381
Driving assist systems ..............385
4-6. Driving tips
Hybrid vehicle
driving tips................................... 391
Winter driving tips.....................394
234
IS300h_EE
4-1. Before driving
P. 251
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (P. 258)
Release the parking brake. (P. 267)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal
to accelerate the vehicle.
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P.
(P. 258)
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake (P. 267), and shift the shift lever to P (P. 258).
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
Press the power switch to stop the hybrid system.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person.
Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:
Starting the hybrid system
Driving
Stopping
Parking the vehicle
Starting off on a steep uphill
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
235
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
When starting off on an uphill
The hill-start assist control will activate. (P. 385)
For fuel-efficient driving
Keep in mind that hybrid vehicles are similar to conventional vehicles, and it is necessary
to refrain from activities such as sudden acceleration. (P. 391)
Driving in the rain
Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may
become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slip-
pery.
Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may
be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and
brakes from operating properly.
Restraining the hybrid system output (Brake Override System)
When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the hybrid sys-
tem output may be restrained.
A warning message is displayed on the multi-information display while the system is
operating. (P. 635)
Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start Control)
When the following unusual operation is performed, the hybrid system output may be
restrained.
When the shift lever is shifted from R to D, D to R, N to R, P to D, or P to R (D
includes S) with the accelerator pedal depressed, a warning message appears on
the multi-information display. (P. 625)
When the accelerator pedal is depressed too much while the vehicle is in reverse.
While Drive-Start Control is being activated, your vehicle may have trouble escaping
from the mud or fresh snow. In such case, deactivate TRC (P. 387) to cancel Drive-
Start Control so that the vehicle may become able to escape from the mud or fresh
snow.
Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:
For the first 300 km (186 miles):
Avoid sudden stops.
For the first 800 km (500 miles):
Do not tow a trailer.
For the first 1000 km (621 miles):
Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
Avoid sudden acceleration.
Do not drive continuously in low gears.
Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
236
4-1. Before driving
IS300h_EE
Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system
needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake
shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer, perform the bedding down operation.
Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the cor-
rect fuel. (P. 684)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the “READY” indicator is
illuminated. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
When driving the vehicle
Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator ped-
als to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.
When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in oper-
ating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only
slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using
your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
The driver should pay extra attention to pedestrians when the vehicle is powered only
by the electric motor (traction motor). As there is no engine noise, the pedestrians
may misjudge the vehicle’s movement.
Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may
cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
During normal driving, do not turn off the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid system off
while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, however, power assist
to the steering will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you
should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
In the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in
the normal way: P. 603
Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep
hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effective-
ness. (P. 258)
237
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
When driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear
view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.
Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body are not
outside the vehicle.
When driving on slippery road surfaces
Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your
ability to control the vehicle.
Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed
could cause the vehicle to skid.
After driving through a puddle, depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes
are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning
properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering
control may be affected.
When shifting the shift lever
Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll
forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
Shifting the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the hybrid sys-
tem. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the
shift lever to any position other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid accelera-
tion of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer as soon as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
Moderate levels of brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced braking power. As a
result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional brake discs. Therefore, when
replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you also have the thickness of the
discs measured.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those
of the brake discs are exceeded.
238
4-1. Before driving
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
When the vehicle is stopped
Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily.
If the shift lever is in any position other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate sud-
denly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing
the brake pedal while stopped with the “READY” indicator is illuminated, and apply
the parking brake as necessary.
If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the
vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely
apply the parking brake as needed.
Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust
system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.
When the vehicle is parked
Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle
when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic mate-
rial of glasses to deform or crack.
Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the
vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components.
Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as
the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the
seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers
such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or con-
tainers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized
film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a
lens, causing a fire.
Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the hybrid system and
lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the “READY” indicator is illuminated.
If the vehicle is parked with the shift lever in P but the parking brake is not set, the
vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident.
Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the “READY” indicator is illuminated or imme-
diately after turning the hybrid system off.
Doing so may cause burns.
239
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the hybrid system off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or
depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to hybrid system
overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust
gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
When braking
When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of
the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not
securely hold the vehicle.
If the electronically controlled brake system does not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more
firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed
immediately.
The brake system consists of 2 or more individual hydraulic systems; if one of the sys-
tems fails, the other(s) will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be
depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
240
4-1. Before driving
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
When driving the vehicle
Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as
this may restrain the hybrid system output.
Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the
same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
When parking the vehicle
Always set the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause
the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is
accidentally depressed.
Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an
extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging
the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 648, 663)
When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the
following serious damage to the vehicle:
Engine stalling
Short in electrical components
Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer
check the following:
Brake function
Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, hybrid transmis-
sion, differential, etc.
Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where
possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
241
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo
capacity and load:
WARNING
Things that must not be carried in the trunk
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:
Receptacles containing gasoline
Aerosol cans
Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the
driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing
an accident.
Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do not stack any-
thing in the enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and luggage low, as close to the floor as pos-
sible.
When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed directly behind
the front seats.
Never allow anyone to ride in the enlarged trunk. It is not designed for passengers.
They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened.
Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.
At the feet of the driver
On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
On the package tray
On the instrument panel
On the dashboard
In front of the Lexus Display Audio screen (if equipped) or 10.3-inch display (if
equipped)
Secure all items in the occupant compartment.
Load and distribution
Do not overload your vehicle.
Do not apply loads unevenly.
Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may
cause death or serious injury.
242
4-1. Before driving
IS300h_EE
Trailer towing (vehicles without a towing package)
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also does
not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier
for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer
towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.
243
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Weight limits
Check the allowable towing capacity, GVM (Gross Vehicle Mass), MPAC
(Maximum Permissible Axle Capacity), and permissible draw bar load before
towing. (P. 682)
Towing hitch/bracket
Lexus recommends the use of the Lexus hitch/bracket for your vehicle. Other
products of a suitable nature and comparable quality may also be used.
To prevent an accident
The handling of the vehicle will feel different when towing a trailer. Beware of
the 3 most common causes of towing-related accidents: driver error, exces-
sive speed, and overloading.
Trailer towing (vehicles with a towing package)
The strain of towing a trailer will have a negative impact on the running perfor-
mance, handling, fuel consumption and endurance of your vehicle. Use the
vehicle features in the correct manner and operate the vehicle with care for
safer driving and optimal comfort. Damage and/or malfunctions that occur as
a result of towing performed for commercial purposes are not covered by the
Lexus warranty.
Ask your local authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer for further details before towing, as there are additional legal
requirements in some countries.
244
4-1. Before driving
IS300h_EE
Total trailer weight and permissible drawbar load
Total trailer weight
Weight of the trailer itself plus the
trailer load should be within the max-
imum towing capacity. Exceeding
this weight is dangerous. (P. 682)
When the total trailer weight is
greater than the vehicle weight, we
recommend the use of a friction sta-
bilizer (sway control device).
Permissible drawbar load
Allocate the trailer load so that the drawbar load is greater than 25 kg (55.1 lb.) or
4% of the towing capacity. Do not let the drawbar load exceed the indicated
weight. (P. 682)
Information tag (manufacturer’s label)
Gross vehicle mass
The combined weight of the driver, passengers, luggage, towing hitch, total curb
mass and drawbar load should not exceed the gross vehicle mass by more than
100 kg (220.5 lb.). Exceeding this weight is dangerous.
Maximum permissible rear axle capacity
The weight borne by the rear axle should not exceed the maximum permissible
rear axle capacity by 15% or more. Exceeding this weight is dangerous.
The values for towing capacity were derived from testing conducted at sea level.
Take note that engine output and towing capacity will be reduced at high altitudes.
Important points regarding trailer loads
1
2
Type A
Type B
1
2
245
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
WARNING
When the gross vehicle mass or maximum permissible axle capacity is exceeded
Failing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious
injury.
Add an additional 20.0 kPa (0.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 3 psi) to the recommended tire infla-
tion pressure value. (P. 691)
Do not exceed the established speed limit for towing a trailer in built-up areas or 100
km/h (62 mph), whichever is the lower.
246
4-1. Before driving
IS300h_EE
Installation positions for the towing hitch/bracket and hitch ball
436 mm (17.2 in.)
475 mm (18.7 in.)
476 mm (18.7 in.)
502 mm (19.8 in.)
520 mm (20.5 in.)
560 mm (22.0 in.)
622 mm (24.5 in.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
307 mm (12.1 in.)
318 mm (12.5 in.)
342 mm (13.5 in.)
394 mm (15.5 in.)
704 mm (27.7 in.)
1138 mm (44.8 in.)
58 mm (2.3 in.)
53 mm (2.1 in.)
42 mm (1.7 in.)
34 mm (1.3 in.)
6 mm (0.2 in.)
11 mm (0.4 in.)
390 mm (15.4 in.)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
247
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Tire information
Increase the tire inflation pressure to 20.0 kPa (0.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 3 psi) greater than
the recommended value when towing. (P. 691)
Increase the air pressure of the trailer tires in accordance with the total trailer weight
and according to the values recommended by the manufacturer of your trailer.
Break-in schedule
Lexus recommends that vehicles fitted with new power train components should not be
used for towing trailers for the first 800 km (500 miles).
Safety checks before towing
Check that the maximum load limit for the towing hitch/bracket hitch ball is not
exceeded. Bear in mind that the coupling weight of the trailer will add to the load
exerted on the vehicle. Also make sure that you will not be towing a load that exceeds
the maximum permissible axle capacity.
Ensure that the trailer load is secure.
Supplementary outside rear view mirrors should be added to the vehicle if the traffic
behind cannot be clearly seen with standard mirrors. Adjust the extending arms of
these mirrors on both sides of the vehicle so that they always provide maximum visibility
of the road behind.
Maintenance
Maintenance must be performed more frequently when using the vehicle for towing
due to the greater weight burden placed on the vehicle compared to normal driving.
Retighten all bolts securing the hitching ball and bracket after towing for approximately
1000 km (600 miles).
NOTICE
When the rear bumper strengthening material is aluminum
Ensure the steel bracket part does not come directly in contact with that area.
When steel and aluminum come into contact, there is a reaction similar to corrosion,
which will weaken the section concerned and may result in damage. Apply a rust inhib-
itor to parts that will come in contact when attaching a steel bracket.
248
4-1. Before driving
IS300h_EE
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. In order to avoid acci-
dent, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind when towing:
Checking connections between trailer and lights
Stop the vehicle and check the operation of the connection between the
trailer and lights after driving for a brief period as well as before starting off.
Practicing driving with a coupled trailer
Get the feel for turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer coupled by
practicing in an area with no or light traffic.
When reversing with a coupled trailer, hold the section of the steering
wheel nearest to you and rotate clockwise to turn the trailer left or
counterclockwise to turn it right. Always rotate a little at a time to prevent
steering error. Have someone guide you when reversing to lessen the risk
of an accident.
Increasing vehicle-to-vehicle distance
At a speed of 10 km/h (6 mph), the distance to the vehicle running ahead of
you should be equivalent to or greater than the combined length of your vehi-
cle and trailer. Avoid sudden braking that may cause skidding. Otherwise, the
vehicle may spin out of control. This is especially true when driving on wet or
slippery road surfaces.
Sudden acceleration/steering input/cornering
Executing sharp turns when towing may result in the trailer colliding with your
vehicle. Decelerate well in advance when approaching turns and take them
slowly and carefully to avoid sudden braking.
Important points regarding turning
The wheels of the trailer will travel closer to the inside of the curve than the
wheels of the vehicle. To make allowance for this, take the turns wider than you
would normally do.
Guidance
249
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Important points regarding stability
Vehicle movement resulting from uneven road surfaces and strong cross-
winds will affect handling. The vehicle may also be rocked by passing buses or
large trucks. Frequently check behind when moving alongside such vehicles.
As soon as such vehicle movement occurs, immediately start to decelerate
smoothly by slowly applying the brakes. Always steer the vehicle straight
ahead while braking.
Passing other vehicles
Consider the total combined length of your vehicle and trailer and ensure that
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is sufficient before executing lane changes.
Transmission information
To maintain engine braking efficiency, when using engine braking when driv-
ing on a long steep downward grade, do not use the transmission in D. The
vehicle must be driven in gear shift position “4” in S mode. (P. 261)
If the engine overheats
Towing a loaded trailer up a long, steep incline in temperatures exceeding
30C (85F) may result in the engine overheating. If the engine coolant tem-
perature gauge indicates that the engine is overheating, turn the air condition-
ing off immediately, leave the road and stop the vehicle in a safe place.
(P. 674)
When parking the vehicle
Always place wheel chocks under the wheels of both the vehicle and trailer.
Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
250
4-1. Before driving
IS300h_EE
WARNING
To avoid accident or injury
Do not tow a trailer when a tire installed is repaired with the emergency tire puncture
repair kit.
Vehicle speed in towing
Observe the legal maximum speeds for trailer towing.
Before descending hills or long declines
Reduce speed and downshift. However, never downshift suddenly while descending
steep or long downhill grades.
Operation of the brake pedal
Do not hold the brake pedal depressed often or for long periods of time.
Doing so may result in the brake overheating or reduce braking effects.
NOTICE
For vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit (if equipped)
Do not tow anything if a tire that has been repaired using the emergency tire puncture
repair kit is installed. The load on the tire may cause unexpected damage to the tire.
251
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
4-2. Driving procedures
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is in P.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.
If it is not displayed, the hybrid system cannot be started.
Press the power switch shortly and
firmly.
When operating the power switch, one
short, firm press is enough. It is not nec-
essary to press and hold the switch.
If the “READY” indicator turns on, the
hybrid system will operate normally.
Continue depressing the brake pedal
until the “READY” indicator is illumi-
nated.
The hybrid system can be started from
any power switch mode.
Check that the “READY” indicator is illuminated.
The vehicle will not move when the “READY” indicator is off.
Power (ignition) switch
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your
person starts the hybrid system or changes power switch modes.
Starting the hybrid system
1
2
3
4
5
252
4-2. Driving procedures
IS300h_EE
Stop the vehicle completely.
Set the parking brake (P. 267), and shift the shift lever to P.
Press the power switch.
Release the brake pedal and check that the display on the meters is off.
Modes can be changed by pressing the power switch with brake pedal released.
(The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)
Off
*
The emergency flashers can be used.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such as the
audio system can be used.
“ACCESSORY” will be displayed on the
meters.
ON mode
All electrical components can be used.
“IGNITION ON” will be displayed on
the meters.
*
: If the shift lever is in a position other than
P when turning off the hybrid system,
the power switch will be turned to
ACCESSORY mode, not to off.
Stopping the hybrid system
Changing power switch modes
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
253
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
If the hybrid system is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the
power switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY
mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off:
Check that the parking brake is set.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Check that “Turn Off Vehicle” is displayed on the multi-information display
and then press the power switch once.
Check that “Turn Off Vehicle” on the multi-information display is off.
Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or ON mode (the
hybrid system is not operating) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the power
switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent 12-volt
battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the power switch in ACCESSORY or
ON mode for long periods of time when the hybrid system is not operating.
Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle
P. 80
Electronic key battery depletion
P. 149
When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions
When starting the hybrid system, the flashing time of the “READY” indicator may be
long. Leave the vehicle as it is until the “READY” indicator is steady on, as steady means
the vehicle is able to move.
Conditions affecting operation
P. 167
Notes for the entry function
P. 168
If the hybrid system does not start
The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 86)
Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The hybrid system may not start if the shift
lever is displaced out of P. “To Start Vehicle, Put Shift Lever into P” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
When stopping the hybrid system with the shift lever in a position other
than P
1
2
3
4
254
4-2. Driving procedures
IS300h_EE
Steering lock
After turning the power switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel
will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the power switch again auto-
matically cancels the steering lock.
When the steering lock cannot be released
Steering lock motor overheating prevention
To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, operation of the motor may be sus-
pended if the hybrid system is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In
this case, refrain from operating the hybrid system. After about 10 seconds, the steering
lock motor will resume functioning.
When “Smart Entry & Start System Malfunction See Owner's Manual” is displayed on
the multi-information display
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
If the “READY” indicator does not come on
In the event that the “READY” indicator does not come on even after performing the
proper procedures for starting the vehicle, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
If the hybrid system is malfunctioning
P. 623
If the electronic key battery is depleted
P. 583
Operation of the power switch
If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the power switch mode may not change or
the hybrid system may not start.
If attempting to restart the hybrid system immediately after turning the power switch off,
the hybrid system may not start in some cases. After turning the power switch off,
please wait a few seconds before restarting the hybrid system.
If the smart entry & start system has been deactivated by a customized setting
P. 666
“Steering Wheel Lock Press Power Switch while
Turning Wheel” will be displayed on the multi-
information display.
Check that the shift lever is in P. Press the power
switch while turning the steering wheel left and
right.
255
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
WARNING
When starting the hybrid system
Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Caution while driving
If hybrid system failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the
doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock
in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency
If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press
and hold the power switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more
in succession. (P. 603)
However, do not touch the power switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning
the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control,
however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer
smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
NOTICE
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the power switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of
time without the hybrid system on.
If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION ON” is displayed on the meters while the hybrid
system is not operating, the power switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the
power switch off.
Do not stop the hybrid system when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the
hybrid system is stopped in another shift lever position, the power switch will not be
turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in
ACCESSORY mode, 12-volt battery discharge may occur.
When starting the hybrid system
If the hybrid system becomes difficult to start, have your vehicle checked by any autho-
rized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the power switch
If the power switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the
switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
256
4-2. Driving procedures
IS300h_EE
Turns EV drive mode on/off
When EV drive mode is turned on, “EV
MODE” will be displayed on the multi-
information display. Pressing the switch
when in EV drive mode will return the
vehicle to normal driving (using the gas-
oline engine and electric motor [traction
motor]).
Type A: Except F SPORT models
Type B: F SPORT models
Situations in which EV drive mode cannot be turned on
It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations. If it cannot be
turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information dis-
play.
The temperature of the hybrid system is high.
The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc.
The temperature of the hybrid system is low.
The vehicle has been left in temperatures lower than about 0C (32F) for a long
period of time etc.
The gasoline engine is warming up.
The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low.
The remaining battery level indicated in the “Energy monitor” display is low.
(P. 137)
Vehicle speed is high.
The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill, etc.
The windshield defogger is in use.
EV drive mode
In EV drive mode, electric power is supplied by the hybrid battery (traction
battery), and only the electric motor (traction motor) is used to drive the vehi-
cle.
This mode allows you to drive in residential areas early in the morning and late
at night, or in indoor parking lots etc. without concern for noises and gas emis-
sions.
Type A Type B
257
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Switching to EV drive mode when the gasoline engine is cold
If the hybrid system is started while the gasoline engine is cold, the gasoline engine will
start automatically after a short period of time in order to warm up. In this case, you will
become unable to switch to EV drive mode.
After the hybrid system has started and the “READY” indicator has illuminated, press the
EV drive mode switch before the gasoline engine starts to switch to EV drive mode.
Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode
When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically restart in the fol-
lowing situations. When EV drive mode is canceled, a buzzer will sound and the EV drive
mode indicator will flash and go off.
The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low.
The remaining battery level indicated in the “Energy monitor” display is low.
(P. 137)
Vehicle speed is high.
The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill, etc.
Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode
EV drive mode’s possible driving distance ranges from a few hundred meters to approxi-
mately 2 km (1.2 mile). However, depending on vehicle conditions, there are situations
when EV drive mode cannot be used.
(The distance that is possible depends on the hybrid battery [traction battery] level and
driving conditions.)
Fuel economy
The hybrid system is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during normal
driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in EV
drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel economy.
WARNING
Caution while driving
When driving in EV drive mode, pay special attention to the area around the vehicle.
Because there is no engine noise, pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people
and vehicles in the area may not be aware of the vehicle starting off or approaching
them, so take extra care while driving.
258
4-2. Driving procedures
IS300h_EE
While the power switch is in ON mode, move the shift lever with the brake
pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is com-
pletely stopped.
Hybrid transmission
Shifting the shift lever
259
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
*
1
: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noise, shift the shift lever to D for normal driv-
ing.
*
2
: By selecting shift ranges using S mode, you can control accelerating force and engine
braking force.
Sport mode/Eco drive mode
P. 381
Snow mode
Snow mode can be selected to suit the conditions when driving on slippery
road surfaces, such as snow.
Press the switch.
Press the switch again to return to
normal mode.
Shift position purpose
Shift position Objective or function
PParking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system
RReversing
NNeutral
(Condition in which the power is not transmitted)
DNormal driving
*
1
SS mode driving
*
2
(P. 261)
Selecting the driving mode
260
4-2. Driving procedures
IS300h_EE
To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” paddle shift switch.
Changing the shift range enables the level of engine braking force to be
selected. The shift range can then be selected by operating the “-” and “+” paddle
shift switches.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The selected shift range, from D1 to D6,
will be displayed in the meter.
The initial shift range when the “-” pad-
dle shift switch is operated is automati-
cally set to D2, D3, D4 or D5 according
to the vehicle speed.
To return to normal D position driving,
the “+” paddle shift switch must be held
down for a period of time.
Shift ranges and their functions
You can choose from 6 levels of engine braking force.
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a higher
shift range, and the engine revolutions will also increase.
Selecting shift ranges in the D position
1
2
261
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
To enter S mode, shift the shift lever to S. Shift ranges can be selected by operat-
ing the shift lever or paddle shift switches, allowing you to drive in the shift range
of your choice. The shift range can be selected by operating the shift lever or the
“-” and “+” paddle shift switches.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The selected shift range, from S1 to S6,
will be displayed in the meter.
The initial shift range in S mode is auto-
matically set to S2, S3, S4 or S5
according to the vehicle speed.
Shift ranges and their functions
You can choose from 6 levels of accelerating force and engine braking
force.
A lower shift range will provide greater accelerating force and engine
braking force than a higher shift range, and the engine revolutions will also
increase.
If you accelerate while in ranges 1 to 4, the shift range may automatically
increase in accordance with the vehicle speed.
Selecting shift ranges in the S position
1
2
262
4-2. Driving procedures
IS300h_EE
When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated with the shift lever in the D position
The shift range is downshifted to a range that enables engine braking force that is suit-
able to driving conditions.
Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position
Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:
When the vehicle comes to a stop
If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time
When the shift lever is shifted to a position other than D
Downshifting restriction warning buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes
be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the
shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
Snow mode automatic deactivation
Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the power switch is turned off after driving in
snow mode.
When driving with cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control activated
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking,
engine braking will not activate because cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control
will not be canceled.
While driving in D or S mode, downshifting to 5 or 4. (P. 325, 337)
When switching the driving mode to sport mode while driving in D position. (P. 381)
Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start Control)
When the following unusual operation is performed, the hybrid system output may be
restrained.
When the shift lever is shifted from R to D, D to R, N to R, P to D, or P to R (D includes S)
with the accelerator pedal depressed, a warning message appears on the multi-infor-
mation display. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the
message and follow the instructions.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed too while the vehicle is in reverse.
Shift lock system
The shift lock system is a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever in start-
ing.
The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the power switch is in ON mode and the
brake pedal is being depressed.
263
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
First, check whether the brake pedal is being depressed.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may be a prob-
lem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever
can be shifted.
Releasing the shift lock:
Set the parking brake.
Turn the power switch off.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver
or equivalent tool.
To prevent damage to the cover, cover the tip
of the screwdriver with a rag.
Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted while the button
is pressed.
WARNING
When driving on slippery road surfaces
Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle
skidding to the side or spinning.
To prevent an accident when releasing the shift lock
Before pressing the shift lock override button, make sure to set the parking brake and
depress the brake pedal.
If the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed instead of the brake pedal when the
shift lock override button is pressed and the shift lever is shifted out of P, the vehicle
may suddenly start, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
1
2
3
4
5
264
4-2. Driving procedures
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
Hybrid battery (traction battery) charge
If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged even
when the engine is running. Therefore, if the vehicle is left with the shift lever in N for a
long period of time, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, and this may
result in the vehicle not being able to start.
265
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
The lever will return to its original position immediately after operation.
Right turn
Lane change to the right (move the
lever partway and release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3 times.
Lane change to the left (move the
lever partway and release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3 times.
Left turn
If the turn signals do not stop flashing after turning left or right, or if you want
to stop them flashing
Operate the lever in the opposite direction to either position or .
If you move the lever to either position or , the selected turn signals will
flash.
Turn signal lever
Operating instructions
1
2
3
4
2 3
1
4
266
4-2. Driving procedures
IS300h_EE
Turn signals can be operated when
The power switch is in ON mode.
If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed
Operate the lever again.
Customization
The number of times the turn signals flash during a lane change can be changed.
(Customizable feature P. 696)
267
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
To set the parking brake, fully depress
the parking brake pedal with your left
foot while depressing the brake pedal
with your right foot.
(Depressing the pedal again releases
the parking brake.)
Parking the vehicle
P. 234
Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
P. 612, 624
Usage in winter time
P. 394
Parking brake
Operating instructions
NOTICE
Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheat-
ing, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
268
4-2. Driving procedures
IS300h_EE
Louder
Lower
When the dial is turned to the lowest
volume, driving sound will be turned off
and the indicator will go off.
ASC is enabled when
The vehicle is being driven in normal mode or sport mode. (P. 381)
Situations that may disable the ASC system
The ASC system may be disabled depending on the driving conditions, such as when the
tires slip due to sudden acceleration.
ASC (Active Sound Control)
: If equipped
The ASC system is an electronic sound system that generates driving sound,
conveying the kinetic situations of the vehicle’s acceleration and deceleration
to the driver through the speakers behind the instrument panel. The vehicle’s
response to the driver’s acceleration behavior and shift operations are also
conveyed in sound. When sport mode is selected, the sound conveyed to the
driver will be louder.
Controlling volume
1
2
269
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Operating the switch turns on the lights as follows:
The front position, tail, license
plate and instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and all lights
listed above turn on.
The headlights, daytime run-
ning lights (P. 270) and all
the lights listed above turn on
and off automatically.
(When the power switch is in
ON mode.)
The daytime running lights turn
on. (P. 270)
With the headlights on, push the
lever away from you to turn on the
high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the center
position to turn the high beams off.
Pull the lever toward you and release
it to flash the high beams once.
You can flash the high beams with the
headlights on or off.
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Operating instructions
1
2
3
4
Turning on the high beam headlights
1
2
270
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
IS300h_EE
This system allows the headlights and front position lights to be turned on for 30
seconds when the power switch is off.
Pull the lever toward you and release it
with the light switch is in or
after turning the power switch off.
Pull the lever toward you and release it
again to turn off the lights.
Daytime running light system
To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime
running lights turn on automatically whenever the hybrid system is started with the head-
light switch off or in the “AUTO” position and the parking brake is released. (Illuminate
brighter than the front position lights.) Daytime running lights are not designed for use at
night.
Headlight control sensor
Automatic light off system
When the light switch is in the or position: The headlights turn off auto-
matically if the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or off.
When the light switch is in the position: The headlights and all lights turn off
automatically if the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or off.
To turn the lights on again, turn the power switch to ON mode, or turn the light switch to
the
position
once and then back to the or
position.
Follow me home system
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything that
blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight system to malfunction.
271
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the power switch is turned off or turned to ACCESSORY mode
and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on.
Automatic headlight leveling system
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passen-
gers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not inter-
fere with other road users.
Customization
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 696)
NOTICE
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
272
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
IS300h_EE
Push the lever away from you with
the headlight switch in the or
position.
Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
The Automatic High Beam indicator will
come on when the system is operating.
Automatic High Beam
: If equipped
The Automatic High Beam uses a camera sensor located behind the upper
portion of the windshield to assess the brightness of the lights of vehicles
ahead, streetlights, etc., and automatically turns the high beams on or off as
necessary.
WARNING
Limitations of the Automatic High Beam
Do not overly rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings and turning the high beams on or off manually if necessary.
To prevent incorrect operation of the Automatic High Beam system
Do not overload the vehicle.
Activating the Automatic High Beam
1
2
273
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Switching to the low beams
Pull the lever to its original position.
The Automatic High Beam indicator
will turn off.
Push the lever away from you to acti-
vate the Automatic High Beam sys-
tem again.
Switching to the high beams
Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
The Automatic High Beam indicator
will turn off and the high beam indi-
cator will turn on.
Press the switch to activate the Auto-
matic High Beam system again.
Turning the high beams on/off manually
274
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
IS300h_EE
Conditions to turn the high beams on/off automatically
When all of the following conditions are met, the high beams will be turned on automat-
ically (after approximately 1 second):
The vehicle speed is approximately 40 km/h (25 mph) or more.
The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
There are no vehicles ahead with headlights or tail lights turned on.
There are few streetlights on the road ahead.
If any of the following conditions is met, the high beams will turn off automatically:
The vehicle speed is below approximately 30 km/h (19 mph).
The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.
Vehicles ahead have their headlights or tail lights turned on.
There are many streetlights on the road ahead.
Camera sensor detection information
The high beams may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:
When a vehicle suddenly appears from around a curve
When the vehicle is cut in front of by another vehicle
When vehicles ahead cannot be detected due to repeated curves, road dividers or
roadside trees
When vehicles ahead appear in a faraway lane on a wide road
When the lights of vehicles ahead are not on
The high beams may be turned off if a vehicle ahead that is using fog lights without its
headlights turned on is detected.
House lights, street lights, traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs and other
reflective objects may cause the high beams to change to the low beams, or the low
beams to remain on.
The following factors may affect the amount of time taken for the high beams to turn on
or off:
The brightness of the headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead
The movement and direction of vehicles ahead
When a vehicle ahead only has operational lights on one side
When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled vehicle
The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface, etc.)
The number of passengers and amount of luggage in the vehicle
The high beams may turn on or off unexpectedly.
275
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Bicycles or similar vehicles may not be detected.
In the following situations the system may not be able to correctly detect the surround-
ing brightness level. This may cause the low beams to remain on or the high beams to
flash or dazzle pedestrians or vehicles ahead. In such a case, it is necessary to manually
switch between the high and low beams.
When driving in inclement weather (heavy rain, snow, fog, sandstorms, etc.)
When the windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt, etc.
When the windshield is cracked or damaged
When the camera sensor is deformed or dirty
When the temperature of the camera sensor is extremely high
When the surrounding brightness level is equal to that of headlights, tail lights or fog
lights
When headlights or tail lights of vehicles ahead are turned off, dirty, changing color,
or not aimed properly
When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a preceding vehicle
When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness
When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with
rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel roads, etc.)
When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road
When there is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or mirror
When the back of a preceding vehicle is highly reflective, such as a container on a
truck
When the vehicle's headlights are damaged or dirty, or are not aimed properly
When the vehicle is listing or titling due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed, etc.
When the headlights are changed between the high beams and low beams repeat-
edly in an abnormal manner
When the driver believes that the high beams may be flashing or dazzling pedestri-
ans or other drivers
When the vehicle is used in an area in which vehicles travel on the opposite side of
the road of the country for which the vehicle was designed, for example using a vehi-
cle designed for right-hand traffic in a left-hand traffic area, or vice versa
276
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
IS300h_EE
Turns the rear fog light on
Releasing the switch ring returns it to
.
Operating the switch ring again turns
the rear fog light off.
Fog light can be used when
The headlights or the front position lights are turned on.
Fog light switch
The fog light secure excellent visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in
rain and fog.
277
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Operating the lever operates the wipers or washer as follows. The lever
will return to its original position immediately after operation.
Intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster
Move the lever up by 2 levels
Move the lever up by 1 level
Move the lever down by 1 level
Move the lever down by 2 lev-
els
Windshield wipers and washer
Operating the wiper lever
1
2
3
4
Off Temporary
operation
Temporary
operation
Intermittent
operation
High speed
operation
Intermittent
operation Off Off Low speed
operation
High speed
operation
Low speed
operation Off Intermittent
operation
High speed
operation
High speed
operation
High speed
operation Off Low speed
operation No change No change
Status
before
operation
Operation
278
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
IS300h_EE
Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.
Increases the intermittent windshield
wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent wind-
shield wiper frequency
The intermittent windshield wiper oper-
ates more frequently as vehicle speed
becomes higher.
Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
Pulling the lever operates the wipers
and washer.
The wipers will automatically operate a
couple of times after the washer squirts.
When the power switch is in ON mode
and the headlights are on, if the lever is
pulled, the headlight cleaners will oper-
ate once. After this, the headlight
cleaners will operate every 5th time the
lever is pulled.
5
6
7
279
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
R
ain-sensing windshield wipers
Move the lever up by 2 levels
Move the lever up by 1 level
Move the lever down by 1 level
Move the lever down by 2 lev-
els
AUTO mode on/off switch
With AUTO mode selected, the wipers
will operate automatically when the sen-
sor detects falling rain. The system auto-
matically adjusts wiper timing in
accordance with rain volume and vehi-
cle speed.
The AUTO mode indicator will turn on when AUTO mode is selected.
*
1
: After temporary operation, the mode will return to AUTO mode.
*
2
: AUTO mode will be canceled.
AUTO mode
indicator
1
2
3
4
5
Off Temporary
operation
Temporary
operation
Low speed
operation
High speed
operation
Low speed
operation Off Off High speed
operation
High speed
operation
High speed
operation Off Low speed
operation No change No change
AUTO
mode
Intermittent
operation Off
Temporary
operation
*
1
Low speed
operation
*
2
High speed
operation
*
2
Continuously No change
Operation
Status
before
operation
280
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
IS300h_EE
When AUTO mode is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be adjusted by turning
the switch ring.
Increases the sensitivity
Decreases the sensitivity
Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
Pulling the lever operates the wipers
and washer.
The wipers will automatically operate a
couple of times after the washer squirts.
When the power switch is in ON mode
and the headlights are on, if the lever is
pulled, the headlight cleaners will oper-
ate once. After this, the headlight
cleaners will operate every 5th time the
lever is pulled.
The wipers can be used as intermittent windshield wipers, which operate regard-
less of vehicle speed or amount of raindrops. The intermittent windshield wiper
operation can be switched when the vehicle is stopped and the wiper is off. The
wiper operation cannot be switched during AUTO mode or while the intermit-
tent windshield wipers are operating.
Press and hold until the AUTO
mode indicator stops flashing.
If is pressed and held until the
AUTO mode indicator stops flashing
again, it will return to its previous state.
The wiper can be switched when the
vehicle is stopped and the wipers are off.
6
7
8
Switching between the intermittent windshield wipers and rain-sensing
windshield wipers (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
281
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Operation of the intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster
Move the lever up by 2 lev-
els
Move the lever up by 1 level
Move the lever down by 1
level
Move the lever down by 2
levels
1
2
3
4
Off Temporary
operation
Temporary
operation
Intermittent
operation
High speed
operation
Intermittent
operation Off Off Low speed
operation
High speed
operation
Low speed
operation Off Intermittent
operation
High speed
operation
High speed
operation
High speed
operation Off Low speed
operation No change No change
Status
before
operation
Operation
282
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
IS300h_EE
Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.
Increases the intermittent wind-
shield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent wind-
shield wiper frequency
The intermittent windshield wiper
operates more frequently as vehicle
speed becomes higher.
Washer/wiper dual oper-
ation
Pulling the lever operates the wipers
and washer.
The wipers will automatically operate
a couple of times after the washer
squirts.
When the power switch is in ON
mode and the headlights are on, if the
lever is pulled, the headlight cleaners
will operate once. After this, the
headlight cleaners will operate every
5th time the lever is pulled.
5
6
7
283
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
The power switch is in ON mode.
Dripping prevention wiper sweep
After performing a washing and wiping operation several times, the wipers operate one
more time after a short delay to prevent dripping.
However, this final wiper operation will not be performed while driving.
Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wip-
ers)
Vehicle speed affects the following even when the wipers are not in AUTO mode.
Intermittent wiper interval
Wiper operation when the washer is being used (delay until drip prevention wiper
sweep occurs)
With low speed windshield wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be switched
from low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.
Raindrop sensor (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
If the wiper is turned to AUTO mode while the power switch is in ON mode, the wipers
will operate once to show that AUTO mode is activated.
If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 85°C (185°F) or higher, or -30°C (-22°F)
or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the wipers in any
mode other than AUTO mode.
When the windshield wipers are in temporary operation (vehicles with rain-sensing
windshield wipers)
AUTO mode cannot be activated even if is pressed.
If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
The raindrop sensor judges the amount of
raindrops.
An optical sensor is adopted. It may not oper-
ate properly when sunlight from the rising or
setting of the sun intermittently strikes the
windshield, or if bugs etc. are present on the
windshield.
284
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the wind-
shield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or anything
else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
Caution regarding the use of washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The
fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and
held continually.
When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
285
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
4-4. Refueling
Close all the doors and windows, and turn the power switch off.
Confirm the type of fuel.
Fuel types
P. 684
Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accom-
modates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
Before refueling the vehicle
286
4-4. Refueling
IS300h_EE
WARNING
When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal
surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity
before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors
to ignite while refueling.
Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the
sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel
may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come
close to an open fuel tank.
Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:
Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
Do not top off the fuel tank.
NOTICE
Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted sur-
face.
287
4-4. Refueling
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
With the doors unlocked, press the
center of the rear edge of the fuel
filler door.
Push until you hear a click and take your
hand away to slightly open the fuel filler
door. Then open the door fully by hand.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
remove it and put it into the holder
on the fuel filler door.
If the fuel filler door cannot be opened
Opening the fuel tank cap
1
2
Remove the cover inside the trunk and pull the
lever to open the fuel filler door if the fuel filler
door cannot be opened by pressing the rear
edge of the fuel filler door.
288
4-4. Refueling
IS300h_EE
After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap
until you hear a click. Once the cap
is released, it will turn slightly in the
opposite direction.
Close the fuel filler door, and press
the center of the rear edge of the
fuel filler door until you hear a click.
When you lock the doors, the fuel filler
door will also lock.
Fuel filler door lock condition
The fuel filler door may not be locked even when the vehicle’s doors are locked in the fol-
lowing situations:
When operating the door lock button inside the vehicle
When the automatic door locking system is operated (P. 156)
When the fuel filler door is closed after the vehicle’s doors are locked
Closing the fuel tank cap
1
2
WARNING
When replacing the fuel tank cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing
so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.
289
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
4-5. Using the driving support systems
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
P. 301
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)
P. 312
Automatic High Beam
P. 272
RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped)
P. 320
Dynamic radar cruise control
P. 325
Lexus Safety System +
: If equipped
The Lexus Safety System + consists of the following drive assist systems and
contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experience:
WARNING
Lexus Safety System +
The Lexus Safety System + is designed to operate under the assumption that the driver
will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to the occupants and the
vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in normal driving conditions.
As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that
this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsi-
ble for paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings and driving safely.
290
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
The pre-collision system is equipped with a sophisticated computer that will
record certain data, such as:
Accelerator status
Brake status
Vehicle speed
Operation status of the pre-collision system functions
Information (such as the distance and relative speed between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead or other objects)
The pre-collision system does not record conversations, sounds or pictures.
Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose malfunctions,
conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if
the vehicle is leased
In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-
ment agency
For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner
Vehicle data recording
291
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Two types of sensors, located behind the front grille and windshield, detect infor-
mation necessary to operate the drive assist systems.
Radar sensor
Camera sensor
Sensors
1
2
WARNING
To avoid malfunction of the radar sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
Keep the radar sensor and front grille emblem clean at all times.
Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers) or other items to
the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.
Do not subject the radar sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper has been subjected to a strong impact,
have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Do not disassemble the radar sensor.
Do not modify or paint the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.
If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper needs to be removed and installed, or
replaced, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
Radar sensor
Front grille emblem
If the front of the radar sensor or the front or
back of the front grille emblem is dirty or
covered with water droplets, snow, etc., clean
it.
Clean the radar sensor and front grille
emblem with a soft cloth so you do not mark
or damage them.
1
2
292
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
WARNING
To avoid malfunction of the camera sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the camera sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an acci-
dent resulting in death or serious injury.
Keep the windshield clean at all times.
If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets, snow, etc.,
clear the windshield.
If a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be necessary to use
the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from the area of the wind-
shield in front of the camera sensor.
If the inner side of the windshield where the camera sensor is installed is dirty, con-
tact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
If the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with
condensation or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove the fog, condensation or
ice. (P. 510)
If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the windshield in front
of the camera sensor by the windshield wipers, replace the wiper insert or wiper
blade.
If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need to be replaced, contact any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Do not attach objects, such as stickers, trans-
parent stickers, and so forth, to the outer side
of the windshield in front of the camera sensor
(shaded area in the illustration).
A: From the top of the windshield to approxi-
mately 1 cm (0.4 in.) below the bottom of the
camera sensor
B: Approximately 20 cm (7.9 in.) (Approxi-
mately 10 cm [4.0 in.] to the right and left
from the center of the camera sensor)
293
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.
Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked.
If the windshield needs to be replaced, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Do not get the camera sensor wet.
Do not allow bright lights to shine into the camera sensor.
Do not dirty or damage the camera sensor.
When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to contact the
lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus autho-
rized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong impact.
Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or remove it.
Do not disassemble the camera sensor.
Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the camera sensor (inside rear
view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.
Do not attach any accessories that may obstruct the camera sensor to the hood, front
grille or front bumper. Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer for details.
If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure that it will
not obstruct the camera sensor.
Do not modify the headlights or other lights.
294
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
Certification
295
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
296
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
297
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
298
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
299
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
300
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
For vehicles sold in Israel
301
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
: If equipped
The pre-collision system uses a radar sensor and camera sensor to detect
vehicles and pedestrians in front of your vehicle. When the system determines
that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high, a
warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential
brake pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the system
determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedes-
trian is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the
collision or help reduce the impact of the collision.
The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can
be changed. (P. 305)
302
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
Pre-collision warning
When the system determines that
the possibility of a frontal collision is
high, a buzzer will sound and a warn-
ing message will be displayed on the
multi-information display to urge the
driver to take evasive action.
Pre-collision brake assist
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake
pedal is depressed.
Pre-collision braking
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the system warns the driver. If the system determines that the possibility of a
frontal collision is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help
avoid the collision or reduce the collision speed.
Suspension control (if equipped)
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the Adaptive Variable Suspension System (P. 386) will control the damp-
ing force of the shock absorbers to help maintain an appropriate vehicle pos-
ture.
303
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Limitations of the pre-collision system
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings.
Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations under any
circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen collision damage or
injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this system. Failure to do so may lead to
an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce the impact of
the collision, its effectiveness may change according to various conditions, therefore
the system may not always be able to achieve the same level of performance.
Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always
drive carefully.
Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a
collision: P. 307
Conditions under which the system may not operate properly: P. 309
Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself, as the system
may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.
Pre-collision braking
When the pre-collision braking function is operating, a large amount of braking force
will be applied.
If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision braking function, the pre-
collision braking function operation will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds.
Depress the brake pedal as necessary.
The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are per-
formed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steer-
ing wheel is being turned, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive
action and possibly prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating.
In some situations, while the pre-collision braking function is operating, operation of
the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly or the
steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive
action.
If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the driver is tak-
ing evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the pre-collision braking
function.
304
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
WARNING
When to disable the pre-collision system
In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate properly, possibly
leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
When the vehicle is being towed
When your vehicle is towing another vehicle
When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of transportation
When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the hybrid system on and the tires are allowed
to rotate freely
When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or
speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel balancer
When a strong impact is applied to the front bumper or front grille, due to an accident
or other reasons
If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been
in an accident or is malfunctioning
When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road
When the tires are not properly inflated
When the tires are very worn
When tires of a size other than specified are installed
When tire chains are installed
When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used
If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may obstruct the radar sensor or camera sensor is
temporarily installed to the vehicle
305
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Enabling/disabling the pre-collision system
The pre-collision system can be enabled/disabled on (P. 128) of the
multi-information display.
The system is automatically enabled each time the power switch is turned to ON
mode.
If the system is disabled, the PCS
warning light will turn on and a mes-
sage will be displayed on the multi-
information display.
Changing the pre-collision warning timing
The pre-collision warning timing can be changed on (P. 128) of the
multi-information display.
The operation timing setting is retained when the power switch is turned off.
Far
The warning will begin to operate
earlier than with the default timing.
Middle
This is the default setting.
Near
The warning will begin to operate
later than with the default timing.
Changing settings of the pre-collision system
1
2
3
306
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
Operational conditions
The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a
frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high.
Each function is operational at the following speeds:
Pre-collision warning:
Vehicle speed is between approximately 10 and 180 km/h (7 and 110 mph). (For
detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 10 and 80 km/h [7
and 50 mph].)
The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is
approximately 10 km/h (7 mph) or more.
Pre-collision brake assist:
Vehicle speed is between approximately 30 and 180 km/h (20 and 110 mph). (For
detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 30 and 80 km/h
[20 and 50 mph].)
The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is
approximately 30 km/h (20 mph) or more.
Pre-collision braking:
Vehicle speed is between approximately 10 and 180 km/h (7 and 110 mph). (For
detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 10 and 80 km/h [7
and 50 mph].)
The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is
approximately 10 km/h (7 mph) or more.
The system may not operate in the following situations:
If a 12-volt battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehi-
cle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
If the shift lever is in R
If VSC is disabled (only the pre-collision warning function will be operational)
Pedestrian detection function
Cancelation of the pre-collision braking
If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will
be canceled:
The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.
The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.
The pre-collision system detects pedestrians
based on the size, profile, and motion of a
detected object. However, a pedestrian may not
be detected depending on the surrounding
brightness and the motion, posture, and angle of
the detected object, preventing the system from
operating properly. (P. 310)
307
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a colli-
sion
In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that there is a possi-
bility of a frontal collision and operate.
When passing a vehicle or pedestrian
When changing lanes while overtaking a preceding vehicle
When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is changing lanes
When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead
If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when the road surface is
uneven or undulating
When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, utility poles, trees, or
walls
When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on
an iron bridge
When overtaking a preceding vehicle that
is making a left/right turn
When passing a vehicle in an oncoming
lane that is stopped to make a right/left turn
When driving on a road where relative
location to vehicle ahead in an adjacent
lane may change, such as on a winding
road
When there is a vehicle, pedestrian, or
object by the roadside at the entrance of a
curve
308
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
When there is a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a protrusion
on the road surface or roadside
When rapidly closing on an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier, or other
barrier that opens and closes
When using an automatic car wash
When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
When driving through steam or smoke
When there are patterns or paint on the road or a wall that may be mistaken for a
vehicle or pedestrian
When driving near an object that reflects radio waves, such as a large truck or
guardrail
When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or other
location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present
When a crossing pedestrian approaches
very close to the vehicle
When passing through a place with a low
structure above the road (low ceiling, traffic
sign, etc.)
When passing under an object (billboard,
etc.) at the top of an uphill road
When driving through or under objects
that may contact the vehicle, such as thick
grass, tree branches, or a banner
309
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Situations in which the system may not operate properly
In some situations such as the following, a vehicle may not be detected by the radar
sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:
If an oncoming vehicle is approaching your vehicle
If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle or bicycle
When approaching the side or front of a vehicle
If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck
If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper
If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car
If the sun or other light is shining directly on a vehicle ahead
If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or emerges from beside a vehicle
If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving, accelera-
tion or deceleration)
When suddenly cutting behind a preceding vehicle
When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm
When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
When driving through steam or smoke
When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such
as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel
When a very bright light, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming traffic, shines
directly into the camera sensor
When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in a
tunnel
If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end,
such as a low bed trailer
If a vehicle ahead has extremely high
ground clearance
When a vehicle ahead is not directly in front
of your vehicle
310
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
After the hybrid system has started the vehicle has not been driven for a certain
amount of time
While making a left/right turn and for a few seconds after making a left/right turn
While driving on a curve and for a few seconds after driving on a curve
If your vehicle is skidding
If the wheels are misaligned
If a wiper blade is blocking the camera sensor
The vehicle is wobbling.
The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds.
When driving on a hill
If the radar sensor or camera sensor is misaligned
In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force may not be obtained,
preventing the system from performing properly:
If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when the brake
parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet
If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively worn,
improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)
When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery surface
Some pedestrians such as the following may not be detected by the radar sensor and
camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:
Pedestrians shorter than approximately 1 m (3.2 ft.) or taller than approximately 2 m
(6.5 ft.)
Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), making their sil-
houette obscure
Pedestrians who are carrying large baggage, holding an umbrella, etc., hiding part
of their body
Pedestrians who are bending forward or squatting
Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle
Groups of pedestrians which are close together
Pedestrians who are wearing white and look extremely bright
Pedestrians in the dark, such as at night or while in a tunnel
Pedestrians whose clothing appears to be nearly the same color or brightness as
their surroundings
Pedestrians near walls, fences, guardrails, or large objects
Pedestrians who are on a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.) on the road
Pedestrians who are walking fast
Pedestrians who are changing speed abruptly
Pedestrians running out from behind a vehicle or a large object
Pedestrians who are extremely close to the side of the vehicle (outside rear view
mirror, etc.)
If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-
ered
311
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
If the PCS warning light flashes or illuminates and a warning message is displayed on
the multi-information display
The pre-collision system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction
in the system.
In the following situations, the warning light will turn off, the message will disappear and
the system will become operational when normal operating conditions return:
When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is hot,
such as in the sun
When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is cold,
such as in an extremely cold environment
When a front sensor is dirty or covered with snow, etc.
When the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or cov-
ered with condensation or ice (Defogging the windshield:
P. 510)
If the camera sensor is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a sticker is
attached to the windshield near the camera sensor
If the PCS warning light continues to flash or remains illuminated or the warning mes-
sage does not disappear even though the vehicle has returned to normal, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
If VSC is disabled
If VSC is disabled (P. 387), the pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision braking
functions are also disabled.
The PCS warning light will turn on and “VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake System
Unavailable” will be displayed on the multi-information display.
312
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
When driving on highways and freeways with white (yellow) lines, this function
alerts the driver when the vehicle might depart from its lane and provides assis-
tance by operating the steering wheel to keep the vehicle in its lane.
The LDA system recognizes visible
white (yellow) lines with the camera
sensor on the upper portion of the front
windshield.
Lane departure alert function
When the system determines that
the vehicle might depart from its
lane, a warning is displayed on the
multi-information display, and either
the warning buzzer sounds or the
steering wheel vibrates to alert the
driver.
When the warning buzzer sounds or
the steering wheel vibrates, check
the surrounding road situation and
carefully operate the steering wheel
to move the vehicle back to the cen-
ter of the lane.
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)
: If equipped
Summary of functions
Functions included in LDA system
313
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Steering control function
When the system determines that
the vehicle might depart from its
lane, the system provides assistance
as necessary by operating the steer-
ing wheel in small amounts for a
short period of time to keep the
vehicle in its lane.
Except for Israel: If the system
detects that the steering wheel has
not been operated for a fixed amount
of time or the steering wheel is not
being firmly gripped, a warning is dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play and the function is temporarily
canceled.
For Israel: If the system detects that
the steering wheel has not been
operated for a fixed amount of time
or the steering wheel is not being
firmly gripped, a warning is displayed
on the multi-information display and
the warning buzzer sounds.
Vehicle sway warning function
When the vehicle is swaying or
appears as if it may depart from its
lane multiple times, the warning
buzzer sounds and a message is dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play to alert the driver.
314
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Before using LDA system
Do not rely solely upon the LDA system. The LDA system does not automatically drive
the vehicle or reduce the amount of attention that must be paid to the area in front of
the vehicle. The driver must always assume full responsibility for driving safely by pay-
ing careful attention to the surrounding conditions and operating the steering wheel to
correct the path of the vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when
fatigued, such as from driving for a long period of time.
Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention may lead to
an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
To avoid operating LDA system by mistake
When not using the LDA system, use the LDA switch to turn the system off.
Situations unsuitable for LDA system
Do not use the LDA system in the following situations.
The system may not operate properly and lead to an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are equipped.
When the tires have been excessively worn, or when the tire inflation pressure is low.
Tires which differ by structure, manufacturer, brand or tread pattern are used.
Objects or patterns that could be mistaken for white (yellow) lines are present on the
side of the road (guardrails, curbs, reflective poles, etc.).
Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road.
White (yellow) lines are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.
Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow) line marks, etc. are present due to road repair.
Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or restricted lane due to construction work.
Vehicle is driven on a road surface which is slippery due to rainy weather, fallen snow,
freezing, etc.
Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes other than on highways and freeways.
Vehicle is driven in a construction zone.
Vehicle is towing a trailer or another vehicle.
Preventing LDA system malfunctions and operations performed by mistake
Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc. on the surface of the lights.
Do not modify the suspension etc. If the suspension etc. needs to be replaced, con-
tact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a grille guard
(bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).
If your windshield needs repairs, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
315
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Press the LDA switch to turn the LDA
system on.
The LDA indicator illuminates and a
message is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display.
Press the LDA switch again to turn the
LDA system off.
When the LDA system is turned on or
off, operation of the LDA system contin-
ues in the same condition the next time
the hybrid system is started.
Turning LDA system on
316
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
LDA indicator
The illumination condition of the
indicator informs the driver of the
system operation status.
Illuminated in white:
LDA system is operating.
Illuminated in green:
Steering wheel assistance of the steer-
ing control function is operating.
Flashing in orange:
Lane departure alert function is operat-
ing.
Operation display of steering wheel
operation support
Indicates that steering wheel assistance of the steering control function is
operating.
Lane departure alert function display
Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving assist
system information screen.
Indications on multi-information display
1
2
3
Inside of displayed white lines is
white
Inside of displayed white lines is
black
Indicates that the system is recognizing
white (yellow) lines. When the vehicle
departs from its lane, the white line dis-
played on the side the vehicle departs
from flashes orange.
Indicates that the system is not able to
recognize white (yellow) lines or is
temporarily canceled.
317
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Operation conditions of each function
Lane departure alert function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
LDA is turned on.
Vehicle speed is approximately 50 km/h (32 mph) or more.
System recognizes white (yellow) lines.
Width of traffic lane is approximately 3 m (9.8 ft.) or more.
Turn signal lever is not operated.
Vehicle is driven on a straight road or around a gentle curve with a radius of more
than approximately 150 m (492 ft.).
No system malfunctions are detected. (P. 611)
Steering control function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met in addition to the
operation conditions for the lane departure alert function.
Setting for Steering Assist in of the multi-information display is set to On.
(P. 128)
Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated by a certain amount or more.
Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing
lanes.
ABS, VSC, TRC and PCS are not operating.
TRC or VSC is not turned off.
Except for Israel: Hands off steering wheel warning is not displayed. (P. 318)
Vehicle sway warning function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
Setting for Sway Warning in of the multi-information display is set to On.
(P. 128)
Vehicle speed is approximately 50 km/h (32 mph) or more.
Width of traffic lane is approximately 3 m (9.8 ft.) or more.
No system malfunctions are detected. (P. 611)
Temporary cancellation of functions
When the operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily
canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the func-
tion is automatically restored. (P. 317)
Steering control function
Depending on the vehicle speed, lane departure situation, road conditions, etc., the
driver may not feel the function is operating or the function may not operate at all.
Lane departure alert function
The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio playback, etc.
Also, it may be difficult to feel steering wheel vibrations due to the road conditions etc.
318
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
Hands off steering wheel warning
If the driver continues to keep their hands off of the steering wheel, a warning message
and the symbol shown in the illustration are displayed on the multi-information display,
and the function is temporarily canceled. This warning also operates in the same way
when the driver continuously operates the steering wheel only a small amount. Always
keep your hands on the steering wheel when using this system, regardless of warnings.
Depending on the vehicle and road conditions, the warning may not operate.
If the driver continues to keep their hands off of the steering wheel, a buzzer sounds and
a warning message and the symbol shown in the illustration are displayed on the multi-
information display. This warning also operates in the same way when the driver continu-
ously operates the steering wheel only a small amount. Always keep your hands on the
steering wheel when using this system, regardless of warnings.
Depending on the vehicle and road conditions, the warning may not operate.
Vehicle sway warning function
Depending on the vehicle and road conditions, the warning may not operate.
White (yellow) lines are only on one side of road
The LDA system will not operate for the side on which white (yellow) lines could not be
recognized.
Except for Israel: When the system determines
that the driver has removed their hands from the
steering wheel while the steering control func-
tion is operating, a warning message urging the
driver to hold the steering wheel and the symbol
shown in the illustration are displayed on the
multi-information display.
For Israel: When the system determines that the
driver has removed their hands from the steer-
ing wheel while the steering control function is
operating, a warning message urging the driver
to hold the steering wheel and the symbol
shown in the illustration are displayed on the
multi-information display.
When the system determines that the vehicle is
swaying while the vehicle sway warning function
is operating, a buzzer sounds and a warning
message urging the driver to rest and the sym-
bol shown in the illustration are simultaneously
displayed on the multi-information display.
319
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Conditions in which functions may not operate properly
In the following situations, the camera sensor may not detect white (yellow) lines and var-
ious functions may not operate normally.
There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white (yellow) lines.
The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a tollgate
or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.
The white (yellow) lines are cracked, “Raised pavement marker” or stones are present.
The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand, etc.
The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.
The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than lines that are
white).
The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc.
The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete.
The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc.
The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly, such as at the
entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.
Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera.
The vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc.
The vehicle is driven on a slope.
The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road.
The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road.
The vehicle is driven around a sharp curve.
The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide.
The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having improper tire
pressure.
The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short.
The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions during driv-
ing (poor roads or road seams).
The headlight lenses are dirty and emit a faint amount of light at night, or the beam axis
has deviated.
The vehicle is struck by a crosswind.
The vehicle has just changed lanes or crossed an intersection.
Snow tires, etc. are equipped.
Warning message
Warning messages are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of
the need for caution while driving. (P. 618)
Customization
P. 128
320
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
RSA recognizes specific road signs
using the camera sensor and provides
information to the driver via the multi-
information display.
If the system judges that the vehicle is being driven over the speed limit, perform-
ing prohibited actions, etc. in relation to the recognized road signs, it alerts the
driver using a warning display and warning buzzer
*
.
*
: This setting needs to be customized.
RSA (Road Sign Assist)
: If equipped
Summary of function
Camera sensor
WARNING
Before using the RSA
Do not rely solely upon the RSA system. RSA is a system which supports the driver by
providing information, but it is not a replacement for a driver’s own vision and aware-
ness. Drive safely by always paying careful attention to the traffic rules.
Inappropriate or negligent driving could lead to an unexpected accident.
321
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
After the camera sensor recognizes a sign, it is displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display when the vehicle passes the sign.
When the driving assist system infor-
mation is selected, a maximum of 3
signs can be displayed. (P. 119)
When other than the driving assist
system information is selected, a
speed limit sign or an all canceled
sign can be displayed. (P. 119)
A no overtaking sign and a speed
limit sign with supplemental mark are
not displayed. However, if signs other
than speed limit signs are recog-
nized, they are mentioned in a stack
under the current speed limit sign.
Indication on the multi-information display
322
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
The following types of road signs, including electronic signs and blinking signs,
are recognized.
A non-official (not meeting the Vienna Convention) or a recently introduced traffic
sign may not be recognized.
Types of recognized road signs
Type Multi-information display
Speed limit begins/ends
Speed limit with sup-
plemental mark
(Displayed simulta-
neously with speed
limit)
(Display example)
Wet
Rain
Ice
On/off ramp
*
1
Supplemental mark
exists
(Contents not recog-
nized)
No overtaking begins/ends
No-entry
*
2
All canceled
(All restrictions canceled. Returns to default
road regulation.)
323
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
*
1
: If the turn signal indicator is not operated when changing lanes, the mark does not dis-
play.
*
2
: Vehicles with a navigation system
In the following situations, the RSA system alerts the driver using a warning dis-
play.
When the vehicle speed exceeds the speed warning threshold applied to the
speed limit of the sign displayed on the multi-information display, the sign
color becomes inverted.
If it is detected that your vehicle is overtaking when a no overtaking sign is dis-
played on the multi-information display, the sign flashes.
Vehicles with a navigation system: When the RSA system recognizes a no-
entry sign and detects that the vehicle has entered a no-entry area based on
the map information of the navigation system, the no-entry sign flashes.
Depending on the situation, traffic environment (traffic direction, speed, unit)
may be detected incorrectly and a warning display may not operate properly.
Automatic turn-off of RSA sign display
One or more signs automatically turn off in the following situations.
A new sign is not recognized for a certain distance.
The road changes due to a left or right turn, etc.
Conditions in which the function may not operate or detect correctly
In the following situations, RSA does not operate normally and may not recognize signs,
display the incorrect sign, etc. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.
The camera sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact being applied to the sensor,
etc.
Dirt, snow, stickers, etc. are on the windshield near the camera sensor.
In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms
Light from an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera sensor.
The sign is dirty, faded, tilted or bent, and if an electronic sign, the contrast is poor.
All or part of the sign is hidden by the leaves of a tree, a pole, etc.
The sign is only visible to the camera sensor for a short amount of time.
The driving scene (turning, lane change, etc.) is judged incorrectly.
Even if it is a sign not appropriate for the currently traveled lane, such a sign exists
directly after a freeway branches, or in an adjacent lane just before merging.
Stickers are attached to the rear of the preceding vehicle.
A sign resembling a system compatible sign is recognized.
The vehicle is driven in a country with a different direction of traffic.
Warning display
324
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
Side road speed signs may be detected and displayed (if positioned in sight of the cam-
era sensor) while the vehicle is traveling on the main road.
Roundabout exit road speed signs may be detected and displayed (if positioned in sight
of the camera sensor) while traveling on a roundabout.
When driving vehicle in country with different speed unit
Since RSA recognizes signs based on the set unit of the meter, it is necessary to change
the set unit of the meter. Adjust the set unit of the meter to the speed unit of signs in the
current location. (P. 696)
Turning the system on/off
Speed limit sign display
If the power switch was last turned off while a speed limit sign was displayed on the multi-
information display, the same sign displays again when the power switch is turned to ON
mode.
Customization
Setting (e.g. speeding warning threshold) can be changed.
(Customizable feature: P. 128)
Select on the settings display
(P. 128)
Press on the steering wheel.
1
2
325
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically acceler-
ates and decelerates to match the speed changes of the preceding vehicle even
if the accelerator pedal is not depressed. In constant speed control mode, the
vehicle runs at a fixed speed.
Use the dynamic radar cruise control on freeways and highways.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode (P. 328)
Constant speed control mode (P. 333)
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch
Display
Set speed
Indicators
Cruise control switch
Dynamic radar cruise control
: If equipped
Summary of functions
1
2
3
4
5
326
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Before using dynamic radar cruise control
Driving safely is the sole responsibility of the driver. Do not rely solely on the system,
and drive safely by always paying careful attention to your surroundings.
The dynamic radar cruise control provides driving assistance to reduce the driver’s
burden. However, there are limitations to the assistance provided.
Set the speed appropriately depending on the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions,
weather conditions, etc. The driver is responsible for checking the set speed.
Even when the system is functioning normally, the condition of the preceding vehicle as
detected by the system may differ from the condition observed by the driver. There-
fore, the driver must always remain alert, assess the danger of each situation and drive
safely. Relying on this system or assuming the system ensures safety while driving can
lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
Cautions regarding the driving assist systems
Observe the following precautions, as there are limitations to the assistance provided
by the system.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Assisting the driver to measure following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in determining
the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle
traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it
is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary
for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.
Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance
between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is within a
set range. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement. Therefore, it is
absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not
there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.
Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control has limited capability to prevent or avoid a collision
with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver must
take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in order to
ensure the safety of all involved.
To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar cruise control activation
Switch the dynamic radar cruise control off using the “ON/OFF” button when not in
use.
327
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident result-
ing in death or serious injury.
Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclists, etc.
In heavy traffic
On roads with sharp bends
On winding roads
On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down
gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
At entrances to freeways and highways
When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from
detecting correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
When there is rain, snow, etc. on the front surface of the radar sensor or camera sen-
sor
In traffic conditions that require frequent repeated acceleration and deceleration
When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
When an approach warning buzzer is heard often
328
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to
approximately 100 m (328 ft.) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle
following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from
the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on downhill slopes.
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.
Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising
When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed appears
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically deceler-
ates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system
applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). The system will respond to
changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance set by the driver. Approach warning warns you when the system cannot
decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set
speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to con-
stant speed cruising.
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
1
2
3
329
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Press the “ON/OFF” button to acti-
vate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator will come
on and a message will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
Press the button again to deactivate the
cruise control.
If the “ON/OFF” button is pressed and
held for 1.5 seconds or more, the system
turns on in constant speed control
mode. (P. 333)
Accelerate or decelerate, with
accelerator pedal operation, to the
desired vehicle speed (at or above
approximately 50 km/h [30 mph])
and push the lever down to set the
speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will come
on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
lever is released becomes the set speed.
Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
1
2
330
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is dis-
played.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily move
the lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever up or
down to change the speed, and release
when the desired speed is reached.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be increased
or decreased as follows:
For Iceland, Ireland, United Kingdom, Italy, Estonia, Austria, Netherlands, Cyprus,
Greece, Switzerland, Sweden, Spain, Slovakia, Slovenia, Czech Republic, Denmark,
Germany, Norway, Hungary, Finland, France, Belgium, Poland, Portugal, Latvia, Lith-
uania, Romania and Canary Islands
Fine adjustment: By 5 km/h (3.1 mph)
*
1
or 5 mph (8 km/h)
*
2
each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 5 km/h (3.1 mph)
*
1
or 5 mph (8 km/h)
*
2
increments for as long as the lever is held
For Russian Federation, Israel and Turkey
Fine adjustment: By 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
*
1
or 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
*
2
each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 5 km/h (3.1 mph)
*
1
or 5 mph (8 km/h)
*
2
increments for as long as the lever is held
In the constant speed control mode (P. 333), the set speed will be increased
or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By 1.6 km/h (1 mph)
*
1
or 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
*
2
each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: The speed will continue to change while the lever is held.
*
1
: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
*
2
: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
Adjusting the set speed
1
2
331
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Pressing the switch changes the vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance as follows:
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set
automatically to long mode when the
power switch is turned to ON mode.
If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark will also be displayed.
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown corre-
spond to a vehicle speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
Pulling the lever toward you cancels
the speed control.
The speed control is also canceled when
the brake pedal is depressed.
Pushing the lever up resumes the
cruise control and returns vehicle
speed to the set speed.
However, cruise control does not
resume when the vehicle speed is
approximately 40 km/h (25 mph) or
less.
Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode)
Preceding
vehicle mark
1
2
3
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode)
Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long Approximately 50 m (160 ft.)
Medium Approximately 40 m (130 ft.)
Short Approximately 30 m (100 ft.)
Canceling and resuming the speed control
1
2
332
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
When your vehicle is too close to a
vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic
deceleration via the cruise control is
not possible, the display will flash and
the buzzer will sound to alert the driver.
An example of this would be if another
driver cuts in front of you while you are
following a vehicle. Depress the brake
pedal to ensure an appropriate vehicle-
to-vehicle distance.
Warnings may not occur when
In the following instances, warnings may not occur even when the vehicle-to-
vehicle distance is small.
When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or exceeds your vehicle
speed
When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow speed
Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
When depressing the accelerator pedal
Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
333
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set
speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this mode only
when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function correctly due
to a dirty radar sensor, etc.
With the cruise control off, press and
hold the “ON/OFF” button for 1.5
seconds or more.
Immediately after the “ON/OFF” but-
ton is pressed, the radar cruise control
indicator will come on. Afterwards, it
switches to the cruise control indicator.
Switching to constant speed control
mode is only possible when operating
the lever with the cruise control off.
Accelerate or decelerate, with
accelerator pedal operation, to the
desired vehicle speed (at or above
approximately 50 km/h [30 mph])
and push the lever down to set the
speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will come
on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
lever is released becomes the set speed.
Adjusting the speed setting: P. 330
Canceling and resuming the speed setting: P. 331
Selecting constant speed control mode
1
2
334
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when
The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift switch.
Vehicle speed is at or above approximately 50 km/h (30 mph).
Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
The vehicle can accelerate by operating the accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the
set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehi-
cle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the pre-
ceding vehicle.
Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled in the following situ-
ations:
Actual vehicle speed falls at or below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
VSC is activated.
TRC is activated for a period of time.
When the VSC or TRC system is turned off.
When snow mode is set.
The sensor cannot detect correctly because it is covered in some way.
Pre-collision braking is activated.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any other rea-
son, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
335
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Automatic cancelation of constant speed control mode
Constant speed control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations:
Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 16 km/h (10 mph) below the set vehi-
cle speed.
Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
VSC is activated.
TRC is activated for a period of time.
When the VSC or TRC system is turned off.
Pre-collision braking is activated.
If constant speed control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may
be a malfunction in the system. Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus autho-
rized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Brake system operation sound
If the brakes are applied automatically while the vehicle is in vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode, a brake system operation sound may be heard. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control
Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform
the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message is shown on the
multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.
When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, operate the brake pedal
when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the accelerator pedal when
acceleration is required.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach
warning (P. 332) may not be activated.
Vehicles that cut in suddenly
Vehicles traveling at low speeds
Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane
Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, etc.)
Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the detecting of
the sensor
336
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function
correctly
In the case of the following conditions, operate the brake pedal (or accelerator pedal,
depending on the situation) as necessary.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, the system may not
operate properly.
When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
When driving on a road surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on a bridge
While the vehicle speed is decreasing to the set speed after the vehicle accelerates by
depressing the accelerator pedal
When your vehicle is pointing upwards
(caused by a heavy load in the luggage com-
partment, etc.)
Preceding vehicle has an extremely high
ground clearance
When the road curves or when the lanes are
narrow
When steering wheel operation or your posi-
tion in the lane is unstable
337
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal.
Indicators
Cruise control switch
Press the “ON/OFF” button to acti-
vate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will come on.
Press the button again to deactivate the
cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle
to the desired speed, and push the
lever down to set the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
lever is released becomes the set speed.
Cruise control
: If equipped
Summary of functions
1
2
Setting the vehicle speed
1
2
338
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the
lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the
desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
*
1
or 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
*
2
each
time the lever is operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the
lever is released.
*
1
: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
*
2
: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
Pulling the lever toward you cancels
the constant speed control.
The speed setting is also canceled when
the brakes are applied.
Pushing the lever up resumes the
constant speed control.
Resuming is available when the vehicle
speed is more than approximately 40
km/h (25 mph).
Adjusting the set speed
1
2
Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
1
2
339
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Cruise control can be set when
The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift.
Vehicle speed is above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.
Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first accel-
erating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new
speed.
Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations.
Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 16 km/h (10 mph) below the preset
vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
VSC is activated.
TRC is activated for a period of time.
When the VSC or TRC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.
If the warning message for the cruise control is shown on the multi-information display
Press the “ON/OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button
again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after
being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reli-
able repairer.
340
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
WARNING
To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON/OFF” button when not in use.
Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
In heavy traffic
On roads with sharp bends
On winding roads
On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
341
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Turns the Lexus parking assist-sensor
on/off
When on, the indicator light comes on
to inform the driver that the system is
operational.
Lexus parking assist-sensor
: If equipped
The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when parallel parking or
maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors and communicated via
the displays and a buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when using this
system.
Types of sensors
Except F SPORT models
F SPORT models
Front center sensors
Front corner sensors
Rear corner sensors
Rear center sensors
Lexus parking assist-sensor switch
1
2
3
4
342
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
When the sensors detect an obstacle, the following displays inform the driver of
the position and distance to the obstacle.
Multi-information display
Front corner sensor operation
Front center sensor operation
Rear corner sensor operation
Rear center sensor operation
Lexus Display Audio screen
Lexus parking assist-sensor
When the vehicle is moving forward.
A graphic is automatically displayed
when an obstacle is detected. The
screen can be set so that the graphic
is not displayed. (P. 346)
:Select to mute the buzzer
sounds.
Lexus parking assist-sensor
Rear Crossing Traffic Alert
(if equipped)
When the vehicle is moving back-
ward.
A simplified image is displayed on
the upper part of the screen when an
obstacle is detected.
Display
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
343
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
10.3-inch display
Lexus parking assist-sensor
Rear Crossing Traffic Alert
(if equipped)
A graphic is automatically displayed
on the side display when an obstacle
is detected. The screen can be set so
that the graphic is not displayed.
(P. 346)
: Select to mute the buzzer
sounds. This function is available
when the vehicle is moving forward.
1
2
344
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
Distance display
Sensors that detect an obstacle will illuminate continuously or blink.
*
1
: The images may differ from that shown in the illustrations. (P. 342)
*
2
: Multi-information display
*
3
: Audio system screen
Sensor detection display, obstacle distance
Display
*
1
Insert display Approximate distance to obstacle
Lexus parking
assist monitor
Front corner sensor/
front center sensor
Rear corner sensor/
rear center sensor
(continuous) (blinking slowly)
Front center sensor
only:
100 cm (3.3 ft.) to 50
cm (1.6 ft.)
Rear center sensor
only:
150 cm (4.9 ft.) to 60
cm (2.0 ft.)
(continuous) (blinking)
50 cm (1.6 ft.) to 40 cm
(1.3 ft.)
60 cm (2.0 ft.) to 45
cm (1.5 ft.)
(continuous) (blinking
rapidly)
40 cm (1.3 ft.) to 30 cm
(1.0 ft.)
Rear corner sensor:
45 cm (1.5 ft.) to 30 cm
(1.0 ft.)
Rear center sensor:
45 cm (1.5 ft.) to 35 cm
(1.1 ft.)
(blinking
*
2
or
continuous
*
3
)
(continuous)
Less than 30 cm (1.0 ft.)
Rear corner sensor:
Less than 30 cm (1.0 ft.)
Rear center sensor:
Less than 35 cm (1.1 ft.)
345
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Buzzer operation and distance to an obstacle
A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating.
The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle.
When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the
buzzer sounds continuously:
Front center sensors: Approximately 30 cm (1.0 ft.)
Corner sensors: Approximately 30 cm (1.0 ft.)
Rear center sensors: Approximately 35 cm (1.1 ft.)
When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system
responds to the nearest obstacle. If one or both come within the above dis-
tances, the beep will repeat a long tone, followed by fast beeps.
Approximately 100 cm (3.3 ft.)
Approximately 150 cm (4.9 ft.)
Approximately 50 cm (1.6 ft.)
Approximately 60 cm (2.0 ft.)
The diagram shows the detection range
of the sensors. Note that the sensors
cannot detect obstacles that are
extremely close to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may change
depending on the shape of the object
etc.
Detection range of the sensors
1
2
3
4
346
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
You can change the buzzer sounds volume and the screen operating conditions
when the power switch is in ON mode.
Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller/Remote
Touch, and then select on the screen.
Select “Vehicle”, and then select “LEXUS park assist” on the screen.
Select the desired item.
The buzzer sounds volume can be adjusted.
On or off can be selected for Lexus parking assist-sensor display.
Both the front or rear center sensors display and tone indication can be set.
Setting up Lexus parking assist-sensor
1
2
3
Lexus Display Audio screen
10.3-inch display
1
2
3
347
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
The Lexus parking assist-sensor can be operated when
Front corner sensors:
The power switch is in ON mode.
The shift lever is in other than P.
The vehicle speed is less than about 10 km/h (6 mph).
(At any speed when the shift lever is in R)
Front center sensors:
The power switch is in ON mode.
The shift lever is in other than P or R.
The vehicle speed is less than about 10 km/h (6 mph).
Rear corner and rear center sensors:
The power switch is in ON mode.
The shift lever is in R.
Lexus parking assist-sensor display
Vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio system: When an obstacle is detected while the
Lexus parking assist monitor is in use, the warning indicator will appear in the upper part
of the screen even if the display setting has been set to off.
If a message is displayed on the multi-information display
P. 618
Customization
Some functions can be customized. (P. 346,696)
WARNING
When using the Lexus parking assist-sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly
cause an accident.
Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 10 km/h (6 mph).
The sensors’ detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving forward or
reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides of the vehi-
cle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle’s speed.
Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas.
348
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Sensor detection information
The sensor’ detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’ bumper.
Certain vehicle conditions and surrounding environments, such as the following, may
affect the ability of the sensors to correctly detect objects. Pay particular attention in
the following situations. Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being driven
unsafely, possibly leading to an accident.
There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. (Wiping the sensors will resolve this prob-
lem.)
The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)
In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the screen may show an abnormal dis-
play, or obstacles may not be detected.
The sensor is covered in any way.
The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air
brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.
Towing eyelets are installed.
The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.
In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.
If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.
A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed.
People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing.
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shape,
signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer than they are.
The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay particular
attention to the following obstacles:
Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves
Sharply-angled objects
Low obstacles
Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your
vehicle
People, animals and other moving objects
People wearing certain types of clothing
349
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
WARNING
The following situations may occur during use.
Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection distance
may shorten, or detection may be impossible.
Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor.
There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display. Even at slow
speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come within the sensor’ detec-
tion areas before the display is shown and the buzzer sounds.
Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when
approached, even if they have been detected once.
It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or air flow
noise of the air conditioning system.
NOTICE
When using Lexus parking assist-sensor
In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor mal-
function, etc. Have the vehicle checked by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
The Lexus parking assist-sensor operation display flashes, and a buzzer sounds when
no obstacles are detected.
If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong impact.
If the bumper collides with something.
If the display shows continuously without beeping, except when the buzzer mute
switch has been turned on.
If a display error occurs, first check the sensor.
If the error occurs even if there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is likely that the
sensor is malfunctioning.
Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
350
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
The rear view image is displayed when
the shift lever is in R and the power
switch is in ON mode.
The parking assist monitor system will
be deactivated when the shift lever is in
any position other than R.
When the shift lever is shifted to R and
any mode button (such as “MENU”) is
pressed, the parking assist monitor sys-
tem is canceled, and the screen is
switched to the mode of the button that
was pressed.
Lexus parking assist monitor
: If equipped
The parking assist monitor assists the driver by displaying an image of the view
behind the vehicle while backing up, for example while parking.
The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may
differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.
351
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Screen display
The parking assist monitor screen will be displayed if the shift position is
shifted to R while the power switch is in ON mode.
Lexus parking assist-sensor
(if equipped)
Rear Crossing Traffic Alert
(if equipped)
A simplified image is displayed on
the upper part of the screen when an
obstacle is detected.
Using the system
Use any of the following modes.
Estimated course line display mode (P. 353)
Estimated course lines are dis-
played which move in accor-
dance with the operation of the
steering wheel.
Using the Lexus parking assist monitor
1
2
352
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
Parking assist guide line display mode (P. 355)
The steering wheel return points
(parking assist guide lines) are
displayed.
Distance guide line display mode
Distance guide lines only are dis-
played.
When the shift lever is in any position other than R, the display mode can be
changed in the following procedure.
Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller, and then
select “Setup” on the screen.
Select “Vehicle”, and then select “Back camera guide line setting” on the
screen.
Select the desired display mode.
Estimated course line display
mode (P. 353)
Parking assist guide line display
mode (P. 355)
Distance guide line display mode
Distance guide lines only are dis-
played.
Switching the display mode
1
2
3
1
2
3
353
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Screen description
Vehicle center guide line
The line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.
Vehicle width guide line
The line indicates a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.
The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.
The line aligns with the estimated course lines when the steering wheel is straight.
Estimated course lines
The lines show an estimated course when the steering wheel is turned.
Distance guide line
The line moves, together with the estimated course lines, in sync with the steering
wheel. The line shows points approximately 0.5 m (1.5 ft.) (red) and approximately
1 m (3 ft.) (yellow) from the center of the edge of the bumper.
Distance guide line
The line shows distance behind the vehicle, a point approximately 0.5 m. (1.5 ft.)
(blue) from the edge of the bumper.
Estimated course line display mode
1
2
3
4
5
354
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
Parking operation
When parking in a space which is in the reverse direction to the space
described in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed.
Shift the shift lever to R.
Turn the steering wheel so that
the estimated course lines are
within the parking space, and
back up slowly.
Parking space
Estimated course lines
When the rear position of the
vehicle has entered the parking
space, turn the steering wheel so
that the vehicle width guide lines
are within the left and right divid-
ing lines of the parking space.
Vehicle width guide line
1
2
1
2
3
3
355
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Once the vehicle width guide lines and the parking space lines are parallel,
straighten the steering wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has com-
pletely entered the parking space.
Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking.
Screen description
Vehicle width guide lines
These lines indicate a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight
up. The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.
Parking assist guide lines
These lines indicate the path of the smallest turn possible behind the vehi-
cle.
These lines also indicate the approximate position of the steering wheel
when parking.
Distance guide line
This line (red) indicates points approximately 0.5 m (1.5 ft.) behind the rear
bumper of your vehicle.
Vehicle center guide line
The line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.
Parking assist guide line display mode
4
5
1
2
3
4
356
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
Parking operation
When parking in a space which is in the reverse direction to the space
described in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed.
Shift the shift lever to R.
Back up until the parking assist
guide line meets the edge of the
left-hand dividing line of the park-
ing space.
Parking assist guide line
Parking space dividing line
Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right, and back up slowly.
Once the vehicle is parallel with the parking space, straighten the steering
wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the
parking space.
Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking.
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
357
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Area displayed on screen
The parking assist monitor displays
an image of the view from the
bumper of the rear area of the vehi-
cle.
The image of the Lexus parking
assist monitor can be adjusted.
(P. 414)
The area displayed on the screen
may vary according to vehicle orien-
tation conditions.
Objects which are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper cannot be seen on the
screen.
The camera uses a special lens. The
distance of the image that appears
on the screen differs from the actual
distance.
Items which are located higher than
the camera may not be displayed on
the monitor.
Lexus parking assist monitor precautions
Corners of bumper
358
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
Lexus parking assist monitor camera
The camera for the parking assist
monitor is located above the license
plate.
Using the camera
If dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering
to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In this case, flush it with a
large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens clean with a soft and wet
cloth.
Differences between the screen and the actual road
The distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines may not actually be
parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even when they appear to
be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distances between the vehicle width guide lines and the left and right
dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even when they appear
to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road surfaces. In any of
the following situations, there is a margin of error between the guide lines on
the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.
359
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply
The distance guide lines will
appear to be closer to the vehicle
than the actual distance. Because
of this, objects will appear to be
farther away than they actually
are. In the same way, there will be
a margin of error between the
guidelines and the actual dis-
tance/course on the road.
When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply
The distance guide lines will
appear to be further from the
vehicle than the actual distance.
Because of this, objects will
appear to be closer than they
actually are. In the same way,
there will be a margin of error
between the guidelines and the
actual distance/course on the
road.
360
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
When any part of the vehicle sags
When any part of the vehicle sags
due to the number of passengers
or the distribution of the load,
there is a margin of error between
the guide lines on the screen and
the actual distance/course on the
road.
When approaching three-dimensional objects
The estimated course lines target a flat surfaced objects (such as the road). It
is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such as
vehicles) using the estimated course lines and distance guide lines. When
approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the
flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following.
Estimated course lines
Visually check the surroundings
and the area behind the vehicle.
In the case shown in the illustra-
tion, the truck appears to be out-
side of the estimated course lines
and the vehicle does not look as if
it will hits the truck. However, the
rear body of the truck may actu-
ally cross over the estimated
course lines. In reality if you back
up as guided by the estimated
course lines, the vehicle may hit
the truck.
A margin of error
361
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Distance guidelines
Visually check the surroundings
and the area behind the vehicle.
On the screen, it appears that a
truck is parking at point . How-
ever, in reality if you back up to
point , you will hit the truck.
On the screen, it appears that
is closest and is farthest away.
However, in reality, the distance to
and is the same and is
farther than and .
2
1
1
3
1 3
2
1
3
362
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
If you notice any symptoms
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the
solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Things you should know
Likely cause Solution
The image is difficult to see
The vehicle is in a dark area
The temperature around the lens is
either high or low
The outside temperature is low
There are water droplets on the cam-
era
It is raining or humid
Foreign matter (mud, etc.) is adhering
to the camera
There are scratches on the camera
Sunlight or headlights are shining
directly into the camera
The vehicle is under fluorescent lights,
sodium lights, mercury lights etc.
If this happens due to these causes, it
does not indicate a malfunction.
Back up while visually checking the vehi-
cle’s surroundings. (Use the monitor
again once conditions have been
improved.)
The image on the Lexus parking assist
monitor system screen can be adjusted.
(P. 414)
The image is blurry
Dirt or foreign matter (such as water
droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adhering to
the camera.
Flush the camera with a large quantity of
water and wipe the camera lens clean
with a soft and wet cloth.
The image is out of alignment
The camera or surrounding area has
received a strong impact.
Have the vehicle inspected by any autho-
rized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
The guide lines are very far out of alignment
The camera position is out of alignment.
Have the vehicle inspected by any autho-
rized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
The vehicle is tilted (there is a heavy
load on the vehicle, tire pressure is low
due to a tire puncture, etc.)
The vehicle is used on an incline.
If this happens due to these causes, it
does not indicate a malfunction.
Back up while visually checking the vehi-
cle’s surroundings.
363
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
The estimated course lines move even though the steering wheel is straight
There is a malfunction in the signals being
output by the steering sensor.
Have the vehicle inspected by any autho-
rized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Guide lines are not displayed
The trunk lid is open.
Close the trunk lid.
If this does not resolve the symptom, have
the vehicle inspected by any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
The estimated course lines are not displayed
The steering wheel has been moved
while the battery was being reinstalled.
Battery power is low.
The steering sensor has been rein-
stalled.
There is a malfunction in the signals
being output by the steering sensor.
Stop the vehicle, and turn the steering
wheel as far as it will go to the left and
right.
If this does not resolve the symptom, have
the vehicle inspected by any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Likely cause Solution
364
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
WARNING
When using the Lexus parking assist monitor system
The parking assist monitor is a supplemental device intended to assist the driver when
backing up. When backing up, be sure to check visually behind and all around the vehi-
cle before proceeding.
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or
serious injuries.
Never depend on the parking assist monitor entirely when backing up. The image
and the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may differ from the actual
state.
Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.
Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles, obstacles, people or mount the shoulder,
depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
The instructions given are only guidelines.
When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traffic condi-
tions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to
be fully aware of this before using the parking assist system.
When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate your vehi-
cle before maneuvering into it.
Do not use the parking assist monitor in the following cases:
On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow
When using tire chains or emergency tires
When the trunk lid is not closed completely
On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes.
In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become faint. The
image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable to see the
image on the screen. Be sure to check direct visually and with the mirrors all around
the vehicle before proceeding.
If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen
may change.
The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians that
appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ from the actual distances.
(P. 358)
Estimated course line display mode: If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle
width guide lines and the estimated course lines are not in alignment, have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reli-
able repairer.
365
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
How to use the camera
The parking assist monitor may not operate properly in the following cases.
If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera may
change.
As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or
modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
When cleaning the camera lens, flush the camera with a large quantity of water
and wipe it with a soft and wet cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens may cause
the camera lens to be scratched and unable to transmit a clear image.
Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to
the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehi-
cle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.
When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or
camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.
When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium light or mercury light
etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.
Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunction.
If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer as soon as possible.
366
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that has 2 functions:
The BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) function
Assists the driver in making a decision when changing lanes
The RCTA (Rear Crossing Traffic Alert) function
Assists the driver when backing up
These functions use same sensors.
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
: If equipped
Summary of the Blind Spot Monitor
367
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
BSM main switch
Pressing the switch turns the system on or off. When the switch is set to on, the
switch’s indicator illuminates and the buzzer sounds. Common switch for BSM func-
tion and RCTA function.
Outside rear view mirror indicators
BSM function:
When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator
comes on while the turn signal lever is not operated. If the turn signal lever is oper-
ated toward the detected side, the outside rear view mirror indicator flashes
RCTA function:
When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is
detected, both outside rear view mirror indicators will flash.
RCTA buzzer (RCTA function)
If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, a
buzzer will sound. The buzzer also sounds for approximately 1 second immediately
after the BSM function is operated to turn the system on.
Monitor screen display (RCTA function)
If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, the
RCTA icon (P. 377) for the detected side will be displayed on the monitor screen.
This illustration shows an example of a vehicle approaching from the left at the rear of
the vehicle.
1
2
3
4
368
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
Outside rear view mirror indicator visibility
In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see.
Hearing the RCTA buzzer
The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to hear over loud noises, such as if the audio system
volume is high.
When there is a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor
If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following, a warning message will be
displayed: (P. 618)
A sensor is malfunctioning
A sensor is dirty or covered with snow or a sticker
The outside temperature is extremely high or low
Sensor voltage is abnormal
A sensor is misaligned
Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor
369
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
370
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
371
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
372
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Handling the radar sensor
Blind Spot Monitor sensors are installed behind the left and right sides of the rear
bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can
function correctly.
Do not subject a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper to a strong
impact.
If a sensor is moved even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehi-
cles may not be detected correctly.
In the following situations, have your vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
A sensor or its surrounding area is subject to a strong impact.
If the surrounding area of a sensor is scratched or dented, or part of them has
become disconnected.
Do not disassemble the sensor.
Do not attach stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper.
Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper.
Do not paint the rear bumper any color other than an official Lexus color.
Keep the sensors and the surrounding areas
on the rear bumper clean at all times.
If a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear
bumper is dirty or covered with snow, the
Blind Spot Monitor may not operate and a
warning message (P. 618) will be displayed.
In this situation, clear off the dirt or snow and
drive the vehicle with the operation condi-
tions of the BSM function (P. 374) satisfied
for approximately 10 minutes. If the warning
message does not disappear, have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
373
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
The BSM function uses radar sensors to detect vehicles that are traveling in an
adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in the outside rear view mirror (the
blind spot), and advises the driver of the vehicles existence via the outside rear
view mirror indicator.
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The range of each detection area is:
Approximately 0.5 m (1.6 ft.) to 3.5
m (11.5 ft.) from either side of the
vehicle
*
*
: The area between the side of the vehicle
and 0.5 m (1.6 ft.) from the side of the
vehicle cannot be detected.
Approximately 3 m (9.8 ft.) from the
rear bumper
Approximately 1 m (3.3 ft.) forward
of the rear bumper
BSM function
BSM function detection areas
1
2
3
WARNING
Cautions regarding the use of the function
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings.
The BSM function is a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is in
a blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors or is approaching rapidly from behind into
a blind spot. Do not overly rely on the BSM function. As the function cannot judge if it is
safe to change lanes, over reliance could lead to an accident resulting in death or seri-
ous injury.
As the system may not function correctly under certain conditions, the driver’s own
visual confirmation of safety is necessary.
374
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
The BSM function is operational when
The BSM function is operational when all of the following conditions are met:
The BSM function is on.
The shift lever is in a position other than R.
The vehicle speed is greater than approximately 16 km/h (10 mph).
The BSM function will detect a vehicle when
The BSM function will detect a vehicle present in the detection area in the following situ-
ations:
A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.
You overtake a vehicle in an adjacent lane slowly.
Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.
Conditions under which the BSM function will not detect a vehicle
The BSM function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or
objects:
Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.
*
Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction
Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects
*
Following vehicles that are in the same lane
*
Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away from your vehicle
*
Vehicles which are being overtaken rapidly by your vehicle
*
*
: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.
375
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Conditions under which the BSM function may not function correctly
The BSM function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following situations:
When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surround-
ing area
When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is covering the sensor or surrounding area on
the rear bumper
When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather,
such as heavy rain, snow, or fog
When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle
When the distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle is short
When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle
that enters the detection area
When the difference in speed between your vehicle and another vehicle is changing
When a vehicle enters a detection area traveling at about the same speed as your
vehicle
As your vehicle starts from a stop, a vehicle remains in the detection area
When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the road,
etc.
When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces
When vehicle lanes are wide, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and the vehicle
in an adjacent lane is far away from your vehicle
When towing a trailer (vehicles with a towing package)
When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle
When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle
that enters the detection area
Immediately after the BSM function is turned on
Instances of the BSM function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may
increase in the following situations:
When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surround-
ing area
When the distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc. that enters the
detection area is short
When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the road,
etc.
When vehicle lanes are narrow, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and a vehicle
traveling in a lane other than the adjacent lanes enters the detection area
When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces
When the tires are slipping or spinning
When the distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle is short
When a bicycle carrier or other accessory is installed to the rear of the vehicle
When towing a trailer (vehicles with a towing package)
376
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
The RCTA function uses radar sensors to detect vehicles approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle and alerts the driver of the presence of such
vehicles by flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a
buzzer.
Approaching vehicles
Detection areas of approaching vehicles
RCTA function
1
2
377
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
RCTA icon display (if equipped)
When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is
detected, the following will be displayed on the audio system screen.
Display Content
A vehicle is approaching from the left at the rear of the vehicle
A vehicle is approaching from the right at the rear of the vehicle
Vehicles are approaching from both sides of the vehicle
The RCTA function is malfunctioning
(P. 368)
WARNING
Cautions regarding the use of the function
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings.
The RCTA function is only a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehi-
cle is approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle. As the RCTA function
may not function correctly under certain conditions, the driver’s own visual confirma-
tion of safety is necessary. Over reliance on this function may lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
378
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The buzzer can alert the driver of faster vehicles approaching from farther away.
Example:
The RCTA function is operational when
The RCTA function operates when all of the following conditions are met:
The BSM function is on.
The shift lever is in R.
The vehicle speed is less than approximately 8 km/h (5 mph).
The approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) and 28 km/h
(18 mph).
RCTA function detection areas
Approaching vehicle Speed Approximate
alert distance
Fast 28 km/h (18 mph) 20 m (65 ft.)
Slow 8 km/h (5 mph) 5.5 m (18 ft.)
1
379
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Conditions under which the RCTA function will not detect a vehicle
The RCTA function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or
objects:
Vehicles approaching from directly behind
Vehicles backing up in a parking space next to your vehicle
Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects
*
Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.
*
Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle
*
*
: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.
Conditions under which the RCTA function may not function correctly
The RCTA function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following situations:
When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surround-
ing area
When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is covering the sensor or surrounding area on
the rear bumper
When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather,
such as heavy rain, snow, or fog
When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle
When a vehicle is approaching at high speed
When towing a trailer (vehicles with a towing package)
Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect due to
obstructions
When backing up on a slope with a sharp
change in grade
380
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
Instances of the RCTA function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may
increase in the following situations:
When a vehicle passes by the side of your vehicle
When the distance between your vehicle and metal objects, such as a guardrail,
wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may reflect electrical waves toward the rear of
the vehicle, is short
When backing out of a shallow angle park-
ing spot
When the sensors cannot detect a vehicle
due to obstructions
When the parking space faces a street and
vehicles are being driven on the street
381
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Vehicles without Adaptive Variable Suspension System
Normal mode
Provides an optimal balance of fuel economy, quietness, and dynamic perfor-
mance. Suitable for city driving.
Press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode when Eco drive mode or
sport mode is selected.
Eco drive mode
Helps the driver accelerate in an eco-friendly manner and improve fuel econ-
omy through moderate throttle characteristics and by controlling the opera-
tion of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling).
When not in Eco drive mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned to the left, the
Eco drive mode indicator will come on.
Sport mode
Controls the hybrid system to provide quick, powerful acceleration. This
mode also changes the steering feel, making it suitable for when agile driving
response is desired, such as when driving on roads with many curves.
When not in sport mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the right, the
“SPORT” indicator comes on, and the hybrid system indicator changes to the
tachometer. (P. 113)
Driving mode select switch
The driving modes can be selected to suit driving conditions.
Except F SPORT
models
F SPORT
models
1
2
3
382
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
Vehicles with Adaptive Variable Suspension System
Normal mode/Customized mode
Normal mode and customized mode are selected by pressing the driving
mode select switch. Each time the switch is pressed, the driving mode
changes between normal mode and customized mode. When customized
mode is selected, the “CUSTOMIZE” indicator will be illuminated.
When Eco drive mode or sport mode is selected, pressing the switch changes the
driving mode to normal mode.
Normal mode
Provides an optimal balance of fuel economy, quietness, and dynamic per-
formance. Suitable for city driving.
Customized mode
Allows you to drive with the following functions set to your preferred set-
tings.
Customized mode settings can only be changed on the drive mode
customization display of the audio system screen.
(Displaying the drive mode customization display: P. 696)
1
383
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Eco drive mode
Helps the driver accelerate in an eco-friendly manner and improve fuel econ-
omy through moderate throttle characteristics and by controlling the opera-
tion of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling).
When not in Eco drive mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned to the left, the
Eco drive mode indicator will come on.
Sport mode
•SPORT S mode
Controls the hybrid system to provide quick, powerful acceleration. This
mode is suitable for when agile driving response is desired, such as when
driving on roads with many curves.
When not in sport mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the right,
the “SPORT” indicator comes on, and the hybrid system indicator changes to the
tachometer. (P. 113)
•SPORT S+ mode
Helps to ensure steering performance and driving stability by simultane-
ously controlling the steering and suspension in addition to the hybrid sys-
tem. Suitable for sportier driving.
When in SPORT S mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned to the right,
the “SPORT S+” indicator will come on.
Function Setting
Powertrain
Normal
Power
Eco
Chassis Normal
Sport
Air conditioning system Normal
Eco
2
3
384
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air condi-
tioning system to enhance fuel efficiency. To improve air conditioning performance,
adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode.
Automatic deactivation of sport mode and customized mode
If the power switch is turned off after driving in sport mode or customized mode, the
drive mode will be changed to normal mode.
Driving mode pop-up display (vehicles with a 10.3-inch display)
When the driving mode is changed, the selected driving mode will be temporarily dis-
played on the side display. (P. 500)
385
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
ECB (Electronically Controlled Brake System)
The electronically controlled system generates braking force corresponding
to the brake operation
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the
brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces.
VSC+ (Vehicle Stability Control+)
Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRC, VSC and EPS.
Helps to maintain directional stability when swerving on slippery road sur-
faces by controlling steering performance.
TRC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
Hill-start assist control
Helps to reduce the backward movement of the vehicle when starting on an
uphill
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the
steering wheel.
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems oper-
ate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however,
that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heav-
ily when operating the vehicle.
386
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
Adaptive Variable Suspension System (if equipped)
Controls the damping force of the shock absorber of each wheel according to
the road and driving conditions, helping achieve a comfortable ride, excellent
driveability and a high level of stability.
If SPORT S+ mode is selected using the driving mode select switch, the
damping force will become more suitable for sporty driving. (P. 382)
VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)
Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRC, VSC, hill-start
assist control, and EPS systems
Helps to maintain vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by
controlling the brakes and hybrid system output
Emergency brake signal
When the brakes are applied suddenly, the stop lights automatically flash to
alert the vehicle behind.
The slip indicator light will flash while
the TRC/VSC/ABS systems are oper-
ating.
When the TRC/VSC/ABS systems are operating
387
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRC system may reduce power
from the hybrid system to the wheels. Pressing to turn the system off may
make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
To turn the TRC system off, quickly
press and release .
The “Traction Control Turned Off” will
be shown on the multi-information dis-
play. Press again to turn the sys-
tem back on.
Turning off both TRC and VSC systems
To turn the TRC and VSC systems off, press and hold for more than 3 seconds
while the vehicle is stopped.
The VSC OFF indicator light will come on and the “Traction Control Turned Off” will be
shown on the multi-information display.
*
Press again to turn the system back on.
*
: On vehicles with pre-collision system, pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision brak-
ing will also be disabled. The pre-collision system warning light will come on and the
message will be shown on the multi-information display. (P. 618)
When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that TRC has
been disabled even if the VSC OFF switch has not been pressed
TRC cannot be operated. Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Disabling the TRC system
388
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
Operating conditions of hill-start assist control
When the following four conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will operate:
The shift lever is in a position other than P or N (when starting off forward/backward on
an upward incline)
The vehicle is stopped
The accelerator pedal is not depressed
The parking brake is not engaged
Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control
The hill-start assist control will turn off in any of the following situations:
The shift lever is shifted to P or N
The accelerator pedal is depressed
The parking brake is engaged
Approximately 2 seconds elapse after the brake pedal is released
When the 12-volt battery is disconnected
The steering wheel may move from its straight forward position, but this will be corrected
automatically when driving.
Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, TRC, VSC and hill-start assist
control systems
A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is
depressed repeatedly, when the hybrid system is started or just after the vehicle begins
to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these
systems.
Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating.
None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
A motor sound may be heard also after the vehicle comes to a stop.
ECB operating sound
ECB operating sound may be heard in the following cases, but it does not indicate that a
malfunction has occurred.
Operating sound heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is oper-
ated.
Motor sound of the brake system heard from the front part of the vehicle when the
driver’s door is opened.
Operating sound heard from the engine compartment when one or two minutes
passed after the stop of the hybrid system.
EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
389
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Automatic reactivation of TRC and VSC systems
After turning the TRC and VSC systems off, the systems will be automatically re-enabled
in the following situations:
When the power switch is turned off
If only the TRC system is turned off, the TRC will turn on when vehicle speed increases
If both the TRC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic re-enabling will not occur
when vehicle speed increases.
Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating
when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering
wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input
or stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid system off. The EPS system should return to nor-
mal within 10 minutes.
Operating conditions of emergency brake signal
When the following three conditions are met, the emergency brake signal will operate:
The emergency flashers are off
Actual vehicle speed is over 55 km/h (35 mph)
The brake pedal is depressed in a manner that cause the system to judge from the vehi-
cle deceleration that this is a sudden braking operation
Automatic system cancelation of emergency brake signal
The emergency brake signal will turn off in any of the following situations:
The emergency flashers are turned on
The brake pedal is released
The system judges from the vehicle deceleration that is not a sudden braking operation
390
4-5. Using the driving support systems
IS300h_EE
WARNING
The ABS does not operate effectively when
The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively
worn tires on a snow covered road).
The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.
Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations:
When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
When driving with tire chains
When driving over bumps in the road
When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
TRC/VSC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road
surfaces, even if the TRC/VSC system is operating.
Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
Hill- start assist control does not operate effectively when
Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not operate
effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.
Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehicle
stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist con-
trol to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an accident.
When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an
accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
When the TRC/VSC systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these
are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the TRC/
VSC systems off unless necessary.
Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load
capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire infla-
tion pressure level.
The ABS, TRC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed
on the vehicle.
Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
Handling of tires and the suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving
assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.
391
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
4-6. Driving tips
Using Eco drive mode
When using Eco drive mode, the torque corresponding to the accelerator
pedal depression amount can be generated more smoothly than it is in normal
conditions. In addition, the operation of the air conditioning system (heating/
cooling) will be minimized, improving the fuel economy. (P. 381)
Use of Hybrid System Indicator
The Eco-friendly driving is possible by keeping the indicator needle (except F
SPORT models) or bar display (F SPORT models) of Hybrid System Indicator
within the Eco area. (P. 117)
Shift lever operation
Shift the shift lever to D when stopped at a traffic light, or driving in heavy traf-
fic, etc. Shift the shift lever to P when parking. When using the N, there is no
positive effect on fuel consumption. In the N, the gasoline engine operates but
electricity cannot be generated. Also, when using the air conditioning system,
etc., the hybrid battery (traction battery) power is consumed.
Accelerator pedal/brake pedal operation
Drive your vehicle smoothly. Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration.
Gradual acceleration and deceleration will make more effective use of the
electric motor (traction motor) without having to use gasoline engine
power.
Avoid repeated acceleration. Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) power, resulting in poor fuel consumption. Battery
power can be restored by driving with the accelerator pedal slightly
released.
Hybrid vehicle driving tips
For economical and ecological driving, pay attention to the following points:
392
4-6. Driving tips
IS300h_EE
When braking
Make sure to operate the brakes gently and in a timely manner. A greater
amount of electrical energy can be regenerated when slowing down.
Delays
Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at traffic lights,
will lead to bad fuel economy. Check traffic reports before leaving and avoid
delays as much as possible. When driving in a traffic jam, gently release the
brake pedal to allow the vehicle to move forward slightly while avoiding over-
use of the accelerator pedal. Doing so can help control excessive gasoline
consumption.
Highway driving
Control and maintain the vehicle at a constant speed. Before stopping at a toll
booth or similar, allow plenty of time to release the accelerator and gently
apply the brakes. A greater amount of electrical energy can be regenerated
when slowing down.
Air conditioning
Use the air conditioning only when necessary. Doing so can help reduce
excessive gasoline consumption.
In summer: When the ambient temperature is high, use the recirculated air
mode. Doing so will help to reduce the burden on the air conditioning system
and reduce fuel consumption as well.
In winter: Because the gasoline engine will not automatically cut out until it
and the interior of the vehicle are warm, it will consume fuel. Also, fuel con-
sumption can be improved by avoiding overuse of the heater.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure frequently. Improper tire infla-
tion pressure can cause poor fuel economy.
Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use on dry roads
can lead to poor fuel economy. Use tires that are appropriate for the season.
393
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Luggage
Carrying heavy luggage will lead to poor fuel economy. Avoid carrying
unnecessary luggage. Installing a large roof rack will also cause poor fuel
economy.
Warming up before driving
Since the gasoline engine starts up and cuts out automatically when cold,
warming up the engine is unnecessary. Moreover, frequently driving short dis-
tances will cause the engine to repeatedly warm up, which can lead to excess
fuel consumption.
394
4-6. Driving tips
IS300h_EE
Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
•Engine oil
Engine/power control unit coolant
Washer fluid
Have a service technician inspect the condition of the 12-volt battery.
Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for
the rear tires.
*
Ensure that all tires are the specified size and brand, and that chains match the size
of the tires.
*
: Tire chains cannot be mounted on the 18-inch tires.
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour
warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water imme-
diately to prevent it from freezing.
To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any
snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.
Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on
the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.
Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the
vehicle.
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle
ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehi-
cle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevail-
ing weather conditions.
Preparation for winter
Before driving the vehicle
When driving the vehicle
395
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking
brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If
the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, make sure to block the
wheels.
Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause the vehicle to move
unexpectedly, possibly leading to an accident.
If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, confirm that the shift
lever cannot be moved out of P
*
.
*
: The shift lever will be locked if it is attempted to be shifted from P to any other posi-
tion without depressing the brake pedal. If the shift lever can be shifted from P,
there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by
your authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer immediately.
Except vehicles with 18-inch tires
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain
(3 mm [0.12 in.] in diameter)
Cross chain
(4 mm [0.16 in.] in diameter)
Vehicles with 18-inch tires
Tire chains cannot be mounted on the 18-inch tires.
Snow tires should be used instead.
When parking the vehicle
Selecting tire chains
1
2
396
4-6. Driving tips
IS300h_EE
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type
of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.
Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on the front tires.
Install tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 0.5
1.0 km (1/4 1/2 mile).
Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
Regulations on the use of tire chains
WARNING
Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.
Use tires of the specified size.
Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
Do not drive at speeds in excess of the speed limit or the speed limit specified for the
snow tires being used.
Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
Driving with tire chains (except vehicles with 18-inch tires)
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 50
km/h (30 mph), whichever is lower.
Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations
that cause sudden engine braking.
Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is main-
tained.
Do not use LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) system. (if equipped)
397
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire
retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
Fitting tire chains (except vehicles with 18-inch tires)
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire
chains are fitted.
398
IS300h_EE
5-1. Basic Operations
Lexus Display Audio
system..........................................400
Steering wheel audio
switches.......................................405
USB/AUX ports........................406
5-2. Setup
Setup menu ..................................409
General settings..........................410
Voice settings............................... 413
Display settings.............................414
5-3. Using the audio system
Selecting the audio source......416
Optimal use of the
audio system...............................417
Audio settings .............................. 418
Audio menu screen
operation.................................... 422
5-4. Using the radio
Radio operation..........................425
5-5. Playing an audio CD and
MP3/WMA/AAC discs
CD player operation................ 427
399
5
Lexus Display
Audio system
IS300h_EE
5-6. Using an external device
Listening to an iPod...................433
Using USB
memory device ........................437
Using the AUX port .................442
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
Steps for using Bluetooth
®
devices.........................................443
Registering a Bluetooth
®
device...........................................445
Selecting a Bluetooth
®
device...........................................446
Connecting a Bluetooth
®
audio player...............................447
Connecting a Bluetooth
®
phone ...........................................448
Displaying a Bluetooth
®
device details............................449
Detailed Bluetooth
®
settings........................................ 450
5-8. Bluetooth
®
Audio
Listening to Bluetooth
®
Audio............................................. 451
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
Using a Bluetooth
®
Phone...........................................452
Making a call................................454
Receiving a call...........................457
Speaking on the phone ...........458
Using a Bluetooth
®
phone messages .....................460
Using the steering
wheel switches.........................463
Bluetooth
®
phone
settings ........................................464
5-10. Phonebook
Contact settings.........................466
Messaging setting .....................469
5-11. Bluetooth
®
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting)...................470
Bluetooth
®
................................... 473
5-12. Other function
“Information” screen.................485
MirrorLink™................................486
USB photo....................................490
Speech command system......492
Some of the functions cannot be operated while driving.
400
IS300h_EE
5-1. Basic Operations
The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.
The button positions and shapes may differ slightly for right-hand drive vehicles.
Eject a disc.
Display the radio top screen.
Display the media top screen.
Select preset radio stations, or access a desired track or file.
Except radio and A/V mode: Pause or resume playing a track or file.
Radio and A/V mode: Turn mute on/off.
“TUNE•SCROLL” knob
Select a radio station band, track or file.
Disc slot
“POWER•VOLUME” knob
Press to turn the audio system on/off, and turn to adjust the volume.
Lexus Display Audio system
: If equipped
Use the following buttons to start listening to the audio system.
Lexus Display Audio operation buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
401
5-1. Basic Operations
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
“MENU” screen
To display the “MENU” screen, press the “MENU” button on the controller
unit.
Button Function
“Audio” Display the audio top screen
(P. 425, 427, 433, 437, 442, 451)
“Climate” Display the air conditioning control screen (P. 502)
“Telephone” Display the phone top screen (P. 452)
“Car” Display the energy monitor or fuel consumption screen
(P. 136)
“Info” Display the “Information” screen (P. 485)
“Setup” Display the “Setup” screen (P. 409)
“Display” Display the display settings screen (P. 414)
402
5-1. Basic Operations
IS300h_EE
By using the Lexus Display Audio controller, you can control the audio system,
hands-free system, etc.
Display the “Source” screen or
audio top screen (P. 416)
Display the “MENU” screen
(P. 401)
Back button
Display the previous screen
Turn or move the controller to select
a function and number.
Move the controller to display the left or right side of the screen.
Push the controller to enter the selected function and number.
Using the Lexus Display Audio controller
Select: Turn or move the control-
ler.
Enter: Push the controller.
Basic screen operation
When a list is displayed, use the appropriate button to scroll through the list.
Select the list by turning the con-
troller.
Return to the previous screen.
Indicator turns on when you can
move the controller left to view
additional screen text.
Indicator turns on when you can
move the controller right to view
additional screen text.
Lexus Display Audio controller
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
403
5-1. Basic Operations
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Input mode
Letters and numbers are inputted via the screen.
Turn the controller to select the
desired character and press the
controller to input the character.
When this indicator is shown, you
can change input fields by moving
the controller forward.
When this indicator is shown, you
can change character types by
moving the controller to the right
and then selecting the desired
character type.
Select to erase characters one by one. Select and hold to erase all charac-
ters.
Select to complete data input.
Input field mode
When in the input field you can move the cursor to the desired position.
Turn the controller to move the
cursor left or right.
When this indicator is shown, you
can move the cursor to the right
input field by moving the control-
ler to the right.
When this indicator is shown, you
can move the cursor to the left
input field by moving the control-
ler to the left.
When this indicator is shown, you can change to input mode by moving the
controller backward.
Inputting letters and numbers
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
404
5-1. Basic Operations
IS300h_EE
When using the screen
Under extremely cold conditions, the Lexus Display Audio controller may react slowly.
If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be operating
slightly slower than normal.
The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses. Change
your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the “Display” screen (P. 414) or remove
your sunglasses.
Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
WARNING
Using the Lexus Display Audio controller
Be careful when touching the Lexus Display Audio controller in extreme temperatures
as it may become very hot or cold due to the temperature inside the vehicle.
NOTICE
To prevent Lexus Display Audio controller malfunction
Do not allow the Lexus Display Audio controller to come into contact with food, liq-
uid, stickers or lit cigarettes as doing so may cause it to change color, emit a strange
odor or stop functioning.
Do not subject the Lexus Display Audio controller to excessive pressure or strong
impact as the controller may bend or break off.
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the audio system.
405
5-1. Basic Operations
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Volume switch
Increases/decreases volume
Press and hold: Continuously
increases/decreases volume
Radio mode:
Press (except manual mode):
Select a radio station
Press (manual mode): Seek up/
down
Press and hold (manual mode): Continuously seek up/down
CD, MP3/WMA/AAC disc, Bluetooth
®
, iPod or USB mode:
Press: Select a track/file/song/video
Press and hold: Select a folder/album (MP3/WMA/AAC disc or USB)
“MODE” switch
Turns the power on, selects audio source
Press and hold this switch to mute or pause the current operation. To can-
cel the mute or pause, press and hold.
Steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering
wheel.
Operation may differ depending on the type of audio system or 10.3-inch dis-
play. For details, refer to the manual provided with the audio system or 10.3-
inch display.
Depending on the type of audio source, certain functions may not be avail-
able.
Operating the audio system using the steering wheel switches
1
2
WARNING
To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
3
406
5-1. Basic Operations
IS300h_EE
iPod
Open the cover and connect an
iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it is
not turned on.
USB memory
Open the cover and connect the USB memory device.
Turn on the power, if applicable, of the USB memory device if it is not turned on.
Portable audio player
Open the cover and connect the portable audio player.
Turn on the power of the portable audio player if it is not turned on.
USB/AUX ports
Connect an iPod, USB memory device or portable audio player to the USB/
AUX port as indicated below. Select “iPod”, “USB”, “AUX” or “A/V” on the
audio source selection screen and the device can be operated via Lexus Dis-
play Audio system.
Connecting using the USB/AUX port
407
5-1. Basic Operations
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
To view a video on an iPod video or VTR, it is necessary to use a 4-pole AUX
cable to connect the portable audio device.
When connecting a portable audio device to the AUX port, use a 4-pole AUX
cable with a plug that matches the exact layout shown in the illustration.
Connected device (portable audio
device, etc.)
Left audio
Right audio
Ground
Video
When using an iPod video, a cable
that has a 4-pole AUX plug and a
USB connector is necessary. Con-
nect the plug and connector to the
AUX and USB ports.
Using a 4-pole AUX cable
1
2
3
4
5
408
5-1. Basic Operations
IS300h_EE
When using a 4-pole AUX cable
If a 4-pole AUX cable with a different layout is used, audio and/or video may not be out-
put properly.
WARNING
While driving
Do not connect a device or operate the device controls.
Failure to do so may lead to an accident.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the device or its terminals
Depending on the size and shape of the device that is connected to the system, the
console box may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the console box as
this may damage the device or the terminal, etc.
409
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
5-2. Setup
Go to “Setup”: “MENU” button “Setup”
Change the settings for operation
sounds, screen animation, etc.
(P. 410)
Adjust the settings for voice guid-
ance volume. (P. 413)
Change the settings for registering,
removing, connecting and discon-
necting Bluetooth
®
devices.
(P. 444)
Change the settings for FM radio,
iPod, etc. (P. 418)
Change the settings for vehicle
customization. (P. 696)
Change the settings for phone
sound, phonebook, etc. (P. 464)
Setup menu
The Lexus Display Audio system can be adjusted to the desired settings.
Display “Setup” screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
410
5-2. Setup
IS300h_EE
Go to “General settings”: “MENU” button “Setup” “General”
General settings
Settings are available for adjusting the operation sounds, screen animation,
etc.
Screen for general settings
Button Function
“Language” Change language. The selectable languages may
differ depending on the model or region.
“Units of measurement” Change the distance unit.
“Beep” Set the beep sound on/off.
“Button colour” Change the button color.
“Customise images” Change the startup image and screen off image.
(P. 411)
“Animation” Set the animation effect on/off.
“Delete personal data” Delete personal data (P. 412)
“Software update”
Update program versions. For details, contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
“Gracenote
®
database
update”
Update gracenote database versions. For details,
contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
“Software information” Display the open source license.
411
5-2. Setup
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Go to “Customise images”: “MENU” button “Setup” “General”
“Customise images
Select “Set images” and then select the desired image.
Set as startup image.
Set as screen off image.
Set as startup image and screen
off image.
Adding an image
Connect a USB memory device. (P. 406)
Select “Copy from USB” on the “Customise images” screen and then
select the desired image.
Move the controller to the left and then select “Copy”.
Up to 10 images can be downloaded.
Deleting images
Select “Delete images” on the “Customise images” screen and then select the
desired images.
Customizing images
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
412
5-2. Setup
IS300h_EE
USB memory
When saving the images to a USB memory device, name the folder that the images are
saved to “Image”.
Compatible device formats
The following device format can be used:
The image’s file format must be JPEG
USB communication format: USB2.0 FS (480 Mbps)
File system format: FAT16/32 (Windows)
Correspondence class: Mass storage class
JPEG file compatibility
Compatible image size: Maximum 10 MB
Go to “Delete personal data”: “MENU” button “Setup” “General”
“Delete personal data
Select “Delete”.
Check carefully beforehand, as data cannot be retrieved once deleted.
The following personal data will be deleted or changed to its default settings.
Phonebook data
•Voice tag
Call history data
•Favorite data
Bluetooth
®
devices data
Phone sound settings
Detailed Bluetooth
®
settings
Audio/video setting
Customized image data
•FM info setting
Software update history
Software update detail information
Phone display setting
Contact/call history setting
Messaging setting
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the USB memory device or its terminals
P. 441
Deleting personal data
1
2
413
5-2. Setup
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Go to “Voice settings”: “MENU” button “Setup” “Voice”
Adjust the voice guidance volume
setting.
Return to the default settings
Move the controller to the left and select “Default”.
Voice settings
You can adjust the guidance volume setting.
1
414
5-2. Setup
IS300h_EE
Go to “Display”: “MENU” button “Display”
Turn off screen.
Adjust screen quality.
Adjust screen quality of the rear
view monitor camera.
Change to day mode.
This setting turns the screen off. To turn it on, press any button such as the
“AUDIO” button or “MENU” button.
If a screen off image has been set, the set image will be displayed.
When the headlights are turned on, the screen dims.
However, the screen can be switched to day mode by selecting “Day mode”.
The screen will stay in day mode when the headlights are turned on until “Day mode”
is selected again.
Display settings
Settings are available for adjusting the contrast and brightness of the screen.
The display can also be turned off.
Screen for display settings
1
2
3
4
Screen off
Day mode
415
5-2. Setup
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Select “General” or “Camera” on the “Display” screen or select “Display” on
audio menu screen. (P. 422)
Adjust the display as desired by turning the controller clockwise (+) or
counterclockwise (-).
To select “Contrast”, “Brightness”, “Colour” or “Tone”, move the controller to the left.
(“Colour” and “Tone” are available when “Display” on the audio settings screen for
each audio source is selected.)
Changing the sample image (when “General” is selected)
Move the controller to the right and select the desired sample image.
Adjusting the screen contrast/brightness/color/tone
1
2
416
IS300h_EE
5-3. Using the audio system
Press the “AUDIO” button to display the “Source” screen.
If the “Source” screen is not displayed, press the button again.
Select the desired audio source.
The audio source can be selected by pressing the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button.
Press the “MODE” switch when the audio system is turned on. The audio source
changes each time the “MODE” switch is pressed.
Rearranging the list
The listing order of the source list can be rearranged.
Move the controller to the left while on the “Source” screen.
Select “Audio source select”.
Select an item you wish to move and then select where to move the item to.
Selecting the audio source
Switching between audio sources, such as the radio and CD, is explained in
this section.
Changing audio source
Using the steering wheel switches to change audio sources
1
2
1
2
3
417
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Go toSound settings:MENU button “Setup” “Audio”
“Sound settings”
To change between the sound setting screen and DSP setting screen, move
the controller to the right then select the desired screen.
“Sound settings”
Adjusts the treble, mid or
bass.
Adjusts the front/rear audio bal-
ance.
Adjusts the left/right audio bal-
ance.
“DSP
Sets the automatic sound level-
iser (ASL) on/off
Sets the surround function on/off
The sound quality level is adjusted individually
The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for each audio mode separately.
About Automatic Sound Leveliser (ASL)
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehicle speed.
Optimal use of the audio system
On the “Sound settings” screen, sound quality (Treble/Mid/Bass), volume bal-
ance and DSP settings can be adjusted.
How to adjust the sound settings and sound quality
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
418
5-3. Using the audio system
IS300h_EE
Go to “Audio settings”: “MENU” button “Setup” “Audio
Change sound settings (P. 417)
Change FM radio settings
(P. 419)
Change DAB settings (if equipped)
(P. 419)
Change iPod settings (P. 420)
Change USB settings (P. 420)
Change external video settings
(P. 421)
Change the cover art settings
(P. 421)
Audio settings
Screen for audio settings
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
419
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
To display the radio settings screen in a different way, select “FM radio settings”
on the audio menu screen. (P. 422)
Change the order of the station list
Select to set the traffic announce-
ment interrupt operation on/off
When traffic announcement is set to on,
the radio will begin seeking a TP station.
(P. 426)
Select to set the alternative fre-
quency network following operation
on/off
When alternative frequency is set to on, a station providing good reception is auto-
matically selected if current reception worsens.
Select to set the region code change operation on/off
When region code change operation is set to on, programs will switch over to a
broadcasting station within the same local program network.
Select to set the FM Radio text feature on/off
To display the DAB settings screen in a different way, select “DAB settings” on
the audio menu screen. (P. 422)
Update the DAB station list
Select to set the L-band on/off
When set to off, the physical channel
range for tune operations is limited to
Band III except preset operations.
When set to on, the physical channel
range for tune operations is Band III and
L-band.
Select to set traffic announcement
operation on/off
When traffic announcement is set to on, the tuner will automatically seek a station that
regularly broadcasts traffic information and the station will broadcast when the traffic
information program starts.
Select to set alternative frequency network following operation on/off
When alternative frequency is set to on, a station providing good reception is auto-
matically selected if current reception worsens.
Select to set the DAB radio text feature on/off
Changing FM radio settings
1
2
3
Changing DAB settings (if equipped)
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
420
5-3. Using the audio system
IS300h_EE
To display the iPod settings screen in a different way, select “iPod settings” on the
audio menu screen. (P. 422)
Change the screen size (video
mode)
Change the cover art settings
(P. 421)
Adjust the screen quality (video
mode) (P. 414)
Change video sound input port
To display the USB settings screen in a different way, select “USB settings” on the
audio menu screen. (P. 422)
Change the screen size (video
mode)
Change the cover art settings
(P. 421)
Adjust the screen quality (video
mode) (P. 414)
Changing iPod settings
1
2
3
4
Changing USB settings
1
2
3
421
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
To display the external video settings screen in a different way, select “External
video settings” on the audio menu screen. (P. 422)
Change the screen size
Change the video signal
Adjust the screen quality (P. 414)
To display the cover art settings screen in a different way, select “Cover art set-
tings” on the audio menu screen. (P. 422)
Select to set the cover art display of
DISC mode on/off.
Select to set the cover art display of
USB mode on/off.
Change the priority of the cover art
display for USB mode.
Select to set the cover art display of
iPod mode on/off.
Change the priority of the cover art display for iPod mode.
Changing external video settings
1
2
3
Changing the cover art settings
1
2
3
4
5
422
5-3. Using the audio system
IS300h_EE
Go to audio menu screen: Move the controller to the left on the audio top screen
Radio mode
Audio menu screen operation
You can change the settings and control functions for each audio source.
Audio menu screen
Button Function Target
radio mode
“Seek up” Seeks a station of the nearest frequency (stops
when a station is found) (manual mode) AM, FM
“Seek down
“Rewind” Adjusts the playback offset time on time shift mode DAB
“Forward”
“Time shift off” Cancels time shift operation DAB
“Next ensemble” Selects an ensemble (manual mode) DAB
“Prev. ensemble”
“Next station” Selects a service (manual mode) DAB
“Prev. station
“FM radio settings” Changes FM radio settings (P. 419) All mode
“DAB settings” Changes DAB settings (P. 419) All mode
423
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Media mode
Button Function Target audio source
“Play” Plays or pauses a track/file All media (except A/V)
“Pause”
“Track up”
Selects a track/file All media (except A/V)
“Track down”
“File up”
“File down”
“Folder up” Selects a folder/album MP3/WMA/AAC
disc, USB audio
“Folder down”
“Fast forward” Selects and hold: Fast-forward or rewind a
track/file All media (except A/V)
“Fast rewind”
“Repeat” Selects a repeat mode (P. 424) All media (except A/V)
“Random” Selects a random/shuffle play mode
(P. 424) All media (except A/V)
“Shuffle”
“Full screen” Selects a full screen mode iPod, USB video, A/V
“Connect” Connects a Bluetooth
®
device (P. 443) Bluetooth
®
“Cover art set-
tings” Changes the cover art settings (P. 421) CD, MP3/WMA/AAC
disc, USB, iPod
“iPod settings” Changes iPod settings (P. 420) iPod
“USB settings” Changes USB settings (P. 420) USB audio/video
“A/V settings” Changes A/V settings (P. 421) A/V
424
5-3. Using the audio system
IS300h_EE
Repeat play
Mode Action
“Track repeat”
File/track repeat“Repeat”
“On”
“Folder repeat” Folder/album repeat
“Album repeat”
Random/shuffle playback
Mode Action
“1 CD”
Random/shuffle play of the disc/folder/album“Random”
“Shuffle”
“Folder random”
Random/shuffle play of all folders/albums“Album random”
“Album shuffle”
425
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
5-4. Using the radio
Pressing the “RADIO” button displays the radio top screen from any screen of
the selected source.
Menu screen
P. 422
Move the controller to the right to display the right menu screen.
Change the radio top screen to the
preset selection screen.
Change the radio top screen to the
station list selection screen. (FM and
DAB)
Change the radio top screen to the
manual selection screen.
Change the radio top screen to the
time shift operation screen. (DAB)
(P. 426)
Tune in to the desired station using one of the following methods.
Seek tuning
Manual screen: Press or press and hold the “” or “” button.
Seek tuning can also be operated on the menu screen. (P. 422)
The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency
and will stop when a station is found.
Radio operation
SelectAM,FM” orDAB on theSource screen to begin listening to the
radio.
Radio top screen
Changing the top screen mode
1
2
3
4
Selecting a station
426
5-4. Using the radio
IS300h_EE
Manual tuning (manual screen)
Turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob or turn the controller.
Station list (preset or station list screen)
Select the desired station by pressing the “<” or “>” button, turn the
“TUNE•SCROLL” knob, or turning and pressing the controller.
Radio stations can be preset.
Search for desired stations.
Turn the controller to select one of the stations and then press the controller
until you hear a beep while on the preset selection screen.
The broadcast you are currently listening to can be re-listened to at any time.
Move the controller to the right and then select “Time shift”.
Turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob to set the desired offset.
An offset playback time can also be set on the menu screen. (P. 422)
To cancel the time shift operation while in time shift mode, move the controller to the
left and select “Time shift off”. If the time shift display is left showing “-0’ 00”” for 6
seconds without any operation, the time shift operation will be canceled.
Reception sensitivity
Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually chang-
ing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such
as trains, transmitters, etc.
The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio reception,
do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire
mounted inside the rear window.
Traffic announcement operation
When traffic announcement is set to on, “TP” will appear on the screen and the radio will
begin seeking a TP station. If the radio seeks out a TP station, a pop-up massage is dis-
played. To listen the program, select “Continue”. When the program ends, the initial
operation will resume.
Setting station presets (preset screen)
Time shift operation (DAB) (if equipped)
1
2
1
2
427
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
Pressing the “MEDIA” button displays the audio disc top screen from any screen
of the selected source.
Menu screen
P. 422
Selecting a track/file
Press the “<” or “>” button, turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the
desired track/file number.
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold the “” or “” button.
Selecting the track by the list (CD)
Move the controller to the right and then select the desired track.
Selecting a folder (MP3/WMA/AAC disc)
Move the controller to the right and then select “Folders”.
Select the desired folder. Then select a file to begin using the selected
folder.
Selecting a file by the selected folder (MP3/WMA/AAC disc)
Move the controller to the right and then select “Files”.
Select the desired file.
CD player operation
Insert a disc, press the “MEDIA” button or select “DISC” on the “Source”
screen with a disc inserted to begin listening to a disc.
Audio disc top screen
1
2
1
2
428
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
IS300h_EE
Error messages
If the following error messages appear on the screen, refer to the table and take the
appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to
scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.
Music disc player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is
detected.
If a disc is left inside the Music disc player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods
Disc may be damaged and may not play properly.
Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the Music disc player.
MP3, WMA and AAC files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 com-
pression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technol-
ogy standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.
MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.
Message Cause Correction procedures
“Check disc”
The disc is dirty or dam-
aged.
The disc is inserted
upside down.
The disc is not playable
with the player.
•Clean the disc.
Insert the disc correctly.
Confirm the disc is play-
able with the player.
“DISC error” There is a malfunction
within the system. Eject the disc.
“No music files found.” No playable data is
included on the disc. Eject the disc.
429
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
MP3 file compatibility
Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8-160 (kbps)
Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
WMA file compatibility
Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 (only compatible with Windows Media Audio Standard)
Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48-192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48-320 (kbps)
AAC file compatibility
Compatible standards
MPEG4/AAC-LC
Compatible sampling frequencies
11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)
Compatible bit rates
16-320 (kbps)
Compatible channel modes: 1 ch and 2 ch
Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback are CD-Rs and CD-
RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not final-
ized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or
marked with fingerprints.
Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
UDF (2.01 or lower)
MP3, WMA and AAC files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed cor-
rectly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
Maximum number of files per disc: 255
430
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
IS300h_EE
File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are those with
the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.
Discs containing multi-session recordings
As the audio system is compatible with multi session discs, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3, WMA and AAC files. However, only the first session can be played.
ID3, WMA and AAC tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist
name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number
of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and
artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track title and
artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
MP3, WMA and AAC playback
When a disc containing MP3, WMA or AAC files is inserted, all files on the disc are
first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3, WMA or AAC file is
played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write any
files to the disc other than MP3, WMA or AAC files or create any unnecessary fold-
ers.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3, WMA or AAC format data can-
not be played.
Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than MP3, WMA
and AAC files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3, WMA and
AAC files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speak-
ers.
Playback
To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least
128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on
the characteristics of the disc.
There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3, WMA
and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the
file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some
cases, playback may not be possible at all.
When files other than MP3, WMA or AAC files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
431
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
The Gracenote
®
media database
Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, “Powered by Gracenote”, MusicID,
Playlist Plus and MediaVOCS are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Gracenote, Inc. in the United States
432
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
Discs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of discs.
Also, do not use 8 cm (3 in.) disc adapters, DualDiscs or printable discs.
Doing so may damage the player and/or disc insert/eject function.
Discs that have a diameter that is not 12 cm (4.7 in.).
Low-quality or deformed discs.
Discs with a transparent or translucent recording area.
Discs that have tape, stickers or labels attached to them, or that have had the label
peeled off.
Player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the player
itself.
Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.
Do not apply oil to the player.
Store discs away from direct sunlight.
Never try to disassemble any part of the player.
433
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
5-6. Using an external device
P. 406
Pressing the “MEDIA” button displays the iPod top screen from any screen of the
selected source.
Menu screen
P. 422
Selecting a song
Press the “” or “” button, turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the
desired song number.
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold the “” or “” button.
Selecting a play mode
Move the controller to the right and then select “Browse”.
Select the desired play mode, and then select a song to begin using the
selected play mode.
Displaying the now playing list
Move the controller to the right and then select “Now playing list”.
Listening to an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
Press the “MEDIA” button or select “iPod” on the “Source” screen.
Connecting an iPod
iPod top screen
1
2
434
5-6. Using an external device
IS300h_EE
About iPod
Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to con-
nect specifically to the Apple product(s) identified in the badge, and has been certified
by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for
the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with an Apple product may affect wireless
performance.
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Lightning are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The Lightning connector works with iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPod touch (5th
generation), and iPod nano (7th generation).
The 30-pin connector works with iPhone 4s, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G,
iPhone, iPod touch (1st through 4th generation), iPod classic, and iPod nano (1st
through 6th generation)
USB works with iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS,
iPhone 3G, iPhone, iPod touch (1st through 5th generation), iPod classic, and iPod
nano (1st through 7th generation).
Bluetooth
®
technology works with iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone
4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone, iPod touch (2nd through 5th generation) and iPod
nano (7th generation).
iPod cover art
Depending on the iPod and songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed.
This function can be changed to on/off. (P. 421)
It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be operated while the
cover art display is in process.
iPod functions
When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will
resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be
available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system spec-
ification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it may resolve the problem.
Depending on the iPod, while connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated
with its own controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s audio system
instead.
When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If so, charge the
iPod before use.
Compatible models (P. 436)
435
5-6. Using an external device
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Error messages
If the following error messages appear on the screen, refer to the table and take the
appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Message Cause/Correction procedures
“Connection error. Consult
your owner’s manual for
instructions on how to
reconnect the iPod.”
This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.
“There are no songs available
for playback. Add compatible
songs to your iPod.”
This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
“No items available.” This indicates that songs are not found in a selected
playlist.
“Check the iPod firmware
version.”
This indicates that the software version is not com-
patible.
Please check the compatible models. (P. 436)
“iPod authorisation unsuccess-
ful.”
This indicates that the Lexus Display Audio system
failed to authorize the iPod.
Please check your iPod.
436
5-6. Using an external device
IS300h_EE
iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod from
the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer
to your iPod Owner’s Manual.
Compatible models
The following iPod
®
, iPod nano
®
, iPod classic
®
, iPod touch
®
and iPhone
®
devices can
be used with this system.
Made for
iPod touch (5th generation)
*
iPod touch (4th generation)
iPod touch (3rd generation)
iPod touch (2nd generation)
•iPod touch (1st generation)
iPod classic
•iPod with video
iPod nano (7th generation)
*
iPod nano (6th generation)
iPod nano (5th generation)
iPod nano (4th generation)
iPod nano (3rd generation)
iPod nano (1st generation)
•iPhone 5s
*
•iPhone 5c
*
•iPhone 5
*
•iPhone 4S
•iPhone 4
•iPhone 3GS
•iPhone 3G
•iPhone
*
: iPod video not supported
Depending on differences between models or software versions, etc., some models
might be incompatible with this system.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the iPod or its terminals
Depending on the size and shape of the iPod that is connected to the system, the con-
sole box may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the console box as this
may damage the iPod or the terminal, etc.
Do not leave the iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become
high.
Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is connected.
Do not insert foreign objects into the port.
437
5-6. Using an external device
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
P. 406
Pressing the “MEDIA” button displays the USB top screen from any screen of the
selected source.
Moving the controller to the right and selecting “Play music” while the USB video
screen is displayed changes to USB audio mode.
Menu screen
P. 422
Selecting a file
Press the “” or “” button, turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the
desired file number.
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold the “” or “” button.
Selecting a play mode
Move the controller to the right and select “Browse”.
Select the desired play mode, and select a file to begin the selected play
mode.
Displaying the now playing list
Move the controller to the right and select “Now playing list”.
Using USB memory device
Connecting a USB memory device enables you to enjoy music from the vehi-
cle speakers.
Select “USB1” or “USB2” on the “Source” screen.
Connecting a USB memory device
USB top screen
USB audio
1
2
438
5-6. Using an external device
IS300h_EE
Moving the controller to the right and selecting “Play video” while the USB audio
screen is displayed changes to USB video mode.
This function cannot be used while USB photo or MirrorLink™ is in use.
Menu screen
P. 422
Selecting a file
Press the “” or “” button, turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the
desired file number.
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold the ” or” button.
Selecting a folder
Move the controller to the right and select “Browse”.
Select the desired folder, then select a file to begin using the selected
folder.
Displaying the now playing list
Move the controller to the right and select “Now playing list”.
USB memory functions
Depending on the USB memory device that is connected to the system, the device
itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the device is
inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system
specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it may resolve the problem.
If the USB memory device still does not begin operation after being disconnected and
reconnected, format the device.
Error messages for USB memory
If the following error messages appear on the screen, refer to the table and take the
appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
USB video
Message Cause/Correction procedures
“Connection error. Consult your
owner’s manual for instructions
on how to reconnect the USB
device.”
This indicates a problem with the USB memory
device or its connection.
“There are no files available for
playback. Add compatible files
to your USB device.”
This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are
included on the USB memory device.
“No video files found.” This indicates that no video files are included in the
USB memory.
1
2
439
5-6. Using an external device
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
USB memory
Compatible devices
USB memory devices that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC (audio mode) or
MP4, WMV and AVI (video mode) playback.
Compatible device formats
The following device format can be used:
USB communication format: USB2.0 FS (480 Mbps)
File system format: FAT16/32 (Windows)
Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3, WMA and AAC files written to a device with any format other than those
listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not
be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
Maximum number of folders in a device: 3000 (including the root)
Maximum number of files in a device: 9999
Maximum number of files per folder: 255
MP3, WMA and AAC files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3 com-
pression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This format
compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technol-
ogy standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.
MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.
MP3 file compatibility
Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERIII, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERIII)
Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERIII: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERIII: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERIII: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERIII: 8-160 (kbps)
Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
WMA file compatibility
Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 (only compatible with Windows Media Audio Standard)
Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48-192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48-320 (kbps)
440
5-6. Using an external device
IS300h_EE
AAC file compatibility
Compatible standards
MPEG4/AAC-LC
Compatible sampling frequencies
11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)
Compatible bit rates
16-320 (kbps)
Compatible channel modes: 1 ch and 2 ch
MP4, WMV and AVI files
The following resolutions can be used:
128x96, 160x120, 176x144 (QCIF), 320x240 (QVGA), 352x240 (SIF),
352x288 (CIF), 640x480 (VGA), 720x480 (NTSC), 720x576 (PAL)
File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are those with
the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.
ID3, WMA and AAC tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist
name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number
of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and
artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track title and
artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
MP3, WMA and AAC playback
When a device containing MP3, WMA or AAC files is connected, all files in the
USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3,
WMA or AAC file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recom-
mend that you do not include any files other than MP3, WMA or AAC files or cre-
ate any unnecessary folders.
When a USB memory device is connected and the audio source is changed to USB
memory mode, the USB memory device will start playing the first file in the first
folder. If the same device is removed and reconnected (and the contents have not
been changed), the USB memory device will resume play from the same point in
which it was last used.
Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than MP3, WMA
and AAC files, they will be skipped (not played).
Playback
To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least
128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3, WMA
and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the
file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some
cases, playback may not be possible at all.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
441
5-6. Using an external device
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the USB memory device or its terminals
Depending on the size and shape of the USB memory that is connected to the sys-
tem, the console box may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the console
box as this may damage the USB memory or the terminal, etc.
Do not leave the USB memory device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehi-
cle may become high.
Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory device
while it is connected.
Do not insert foreign objects into the port.
442
5-6. Using an external device
IS300h_EE
P. 406
Pressing the “MEDIA” button displays the top screen from any screen of the
selected source.
Menu screen
P. 422
Operating portable players connected to the audio system
Volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other adjustments must be
made on the portable player itself.
When using a portable player connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable player.
Using the AUX port
To use the AUX port, connect a portable player, press the “MEDIA” button or
select “AUX” or “A/V” on the “Source” screen.
Connecting a portable player
Top screen
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the portable player or its terminal
Depending on the size and shape of the portable player that is connected to the sys-
tem, the console box may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the console
box as this may damage the portable player or the terminal, etc.
Do not leave portable player in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high.
Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is
connected.
Do not insert foreign objects into the port.
443
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
Steps for using Bluetooth
®
devices
The following can be performed using Bluetooth
®
wireless communication:
A portable audio player can be operated and listened to via the Lexus
Display Audio system
Hands-free phone calls can be made via a cellular phone
In order to use wireless communication, register and connect a Bluetooth
®
device by performing the following procedures.
Device registration/connection flow
1. Register the Bluetooth
®
device to be used with Lexus Display
Audio system (P. 445)
2. Select the Bluetooth
®
device to be used
(P. 446)
Audio
Hands-free phone
3. Start Bluetooth
®
connec-
tion (P. 447)
3. Start Bluetooth
®
connec-
tion (P. 448)
4. Use Bluetooth
®
audio
(P. 451)
4. Check connection status
(P. 453)
5. Use Bluetooth
®
phone
(P. 454)
444
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
IS300h_EE
Go to “Bluetooth
*
setup”: “MENU” button “Setup” Bluetooth
*
*
: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
When displaying “Bluetooth
*
setup” screen from the “Bluetooth
*
audio” screen
Display the “Bluetooth
*
audio” screen. (P. 451)
Move the controller to the left and select “Connect”.
When displaying “Bluetooth
*
setup” screen from the phone top screen
Display the phone top screen. (P. 452)
Move the controller to the left and select “Connect telephone”.
*
: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
“Bluetooth
*
setup” screen
1
2
1
2
445
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Turn the Bluetooth
®
connection setting of your device set to on.
Go to “Bluetooth
*
setup”: “MENU” button “Setup” “Bluetooth
*
Move the controller to the left and then select “Add device”
When this screen is displayed,
search for the device name dis-
played on this screen on your
Bluetooth
®
device.
For operation of the Bluetooth
®
device,
see the manual that comes with your
Bluetooth
®
device.
Register the Bluetooth
®
device
using your Bluetooth
®
device.
A PIN code are not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth
®
devices. Depending on the device, you may need to select Yes to register, or No to
cancel on the device.
If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again.
*
: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Go to “Bluetooth
*
setup”: “MENU” button “Setup” “Bluetooth
*
Move the controller to the left and then select “Remove device”.
Select the device to remove.
*
: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Registering a Bluetooth
®
device
Bluetooth
®
compatible phones (HFP) and portable audio players (AVP) can
be registered simultaneously. You can register up to 5 Bluetooth
®
devices.
How to register a Bluetooth
®
device
1
2
3
4
5
Removing a Bluetooth
®
device
1
2
3
446
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
IS300h_EE
Go to “Bluetooth
*
setup”: “MENU” button “Setup” “Bluetooth
*
Select the device to connect.
Select “Connect all”, “Connect as a telephone” or “Connect as audio player”.
“Connect all” means connect both the phone and audio functions of one device.
If the desired Bluetooth
®
device is not displayed, register the device.
(P. 445)
*
: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Selecting a Bluetooth
®
device
If multiple Bluetooth
®
devices are registered, follow the procedure below to
select the Bluetooth
®
device to be used. You may only use one device at a
time.
How to select a Bluetooth
®
device
1
2
3
447
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
When the portable audio player is in standby for a connection, it will be automat-
ically connected whenever the power switch is in either ACCESSORY or ON
mode.
Operate the portable player and connect it to the Bluetooth
®
audio system.
Go to “Bluetooth
*
setup”: “MENU” button “Setup” “Bluetooth
*
Select the device to connect.
Select “Connect all” or “Connect as audio player”.
If the desired Bluetooth
®
device is not displayed, register the device.
(P. 445)
*
: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Connecting a Bluetooth
®
audio player
There are 2 portable audio player connection settings available: connecting
from the vehicle and connecting from the portable player.
Connecting method is set to “Vehicle”
Connecting method is set to “Device”
1
2
3
448
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
IS300h_EE
When you register a phone, auto connection will be activated. It is recom-
mended to have the system set to this mode and leave the Bluetooth
®
phone in a
place where a good connection can be established.
When the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system will
search for a nearby cellular phone you have registered.
The system automatically connects with the most recent phone that was con-
nected. The connected result is displayed.
When auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth
*
power is turned off, you must
connect the Bluetooth
®
device manually.
Go to “Bluetooth
*
setup”: “MENU” button “Setup” “Bluetooth
*
Select the device to connect.
Select “Connect all”, “Connect as a telephone” or “Connect as audio player”.
If the desired Bluetooth
®
device is not displayed, register the device.
(P. 445)
*
: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Reconnecting a Bluetooth
®
phone
If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the power switch in
ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system will automatically attempt to reconnect.
Connecting a phone while Bluetooth
®
audio is playing
Bluetooth
®
audio will stop temporarily.
It may take time to connect.
Connecting a Bluetooth
®
phone
There are two connecting methods available: automatic and manual.
Auto connection
Manual connection
1
2
3
449
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Go to “Bluetooth
*
setup”: “MENU” button “Setup” “Bluetooth
*
Select the desired device and then select “Device info”.
Change the name of the device
Change the connection method
“Vehicle”: Connect the audio system
to the portable audio player.
“Device”: Connect the portable
audio player to the audio system
Device address
Compatibility profile of the
device
*
: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Restoring the default settings
Move the controller to the left and select “Defaults” on the “Device information” screen.
Displaying a Bluetooth
®
device details
You can confirm and change the registered device details.
Bluetooth
®
device registration status
1
2
1
2
3
4
450
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
IS300h_EE
Go to “Bluetooth
*
setup”: “MENU” button “Setup” “Bluetooth
*
Move the controller to the left and then select “System settings”.
Select to set the Bluetooth
®
func-
tion on/off.
Change the name of the device.
Change the PIN-code.
You can change the PIN-code that is
used to register your Bluetooth
®
devices in the system.
Device address
Select to set the display of the
phone status on/off
You can set the system to show the
status confirmation display when
connecting a phone.
Select to set the display of the
audio player status on/off
You can set the system to show the
status confirmation display when
connecting an audio player.
Compatibility profile of the system
*
: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Restoring the default settings
Move the controller to the left and select “Defaults” on the “System settings” screen.
Detailed Bluetooth
®
settings
You can confirm and change the detailed Bluetooth
®
settings.
How to check and change detailed Bluetooth
®
settings
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
451
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
5-8. Bluetooth
®
Audio
When a Bluetooth
®
device cannot be connected, check the connection status
on the “Bluetooth
*
audio” screen. If the device is not connected, either register
or reconnect the device. (P. 445, 447)
*
: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Pressing the “MEDIA” button displays the Bluetooth
®
audio top screen from any
screen of the selected source.
Menu screen
P. 422
Selecting a song
Press the “” or “” button or turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the
desired song number.
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold the “” or “” button.
Selecting a play mode
Move the controller to the right and then select “Browse”.
Select the desired play mode, and then select a song to begin using the
selected play mode.
Displaying the now playing list
Move the controller to the right and then select “Now playing list”.
Listening to Bluetooth
®
Audio
The Bluetooth
®
audio system enables the user to enjoy music played on a por-
table player from the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.
Bluetooth
®
audio top screen
1
2
452
IS300h_EE
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
Before making a phone call, check the connection status, battery charge, call
area and signal strength. (
P. 453)
If a Bluetooth
®
device cannot be connected, check the connection status. If the
device is not connected, either register or reconnect it. (
P. 445, 448)
To display the screen shown below, press the off-hook switch on the steering
wheel or select “Telephone” on the “MENU” screen.
Phone name
Bluetooth
®
connection status
(
P. 453)
Displays the call history screen
(
P. 456)
Displays the favorites screen
(
P. 456)
Displays the contacts screen
(
P. 454)
Displays the dial pad screen (
P. 454)
Displays the message inbox screen (
P. 460)
Using a Bluetooth
®
Phone
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your cellular phone
without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth
®
. Bluetooth
®
is a wireless data system that
allows the cellular phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-free system and
make/receive calls.
Phone top screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
453
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Phone switch (P. 463)
Microphone
The vehicle’s built-in microphone is
used when talking on the phone.
The person to whom you are speak-
ing to can be heard from the front
speakers.
To use the hands-free system, you
must register your Bluetooth
®
phone in the system. (P. 445)
You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge on any
screen.
Connection status
Signal strength
Battery charge
Status display
1
2
3
Indicators Conditions
Connection status
Good Poor Not connected
(Blue) (Gray)
Signal strength
Excellent Poor
Battery charge
Full Empty
454
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
IS300h_EE
Go to “Dial pad”: “MENU” button “Telephone” “Dial pad
Input a phone number. (P. 403)
Press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel or select .
You can dial a number from the phonebook data imported from your cellular
phone. The system has one phonebook for each registered phone. Up to 2500
contacts may be stored in each phonebook. (P. 455)
Go to “Contacts”: “MENU” button “Telephone” “Contacts”
Choose the desired contact to call from the list.
Choose the number and then press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel
or press the controller.
Making a call
Once a Bluetooth
®
phone is registered, you can make a call using the follow-
ing procedure:
Dialing
Dialing from the phonebook
1
2
3
1
2
3
455
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
You can transfer the phone numbers in a Bluetooth
®
phone to the system.
Operation methods differ between PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) compat-
ible and PBAP incompatible Bluetooth
®
phones. If the cellular phone does not
support either PBAP or OPP (Object Push Profile) service, you cannot transfer
contacts.
Press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel.
If the phonebook is empty, a message will be displayed.
For a PBAP compatible Bluetooth
®
phone and “Automatic transfer” is off
To enable automatic transfer of new contacts from a cellular phone every time
it is connected, select “Always”. (P. 466)
Select “Once” if you want to transfer new contacts from a cellular phone.
For a PBAP incompatible and OPP compatible Bluetooth
®
phone
Select “Transfer” and operate your cellular phone to transfer new contacts
from a cellular phone.
Select “Add” if you want to add a new contact manually.
When the phonebook is empty
1
2
2
456
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
IS300h_EE
You can make a call using numbers registered in the favorites.
Go to “Favourites”: “MENU” button “Telephone” “Favourites”
Choose the desired contact to call from the list.
Choose the number and then press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel
or press the controller.
You can make a call using the call history.
Go to “Call history”: “MENU” button “Telephone” “Call history
Select the desired entry from the list.
Press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel or select .
Call history list
If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the phonebook, the
name is displayed in the call history.
If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is displayed in the
call history.
International calls
Depending on the mobile phone in use, you may not be able to make international calls.
Calling by using the latest call history entry
Press the
off-hook
switch on the steering wheel to display the phone top screen.
Press the switch again to display the “Call history” screen.
Press the switch again to select the latest call history entry.
Dialing from favorites
Dialing from history
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
457
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Press the off-hook switch on the steer-
ing wheel or select .
Press the on-hook switch on the steering wheel or select .
International calls
Depending on the cellular phone in use, received international calls may not be dis-
played correctly.
Receiving a call
When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a
sound.
To answer the phone
To refuse a call
458
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
IS300h_EE
Select “Transmit volume”. To restore
default volume, move the controller to
the left on the “Transmit volume” screen
and then select “Default”.
Move the controller to the left and then select “In-call volume”. You can also
adjust the volume using the “POWER•VOLUME” knob or the steering switches.
Select “Mute”.
When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank, you can
store phone numbers and code numbers in the contacts using “p” or “w” symbols
(eg. 056133 w 0123p#1).
Contact including a phone number only
Move the controller to the left and then select “0-9”.
Input the number.
Phone number containing a “p” symbol
When the “p” symbol is dialed in an outgoing call, there will be a pause for 2 sec-
onds before the following digits are dialed automatically.
Phone number containing a “w” symbol
When the “w” symbol is dialed in an outgoing call, you need to go to the “Release
tones” screen to dial the following digits. Move the controller to the left and then
select “Release tones”.
Speaking on the phone
The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.
To adjust the transmit volume
To adjust in call volume
To prevent the other party from hearing your voice
Inputting tones
1
2
459
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Select “Handset mode” to change from a hands-free call to a cellular phone call
or vice versa.
Press the on-hook switch on the steering wheel or select .
When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, an incoming call mes-
sage will be displayed.
To talk with the other party:
Press the off-hook switch on the steer-
ing wheel or select .
To refuse the call:
Press the on-hook switch on the steer-
ing wheel or select .
Every time you press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel or select during
call waiting, you will be switched to the other party.
Transferring calls
It is not possible to transfer from hands-free to the cellular phone while driving.
If you transfer from the cellular phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will be dis-
played, and you can operate the system using the screen.
Transfer method and operation may vary according to the cellular phone used.
For operation of the cellular phone in use, see the phone’s manual.
Call waiting operation
Call waiting operation may differ depending on your phone company and cellular
phone.
To transfer a call
To hang up
Call waiting
460
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
IS300h_EE
Go to “Message inbox”: “MENU” button “Telephone” “Message inbox”
Select a message.
Moving the controller to the left while on the “Message inbox” screen displays the set-
ting screen. (P. 469)
Move the controller to the right while on the “Message inbox” screen and then select
an account to display a message list for the selected account.
Selecting “Next” or “Previous” displays the next or previous message.
If a message is too long, select “Read more” to display the full text.
Option menu
Move the controller to the left while on the message screen.
Select a prepared message and
send a reply message.
Call a sender.
If more than one phone number is
registered for a sender, a phone
number selection screen will be dis-
played.
Call a phone number written in a
message.
Select “Mark unread” to mark E-mail that has been read as unread. Select
“Mark read” to mark E-mail that has not been read as read.
Using a Bluetooth
®
phone messages
Once a MAP-profile compatible Bluetooth
®
phone is registered, you can
check the E-mail/SMS/MMS and reply to a message using the following pro-
cedures:
Checking messages
Message screen
1
2
1
2
3
4
461
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Move the controller to the left while on the message screen.
Select “Quick message” to display the “Quick message” screen.
Select the desired message and then select “Send”.
Editing a quick message
Move the controller to the left while on the message screen.
Select “Quick message” and then the desired message. Move the control-
ler to the left while the desired message is displayed.
Select “Edit”.
To return to the default message after editing, select “Default”.
Replying to a message
1
2
3
1
2
3
462
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
IS300h_EE
This function is available when the “E-mail notification popup” or “SMS/MMS
notification popup” are set to on. (P. 469)
“Incoming E-mail display” or “Incoming SMS/MMS display” are set to “Drop-
down”
When E-mail/SMS/MMS are received, the incoming message is displayed on
the upper side of the screen with a sound.
“Incoming E-mail display” or “Incoming SMS/MMS display” are set to “Full
screen”
When E-mail/SMS/MMS are received, the incoming message screen is dis-
played with a sound and it can be operated on the screen.
Check the message.
Refuse to check the message.
Call to receive the message sender’s
phone number.
Receiving a message popup function
1
2
3
463
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Volume switch
During an incoming call: Adjusts the
ring tone volume
During speaking on the phone:
Adjusts in call volume.
The voice guidance volume cannot be
adjusted using this button.
Off-hook switch
Start call
Receiving
Phone top screen display
On-hook switch
•End call
•Refuse call
Talk switch
Press: Turns the speech command system on
Press and hold: Turns the speech command system off
Using the steering wheel switches
The steering wheel switches can be used to operate a connected cellular
phone.
Operating a phone using the steering wheel switches
1
2
3
4
464
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
IS300h_EE
Go to “Telephone settings”: “MENU” button “Setup” “Telephone”
Register and connect a Bluetooth
®
device. (P. 445)
Adjust the call volume. (P. 464)
Change the contact/call history set-
tings. (P. 466)
Change the messaging settings.
(P. 469)
Change the phone display settings. (P. 465)
Change the ring tone type
Adjust the ring tone volume
Change incoming SMS/MMS tone
type
Adjust the incoming SMS/MMS
tone volume
Change the incoming e-mail tone
type
Adjust the incoming e-mail tone vol-
ume
Adjust in call tone volume
Bluetooth
®
phone settings
You can adjust the hands-free system to your desired settings.
“Telephone settings” screen
1
2
3
4
Sound settings
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
465
5-9. Bluetooth
®
Phone
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Change the incoming call display
Set the phonebook/history transfer
status notification display on/off
To return to the default volume settings
Move the controller to the left and then select “Defaults”.
Phone display settings
1
2
466
IS300h_EE
5-10. Phonebook
Go to “Contact/call history settings”: “MENU” button “Setup” “Telephone
“Contact/call history settings”
Select to set the automatic
phonebook download on/off
With this setting on, phonebook data will
be automatically transferred.
Depending on the cellular phone, call
history will be also transferred.
Update phonebook (PBAP incom-
patible Bluetooth
®
phones, or com-
patible phones with “Automatic
transfer” off)
Change the sort contacts mode
Add a favorite (P. 468)
Delete a favorite (P. 468)
Select to set the display of contact
images on/off
Delete call history. (PBAP incom-
patible Bluetooth
®
phones, or com-
patible phones with “Automatic
transfer” off)
Add a new contact (PBAP incom-
patible Bluetooth
®
phones, or com-
patible phones with “Automatic
transfer” off)
Input the name, phone number and
phone number type to add a new con-
tact.
Contact settings
Individual phonebooks from up to 5 phones can be registered to the system.
The data for 2500 contacts (up to 4 numbers per contact) can be registered
into the system’s phonebook.
“Contact/call history settings” screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
467
5-10. Phonebook
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Edit a contact (PBAP incompatible Bluetooth
®
phones, or compatible
phones with “Automatic transfer” off)
Select the desired contact to edit.
Delete contacts (P. 468) (PBAP incompatible Bluetooth
®
phones, or
compatible phones with “Automatic transfer” off)
Edit a voice tag (P. 492)
Return to the default settings
Move the controller to the left and select “Defaults”.
You can transfer the phone numbers in your Bluetooth
®
phone to the system.
Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP incompatible
Bluetooth
®
phones. If your cellular phone does not support either PBAP or
OPP services, you cannot transfer contacts.
Go to “Transfer contacts”: “MENU” button “Setup “Telephone “Con-
tact/call history settings” “Update contacts from telephone”
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth
®
phones when “Automatic transfer” is set to
on
Start the update automatically.
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth
®
phones when “Automatic transfer” is set to
off and PBAP incompatible Bluetooth
®
phones
Select to transfer the contact from
the connected cellular phone and
replace the current one.
Select to transfer the desired con-
tact data from the connected cellu-
lar phone to add to the current one.
Transferring a phone number
9
10
11
1
2
468
5-10. Phonebook
IS300h_EE
You can register the desired contact from the phonebook. Up to 15 contacts per
phone can be registered.
Go to “Add favourite”: “MENU” button “Setup” “Telephone” “Con-
tact/call history settings” “Add favourite”
Choose the contact to register.
Go to “Remove favourite”: “MENU” button “Setup” “Telephone”
“Contact/call history settings” “Remove favourite
Select the desired contacts.
You can select all contacts by selecting “Select all”.
Move the controller to the left and select “Remove”.
Go to “Delete contacts”: “MENU” button “Setup” “Telephone”
“Contact/call history settings” Delete contacts”
Select the desired contacts.
You can select all contacts by selecting “Select all”.
Move the controller to the left and select “Delete”.
Phonebook data
Phonebook data is managed separately for every registered phone. When one phone is
connected, you cannot read the registered data of the other phones.
When transferring contacts
Transfer contacts while the hybrid system is operating.
If the cellular phone is OPP or PBAP compatible, you may need to input “1234” on the
cellular phone for OBEX certification.
When you have selected “Replace contacts” or “Add contact” to transfer contacts
If the cellular phone does not support OPP service, you cannot use these functions. You
can transfer the phonebook data only by operating your phone.
Transferring contacts while Bluetooth
®
audio is playing
Bluetooth
®
audio will disconnect. It will reconnect automatically when data transfer fin-
ishes. It may not reconnect depending on the phone which is connected.
Registering favorites
Removing favorites
Deleting the contacts data
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
469
5-10. Phonebook
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Go to “Messaging settings”: “MENU” button “Setup” “Telephone
“Messaging settings”
Select to set the message forward-
ing from cellular phones on/off
Select to set the new SMS/MMS
notification display on/off
Select to set the new e-mail notifica-
tion display on/off
Select to set the signature function
on/off
Select to set the cellular phone’s
message read and unread status
update function on/off.
Change the incoming SMS/MMS
display.
Change the incoming e-mail display.
Change the account name to “Ser-
vice name” (names from the con-
nected device) or “Fixed name”
(pre-defined names).
Restoring the default settings
Move the controller to the left then select “Defaults” on the “Messaging settings” screen.
Messaging setting
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
470
IS300h_EE
5-11. Bluetooth
®
If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth
®
device, first
check the table below.
When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth
®
device
When registering/connecting a cellular phone
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
The hands-free system or Bluetooth
®
device does not work.
The Bluetooth
®
version of the connected cellular phone may be older than the speci-
fied version.
Use a cellular phone with Bluetooth
®
version 2.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver.
3.0 with EDR or higher). (P. 475)
A cellular phone cannot be registered.
An incorrect passcode was entered on the cellular phone.
Enter the correct passcode on the cellular phone.
The registration operation has not been completed on the cellular phone side.
Complete the registration operation on the cellular phone (approve registration
on the phone).
Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular phone.
Delete the existing registration information from both this system and the cellu-
lar phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to connect to this system.
(P. 445)
A Bluetooth
®
connection cannot be made.
Another Bluetooth
®
device is already connected.
Manually connect the cellular phone you wish to use to this system. (P. 448)
Bluetooth
®
function is not enabled on the cellular phone.
Enable the Bluetooth
®
function on the cellular phone.
“Check your telephone.” message is displayed.
Bluetooth
®
function is not enabled on the cellular phone.
Enable the Bluetooth
®
function on the cellular phone.
Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular phone.
Delete the existing registration information from both this system and the cellu-
lar phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to connect to this system.
(P. 445)
471
5-11. Bluetooth
®
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
When making/receiving a call
When using the phonebook
When using the Bluetooth
®
message function
A call cannot be made/received.
Your vehicle is in a “No service” area.
Move to where “No service” no longer appears on the display.
Phonebook data cannot be transferred manually/automatically.
Automatic phonebook transfer function on this system is set to off.
Set automatic phonebook transfer function on this system to on. (P. 466)
Passcode has not been entered on the cellular phone.
Enter the passcode on the cellular phone if requested (default passcode: 1234).
Transfer operation on the cellular phone has not completed.
Complete transfer operation on the cellular phone (approve transfer operation
on the phone).
Phonebook data cannot be edited.
Automatic phonebook transfer function on this system is set to on.
Set automatic phonebook transfer function on this system to off. (P. 466)
Messages cannot be viewed.
Message transfer is not enabled on the cellular phone.
Enable message transfer on the cellular phone (approve message transfer on the
phone).
Automatic transfer function on this system is set to off.
Set automatic transfer function on this system to on. (P. 469)
New message notifications are not displayed.
Notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system is set to off.
Set notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system to on. (P. 469)
Automatic message transfer function is not enabled on the cellular phone.
Enable automatic transfer function on the cellular phone.
472
5-11. Bluetooth
®
IS300h_EE
In other situations
Even though all conceivable measures have been taken, the symptom status does not
change.
The cellular phone is not close enough to this system.
Bring the cellular phone closer to this system.
The cellular phone is the most likely cause of the symptom.
Turn the cellular phone off, remove and reinstall the battery pack, and then
restart the cellular phone.
Enable the cellular phone’s Bluetooth
®
connection.
Stop the cellular phone’s security software and close all applications.
Before using an application installed on the cellular phone, carefully check its
source and how its operation might affect this system.
473
5-11. Bluetooth
®
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
When using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
In the following situations, the system may not function.
If the portable audio player is turned off
If the portable audio player is not connected
If the portable audio player’s battery is low
There may be a delay if a cellular phone connection is made during Bluetooth
®
audio
play.
Depending on the type of portable audio player that is connected to the system, opera-
tion may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available.
This system is not guaranteed to operate with all Bluetooth
®
devices.
When using the hands-free system
The audio system is muted when making a call.
If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
If the Bluetooth
®
phone is too close to the system, quality of the sound may deteriorate
and connection status may deteriorate.
In the following situations, it may be difficult to hear the other party:
When driving on unpaved roads
When driving at high speeds
•If a window is open
If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
If there is interference from the network of the cellular phone
Depending on the type of phone, certain functions may not be available.
This system is not guaranteed to operate with all Bluetooth
®
devices.
Bluetooth
®
474
5-11. Bluetooth
®
IS300h_EE
Conditions under which the system will not operate
If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth
®
If the cellular phone is turned off
If you are outside of cellular phone service coverage
If the cellular phone is not connected
If the cellular phone’s battery is low
When outgoing calls are controlled, due to heavy traffic on phone lines, etc.
When the cellular phone itself cannot be used
When transferring phonebook data from the cellular phone
Bluetooth
®
antenna
The antenna is built into the display.
If the portable audio player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box, or is
touching or covered by metal objects, the connection status may deteriorate.
If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the console box, or touching or covered by
metal objects, the connection status may deteriorate.
Battery charge/signal status
This display may not correspond exactly with the portable audio player or cellular
phone itself.
This system does not have a charging function.
The portable audio player or cellular phone battery will be depleted quickly when the
device is connected to Bluetooth
®
.
When using the Bluetooth
®
audio and hands-free system at the same time
The following problems may occur.
The Bluetooth
®
audio connection may be interrupted.
Noise may be heard during Bluetooth
®
audio playback.
About the contact in this system
The following data is stored for every registered cellular phone. When another phone is
connecting, you cannot read the registered data.
Contact data
Call history
Favorite
Message
When removing a Bluetooth
®
phone from the system, the above-mentioned data is also
deleted.
475
5-11. Bluetooth
®
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
About Bluetooth
®
Compatible models
The Bluetooth
®
audio system supports portable audio players with the following specifi-
cations
Bluetooth
®
specifications:
Ver. 2.0, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0 +EDR or higher)
Profiles:
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
This is a profile to transmit stereo audio or high quality sound to the audio system.
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher)
This is a profile to allow remote control the A/V equipment.
However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of por-
table audio player connected.
The hands-free system supports cellular phones with the following specifications.
Bluetooth
®
specification:
Ver. 2.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0 +EDR or higher)
Profiles:
HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.6 or higher)
This is a profile to allow hands-free phone calls using a cellular phone or head set. It
has outgoing and incoming call functions.
OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2)
This is a profile to transfer phonebook data. When a Bluetooth
®
compatible cellular
phone has both PBAP and OPP, OPP cannot be used.
PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.1)
This is a profile to transfer phonebook data.
MAP (Message Access Profile) Ver.1.0 or higher
This is a profile to using phone message.
If the cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot register it with the hands-free sys-
tem. OPP, PBAP or MAP services must be selected individually.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are regis-
tered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by DENSO TEN
LIMITED is under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
476
5-11. Bluetooth
®
IS300h_EE
Reconnecting the portable audio player
If the portable audio player is disconnected due to poor reception when the power
switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system automatically reconnects the porta-
ble audio player.
If you have switched off the portable audio player yourself, follow the instructions below
to reconnect:
Select the portable audio player again
Enter the portable audio player
When you sell your car
Be sure to delete your personal data. (P. 412)
477
5-11. Bluetooth
®
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Certification
478
5-11. Bluetooth
®
IS300h_EE
479
5-11. Bluetooth
®
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
480
5-11. Bluetooth
®
IS300h_EE
481
5-11. Bluetooth
®
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
482
5-11. Bluetooth
®
IS300h_EE
483
5-11. Bluetooth
®
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
484
5-11. Bluetooth
®
IS300h_EE
WARNING
While driving
Do not operate the portable audio player, cellular phone or connect a device to the
Bluetooth
®
system.
Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth
®
antennas. People with implantable cardiac
pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardio-
verter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and
the Bluetooth
®
antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.
Before using Bluetooth
®
devices, users of any electrical medical device other than
implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or
implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device
for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves
could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.
NOTICE
When leaving the vehicle
Do not leave your portable audio player or cellular phone in the vehicle. The inside of
the vehicle may become hot, causing damage to the portable audio player or cellular
phone.
485
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
5-12. Other function
Go to “Information”: “MENU” button “Info”
Display the “MirrorLink” screen.
(P. 486)
Display the “USB photo” screen.
(P. 490)
“Information” screen
Display “Information” screen
1
2
486
5-12. Other function
IS300h_EE
P. 406
MirrorLink™
The MirrorLink™ function enables operations of some smartphone content
via the Lexus Display Audio system.
Depending on differences between models or software version etc., some
models might be incompatible with this system.
Connect a smartphone to USB port using a USB cable.
For safety reasons, the safe driving screen is displayed while driving depend-
ing on the application.
Connecting a smartphone
487
5-12. Other function
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Go to “MirrorLink”: “MENU” button “Info” “MirrorLink
Select the desired application on the application list screen.
MirrorLink™ screen
Follow the specific operation procedures for the smartphone application.
Control area
Press the back button on the
Lexus Display Audio controller to
turn the control area display on/
off.
Return application list screen
If you select the other application,
the new application screen will
displayed.
Displays software buttons that function as the buttons on the smartphone.
Change the other audio source (Radio, Disc, etc.).
To display the left menu screen, turn the
controller to the left while the
MirrorLink™ screen is being displayed.
Select a device
Change the screen size
Adjust the display settings.
Selecting a MirrorLink™ device
If more than one MirrorLink™ device is available, select the desired device.
Select “Select MirrorLink™ device” on the left menu screen.
Select “MirrorLink™ 1” or “MirrorLink™ 2”.
Using MirrorLink™ function
1
2
1
2
Menu screen
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
488
5-12. Other function
IS300h_EE
Operational conditions
When MirrorLink
is activated, previous applications, run with a USB, are closed, and
vice versa.
Compatible devices
Smartphones, which passed the Car Connectivity Consortium certification program
ver1.1 or later. Confirm with the smartphone manufacture or the distributor for the
MirrorLink
compatibility.
Compatible applications
Applications, which are certified by Car Connectivity Consortium as MirrorLink
Base-Certified or Drive-Certified applications.
About MirrorLink™
MirrorLink is a registered trademark of Car Connectivity Consortium, Inc.
When using MirrorLink
Check that the smartphone screen is unlocked. Unlock the smartphone screen before
connecting it to the Lexus Display Audio system. (Some smartphones may not be able
to be connected via MirrorLink
if the screen is locked.)
Make sure that the smartphone has been connected via Bluetooth
®
. (Some
smartphones may not be able to perform hands-free calls using the MirrorLink
func-
tion if it has not been connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth
®
.)
If a MirrorLink
application cannot be started, check that the MirrorLink
applica-
tion certificate has not expired. The certificates of MirrorLink
applications have an
expiration date. (An internet connection is required to automatically update the certifi-
cate.) If a MirrorLink
application becomes unavailable, it may be due to the certifi-
cate expiring. In this case, the certificate must be updated manually. Check with the
smartphone manufacturer or application developer for how to update the certificate.
Make sure the volume of the smartphone is set to an appropriate level. If the
MirrorLink
application volume is excessively low even when the volume of the Lexus
Display Audio system is increased, check the volume of the smartphone and increase it
as necessary.
WARNING
While driving
Do not connect smartphone or operate the controls.
489
5-12. Other function
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the smartphone
Depending on the size and shape of the smartphone that is connected to the system,
the console box may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the console box
as this may damage the smartphone or the terminal, etc.
Do not leave your smartphone in the vehicle. The temperature inside may rise to a
level that could damage the smartphone.
Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the smartphone device while
it is connected.
Do not insert foreign objects into the port.
490
5-12. Other function
IS300h_EE
Go to “USB photo”: “MENU” button “Info” “USB 1 photo” or “USB 2
photo”
P. 406
Move the controller to the left to display the menu screen.
Change the full screen mode.
Select to set the slide show display
on/off.
Start the slide show at a selected folder.
Change the play speed.
Change the play mode.
Move the controller to the right and select “Browse”.
Select the desired folder, and then select a desired file to begin using the
selected folder.
USB photo
Connecting a USB memory device enables you to enjoy photo on the Lexus
Display Audio display.
USB photo screen
Connecting a USB memory device
Menu screen
1
2
3
4
Selecting a folder and a file
1
2
491
5-12. Other function
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
USB memory functions
P. 438
USB memory
Compatible devices
USB memory device that can be used for JPEG display.
Compatible device formats
The following device format can be used:
USB communication format: USB2.0 FS (480 Mbps)
File system format: FAT16/32 (Windows)
Correspondence class: Mass storage class
JPEG file compatibility
Compatible image size: Maximum 10MB
Compatible pixel size: Maximum 10,000,000 pixels
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the USB memory device or its terminals
P. 441
492
5-12. Other function
IS300h_EE
You can register desired contacts to enable the speech command system. Up to
50 contacts per phone can be registered.
Go to “Voice tags”: “MENU” button “Setup” “Telephone “Contact/
call history settings” “Voice tag” “New” or “Edit”
Select the desired contact.
Move the controller to the left and then select “REC”.
Say the registered voice tag.
To play the registered voice, select “Play”.
Deleting a voice tag
Display the “Voice tags” screen.
Select “Delete” and then the desired contact.
Move the controller to the left and then select “Delete”.
Press the talk switch.
To cancel the speech command system,
press and hold the talk switch.
After a beep sounds, say the desired
contact name.
When the icon is displayed, you can
speak a command.
If more than 1 contact name is dis-
played, select the desired contact
name.
If more than 1 phone number is displayed, select the desired phone number.
When the off-hook switch on the steering wheel is pressed, the system calls the first
phone number entry of the first contact.
Speech command system
Using the speech command system enables you to make a call to contacts
that have a voice tag.
Editing a voice tag
Using the speech command system
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
493
5-12. Other function
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS300h_EE
Microphone
P. 453
Speech commands may not be recognized if:
Spoken too quickly
Spoken at a low or high volume
Passengers are talking while speech commands are spoken
494
5-12. Other function
IS300h_EE
495
6
Interior features
IS300h_EE
6-1. Basic operation of the
Remote Touch screen
Remote Touch.............................496
10.3-inch display .......................500
6-2. Using the air
conditioning system
Automatic air
conditioning system .............. 502
Heated steering wheel/
seat heaters/
seat ventilators ..........................515
6-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list........................... 517
Interior lights...........................518
Personal lights........................518
6-4. Using the storage
features
List of storage features ........... 520
Glove box ................................521
Console box............................521
•Cup holders/
Bottle holders ........................522
Trunk features..............................524
6-5. Using the other
interior features
Other interior features............527
Sun visors................................527
Vanity mirrors ....................... 527
Clock ........................................528
Power outlet...........................529
Armrest....................................530
Rear sunshade ......................530
Assist grips .............................532
Coat hooks.............................532
496
IS300h_EE
6-1. Basic operation of the Remote Touch screen
“MAP” button
Press this button to display the vehicle’s current position.
” button
Vehicles with a navigation system
Press this button to scroll the list screen and to change the scale of the map.
Vehicles without a navigation system
Press this button to scroll the list screen.
Back button
Press to display the previous screen.
“MENU” button
Press this button to display the “Menu” screen. (P. 499)
Remote Touch
: If equipped
The Remote Touch can be used to operate the Remote Touch screens.
Owners of models equipped with a 10.3-inch display should refer to the
“NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.
1
2
3
4
497
6-1. Basic operation of the Remote Touch screen
6
Interior features
IS300h_EE
Remote Touch knob
Move in the desired direction to select a function, letter and screen button.
Press the knob to enter the selected function, letter or screen button.
“ENTER” button
Press to enter the selected function, letter or screen button.
“HOME” button
Press this button to display the home screen.
Select: Move the Remote Touch
knob in the desired direction.
Enter: Push the Remote Touch knob
or an “ENTER” button.
Remote Touch operation
5
6
7
1
2
498
6-1. Basic operation of the Remote Touch screen
IS300h_EE
Screen display during low temperatures
When the ambient temperature is extremely low, screen response may be delayed even
if the Remote Touch is operated.
WARNING
When using the Remote Touch
Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair to become caught in the Remote Touch as this
may cause an injury.
Be careful when selecting the Remote Touch in extreme temperatures as it may
become very hot or cold due to the temperature inside the vehicle.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the Remote Touch
Do not allow the Remote Touch to come into contact with food, liquid, stickers or lit
cigarettes as doing so may cause it to change color, emit a strange odor or stop func-
tioning.
Do not subject the Remote Touch to excessive pressure or strong impact as the knob
may bend or break off.
Do not allow coins, contact lenses or other such items to become caught in the
Remote Touch as this may cause it to stop functioning.
Items of clothing may rip if they become caught on the Remote Touch knob.
If your hand or any object is on the Remote Touch knob when the power switch is in
ACCESSORY mode, the Remote Touch knob may not operate properly.
499
6-1. Basic operation of the Remote Touch screen
6
Interior features
IS300h_EE
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the “Menu” screen.
When the split-screen display is selected, the “Menu” screen will be displayed on the
main display. (P. 500)
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
“Menu” screen
Switch Function
*
1
Select to display the map screen or the navigation menu screen.
*
2
Select to display the radio control screen.
*
2
Select to display the media control screen.
*
2
Select to display the hands-free operation screen.
*
2
Select to display the energy monitor or fuel consumption screen.
(P. 137, 139)
Select to display the “Information” screen.
*
2
Select to display the air conditioning control screen. (P. 502)
Select to display the “Setup” screen.
*
2
“Display” Select to adjust the contrast and brightness of the screens, turn the
screen off, etc.
*
2
500
6-1. Basic operation of the Remote Touch screen
IS300h_EE
Full screen display
The following functions can be displayed full screen:
•Initial screen
“Menu” screen (P. 499)
•Map screen
*
•Audio screen
*
Energy monitor or fuel consumption screen (P. 136)
Air conditioning control screen (P. 502)
*
: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.
Split-screen display
Different information can be displayed on the left and right of the screen. For
example, audio screen can be displayed and operated while the fuel con-
sumption information screen is being displayed. The large screen on the left of
the display is called the main display, and the small screen to the right is called
the side display.
10.3-inch display
: If equipped
10.3-inch display overview
501
6-1. Basic operation of the Remote Touch screen
6
Interior features
IS300h_EE
Selecting the operation screen
When selecting the main display, move the Remote Touch knob to the left.
When selecting the side display, move the Remote Touch knob to the right.
Main display
For details about the functions and operation of the main display, refer to the
respective section and “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Side display
Basic screens
To change the screen displayed on the side display, use the screen buttons on
the right side of the display.
Navigation system
*
Audio
*
Phone
*
Vehicle information (P. 143)
Air conditioning system
(P. 508)
Select to hide the side display. If
the item displayed on the main
display is full screen display com-
patible (P. 500), it will be dis-
played full screen.
Interruption screens
Each of the following screens is displayed automatically in accordance with
conditions.
Lexus parking assist-sensor (P. 342)
•Phone
*
•Driving mode (P. 381)
*
: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.
Split-screen display operation
1
2
3
4
5
6
502
IS300h_EE
6-2. Using the air conditioning system
Automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the tem-
perature setting.
Vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio system: Press the “MENU” button on the
Lexus Display Audio controller, then select “Climate” to display the air condi-
tioning operation screen.
For details on the Lexus Display Audio controller, refer to “Lexus Display
Audio controller” on P. 402.
Vehicles with a 10.3-inch display: Press the “MENU” button on the Remote
Touch, then select to display the air conditioning control screen. The air
conditioning system can be displayed and operated on the side display.
(P. 501)
The illustrations below are for left-hand drive vehicles.
The button positions and shapes will differ for right-hand drive vehicles.
Also, the display and button positions will differ depending on the type of the
system.
503
6-2. Using the air conditioning system
6
Interior features
IS300h_EE
With “DUAL” mode
Without “DUAL” mode
Air conditioning controls
504
6-2. Using the air conditioning system
IS300h_EE
Adjusting the temperature setting
To adjust the temperature setting,
touch and slide your finger up or
down on the sensor.
The temperature setting can also be
adjusted by touching on the sensor.
When the temperature setting is
changed, a buzzer sounds.
If is not pressed, the system
will blow ambient temperature air or
heated air.
Fan speed setting
Press to increase the fan speed.
Press to decrease the fan speed.
Change the airflow mode
To change the airflow, press .
The air outlets used are switched each time the button is pressed.
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and feet.
Air flows to the feet.
Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates
With a Lexus Display Audio
With a 10.3-inch display
1
2
3
4
505
6-2. Using the air conditioning system
6
Interior features
IS300h_EE
S-FLOW mode (if equipped)
When there are no passengers in the rear seats, airflow can be directed to the
front seats only to reduce the air conditioning effect on the rear seats.
However, depending on both the temperature inside and outside the vehicle, air-
flow may be directed to the rear seats even though S-FLOW mode is on to main-
tain comfort inside the vehicle.
Press .
The indicator comes on when S-FLOW mode is on.
Press again to resume airflow to the rear seats.
Other functions
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes (P. 510)
Defogging the windshield (P. 510)
Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors (P. 510)
506
6-2. Using the air conditioning system
IS300h_EE
With a Lexus Display Audio
Adjust the left-hand side temperature setting
Adjust the fan speed setting
Select to set auto mode on/off
Select to change the fan speed setting during the automatic mode operation.
(P. 511)
Select to set cooling and dehumidification function on/off
If the “A/C” indicator is turned off, the system will blow ambient temperature air or
heated air.
Adjust the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately (“DUAL”
mode) (P. 509)
Display the option control screen (P. 508)
Select the air flow mode
Adjust the right-hand side temperature setting
Adjust the temperature setting
Air conditioning control screen (if equipped)
(With “DUAL” mode) (Without “DUAL” mode)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
507
6-2. Using the air conditioning system
6
Interior features
IS300h_EE
With a 10.3-inch display
Adjust the left-hand side temperature setting
Adjust the fan speed setting
Select the air flow mode
Adjust the right-hand side temperature setting
Display the option control screen (P. 508)
Select to set automatic mode on/off
Select to set cooling and dehumidification function on/off
If the “A/C” indicator is turned off, the system will blow ambient temperature air or
heated air.
Adjust the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately (“DUAL”
mode) (P. 509)
Select to change the fan speed setting during the automatic mode operation.
(P. 511)
Adjust the temperature setting
(With “DUAL” mode) (Without “DUAL” mode)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
508
6-2. Using the air conditioning system
IS300h_EE
Option control screen
Select on the air conditioning control screen to display the option
control screen. The functions can be switched on and off.
Removing pollen from the air (Pollen removal mode) (P. 510)
Side display operation screen (Vehicles with a 10.3-inch display)
Select the air flow mode
Adjust the left-hand side temperature setting
Adjust the fan speed setting
Adjust the right-hand side temperature setting
Select to set auto mode on/off
Select to set cooling and dehumidification function on/off
If the “A/C” indicator is turned off, the system will blow ambient temperature air or
heated air.
Adjust the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately (“DUAL”
mode) (P. 509)
Adjust the temperature setting
With a Lexus Display Audio
With a 10.3-inch display
With “DUAL” mode
Without “DUAL” mode
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
509
6-2. Using the air conditioning system
6
Interior features
IS300h_EE
Press , or select “AUTO” on the air conditioning control screen.
Adjust the temperature setting.
To stop the operation, press .
Automatic mode indicator
If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode
indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that
operated is maintained.
Adjusting the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately
(“DUAL” mode) (if equipped)
To turn on the “DUAL” mode, perform any of the following procedures:
Press or select “DUAL” on the air conditioning control screen.
Select “DUAL” on the side display operation screen. (Vehicles with a 10.3-
inch display)
Adjust the passenger’s side temperature setting.
The indicator comes on when the “DUAL” mode is on.
While in “DUAL” mode, the temperature of the rear air outlets is set at the right-
hand side temperature setting.
Using automatic mode
1
2
3
510
6-2. Using the air conditioning system
IS300h_EE
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press to change to recirculated air mode.
Press to change to outside air mode.
The indicator above the selected button comes on.
Pollen removal mode (if equipped)
Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body.
Select
on the option control screen.
When the pollen removal mode is on, is displayed on the air conditioning
control screen.
In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the
dehumidification function may operate.
The pollens are filtered out even if the pollen removal mode is turned off.
Defogging the windshield
Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side windows.
Press .
Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the recirculated
air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and tempera-
ture up.
To return to the previous mode, press again when the windshield is
defogged.
Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew
and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
Press .
The defoggers will automatically turn off after a period of time.
Other functions
511
6-2. Using the air conditioning system
6
Interior features
IS300h_EE
Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and
wiper blades.
Turns on/off.
The indicator comes on when the
windshield wiper de-icer is on.
The windshield de-icer will automati-
cally turn off after a period of time.
Blower customization (if equipped)
Fan speed setting during the automatic mode operation can be customized.
To change the fan speed setting mode, select
“FAST/ECO”
on the air condi-
tioning control screen.
Each timeFAST/ECO is selected, the fan speed setting mode changes as fol-
lows.
“NORMAL “ECO” “FAST” “NORMAL
512
6-2. Using the air conditioning system
IS300h_EE
Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume
changes according to the selected
airflow mode.
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down
To close the vent, move the knob to the most outside position. (rear outlets)
Turn the knob to open or close the vent
Air outlets
Front
Rear
1
2
513
6-2. Using the air conditioning system
6
Interior features
IS300h_EE
Registering air conditioning settings to electronic keys (vehicles with driving position
memory)
Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic key and turning the power switch to ON
mode will recall that key’s registered air conditioning settings.
When the power switch is turned off, the current air conditioning settings will automati-
cally be registered to the electronic key that was used to unlock the vehicle.
The system may not operate correctly if more than one electronic key is in the vicinity or
if the smart entry & start system is used to unlock a passenger door.
The doors that can recall the air conditioning setting when unlocked using the smart
entry & start system can be changed.
*
For details, contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
*
: The doors that can recall the driving position memory are changed at the same time.
Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambi-
ent conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately
after is pressed or “AUTO” is selected.
Fogging up of the windows
The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning
(“A/C”) on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.
If you turn (“A/C”) off, the windows may fog up more easily.
The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
Outside/recirculated air mode
When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recircu-
lated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing out-
side air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the
recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.
Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the tempera-
ture setting or the inside temperature.
Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel
efficiency:
Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling capac-
ity
Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected
To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:
Adjust the fan speed
Turn off Eco drive mode
514
6-2. Using the air conditioning system
IS300h_EE
Ventilation and air conditioning odors
To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accu-
mulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the
vents.
To reduce potential odors from occurring:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior
to turning the vehicle off.
The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately
after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.
Air conditioning filter
P. 581
Customization
Settings (e.g. A/C Auto switch operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 702)
WARNING
To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The differ-
ence between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause
the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
To prevent burns
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror defog-
gers are on.
Do not touch the glass at lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars
when the windshield wiper de-icer is on.
NOTICE
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid sys-
tem is off.
Do not place anything on the instrument
panel which may cover the air outlets. Other-
wise, air flow may be obstructed, preventing
the windshield defoggers from defogging.
515
6-2. Using the air conditioning system
6
Interior features
IS300h_EE
Turn the heated steering wheel on/off
The indicator light comes on when the
heated steering wheel is operating.
The heated steering wheel can be used when the power switch is in ON mode.
The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after about 30 minutes.
Heated steering wheel
/seat heaters
/seat ventila-
tors
: If equipped
Heated steering wheel and seat heaters heat the side grips of the steering
wheel and seats, respectively. Seat ventilators maintain good airflow by blow-
ing air from the seats.
WARNING
Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories comes in
contact with the steering wheel and seats when the heater is on:
Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
Persons with sensitive skin
Persons who are fatigued
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold
remedies, etc.)
Observe the following precautions to prevent minor burns or overheating,
Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat heater.
Do not use seat heater more than necessary.
NOTICE
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, do not use the functions when the hybrid system
is off.
Heated steering wheel
516
6-2. Using the air conditioning system
IS300h_EE
Each time the switch is pressed, the
intensity of the seat heater changes and
the level indicator lights (amber) light
as follows:
Hi (3 segments lit) Mid (2 segments
lit) Lo (1 segment lit) Off
The seat heaters can be used when
The power switch is in ON mode.
Seat heater timer control
To enable seat heater timer control, press and hold the driver and front passenger seat
heater switches at the same time until a buzzer sounds once. If a seat heater is turned on
while seat heater timer control is enabled, the intensity of the seat heater will automati-
cally change from HiMidLo.
The timing of the change in seat heater intensity differs depending on the temperature
inside the cabin, etc. when the seat heater is operating.
To disable seat heater timer control, press and hold the driver and front passenger seat
heater switches at the same time until a buzzer sounds twice.
Each time the switch is pressed, the
intensity of the seat ventilator changes
and the level indicator lights (green)
light as follows:
Hi (3 segments lit) Mid (2 segments
lit) Lo (1 segment lit) Off
The seat ventilators can be used when
The power switch is in ON mode.
Air conditioning system-linked control mode
When a seat ventilator is set to Hi, the fan speed of the seat ventilator may increase
according to the fan speed of the air conditioning system.
Seat heaters
Type A Type B
Seat ventilators
517
IS300h_EE
6
Interior features
6-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Outer foot lights
Front interior light (P. 518)
Front personal lights (P. 518)
Inside door handle lights
Rear interior light (P. 518)
Rear personal lights (P. 518)
Power window switch lights
Door courtesy lights
Footwell lights
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
518
6-3. Using the interior lights
IS300h_EE
Turns the light on/off
Turns the door position on/off
Turns the light on/off
Interior lights
1
2
Personal lights
Front
Rear
519
6-3. Using the interior lights
6
Interior features
IS300h_EE
The interior lights and personal lights can be operated when
The interior lights and personal lights can be used regardless of the power switch mode.
However, when the power switch is turned off, they can be used only when the 12-volt
battery protection function is not operating.
12-volt battery protection function
To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged, approximately 20 minutes after
the power switch is turned off, the power supplied to the interior lights, personal lights,
and other lights will be cut off automatically. (If the interior lights, etc. are left on when the
power switch is turned off, they will be turned off automatically.)
To turn the interior lights, etc. back on, turn the power switch to ACCESSORY or ON
mode or operate the interior light switch until the interior lights turn on.
If any of the lights are illuminated automatically due to the illuminated entry system, the
12-volt battery protection function will be canceled.
Illuminated entry system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to power switch mode, the presence of the
electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are
opened/closed.
Customization
Setting (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 696)
NOTICE
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, do not leave the lights on longer than necessary
when the hybrid system is off.
520
IS300h_EE
6-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features
Glove box (P. 521)
Bottle holders (P. 522)
Cup holders (if equipped)
(P. 522)
Console box (P. 521)
WARNING
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause
the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other
stored items.
Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored
items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire
hazard.
When driving or when the storage compartments are not in use, keep the lids closed.
In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an
occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.
1
2
3
4
521
6-4. Using the storage features
6
Interior features
IS300h_EE
Open (press the button)
Unlock with the mechanical key
Lock with the mechanical key
The glove box light turns on when the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. (P. 161)
Push the knob.
Lift by hand to fully open the console
box.
Glove box
1
2
3
The insert inside the glove box can be
removed.
Console box
522
6-4. Using the storage features
IS300h_EE
Cup holders
Bottle holders
When storing a bottle, close the cap.
The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.
The rubber mats at the bottom of the front cup holders can be removed.
Cup holders/Bottle holders
Front (type A)
Front (type B)
Rear (if equipped)
To open, pull down the armrest and press the button and release the rear cup
holder on the armrest.
523
6-4. Using the storage features
6
Interior features
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders and bot-
tle in the bottle holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of
an accident or sudden braking, causing injury.
To prevent burns, cover hot drinks when placed in the cup holders.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the rear cup holder, stow the cup holder before stowing the arm-
rest.
524
6-4. Using the storage features
IS300h_EE
Raise the hooks when needed.
The cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
Loosen the belt
Tighten the belt
Trunk features
Cargo hooks
WARNING
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their stowed positions when not in use.
First-aid kit storage belt
1
2
525
6-4. Using the storage features
6
Interior features
IS300h_EE
Hold the hook and lift up the lug-
gage mat.
Secure the luggage mat using the
hook.
Lift up the luggage mat and secure it by
using the hook.
Luggage mat
1
2
NOTICE
When closing the trunk, do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the
trunk. The luggage mat may get damaged.
Luggage under tray
526
6-4. Using the storage features
IS300h_EE
Loosen the belt
Tighten the belt
Warning reflector storage belt
1
2
To prevent damage to the warning reflector stor-
age belt when it is not in use, fold the belt (as
shown in ) and secure it with the clip ( ).
WARNING
When stowing the warning reflector
Make sure that the warning reflector is stowed securely.
In the event of sudden braking, if the warning reflector is not securely stowed, it may
come loose, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
1
2
527
IS300h_EE
6
Interior features
6-5. Using the other interior features
To set the visor in the forward posi-
tion, flip it down.
To set the visor in the side position,
flip down, unhook, and swing it to the
side.
Slide the cover to open.
The light turns on when the cover is
opened.
Other interior features
Sun visors
1
2
Vanity mirrors
528
6-5. Using the other interior features
IS300h_EE
Vehicles without a navigation system
The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons.
Pressing and holding will move the
clock hands backward.
Pressing and holding will move the
clock hands forward.
Vehicles with a navigation system
The GPS clock's time is automatically
adjusted by utilizing GPS time informa-
tion.
For details, refer to “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.
Clock
1
2
529
6-5. Using the other interior features
6
Interior features
IS300h_EE
The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less than 10 A.
Open the lid.
The power outlet can be used when the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
Power outlet
On some models: To fully close the console
box with the cable routed to outside the con-
sole box, insert the cable into the holder.
NOTICE
To avoid the damaging the power outlet, close the power outlet lid when the power
outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a
short circuit.
To prevent blown fuse, do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, do not use the power outlet longer than neces-
sary when the hybrid system is off.
530
6-5. Using the other interior features
IS300h_EE
Fold down the armrest for use.
The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered.
Raise/lower
Armrest (if equipped)
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the armrest, do not apply too much load on the armrest.
Rear sunshade (if equipped)
531
6-5. Using the other interior features
6
Interior features
IS300h_EE
The rear sunshade can be used when the power switch is in ON mode.
The rear sunshade can be operated for approximately 1 minute even after the power
switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off.
Reverse operation feature: To ensure adequate rear visibility, the rear sunshade auto-
matically lowers when the shift lever is shifted to R.
However, the rear sunshade is raised again if any of the following occurs:
The button is pressed again.
*
The shift lever is shifted into P.
The shift lever is shifted out of R, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 km/h (9
mph).
If the hybrid system is off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to the reverse
operation feature, it will not be raised even when the hybrid system is turned on again
and the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 km/h (9 mph). To raise the sunshade again,
press the button.
*
: Occasionally, the reverse function may not be carried out after the switch has been
pressed. Repeat the above operation to operate the function.
WARNING
When the rear sunshade is being operated, do not place fingers or other objects in the
fastener section or in the opening. They may get caught, causing injury.
NOTICE
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, do not operate the rear sunshade when the
hybrid system is off.
Observe the following precautions to ensure normal operation of the rear sunshade.
Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components of the rear sun-
shade.
Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.
Do not attach items to the rear sunshade.
Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.
Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously for long periods of time.
532
6-5. Using the other interior features
IS300h_EE
An assist grip installed on the ceiling
can be used to support your body while
sitting on the seat.
The coat hooks are provided with the
rear assist grips.
Assist grips
WARNING
Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the assist grip, do not put a heavy load on the assist grip.
Coat hooks
WARNING
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS cur-
tain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death or seri-
ous injury.
533
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ................534
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior..................538
7-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements ............................. 541
7-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions................................543
Hood...............................................545
Positioning a floor jack ............546
Engine compartment ...............547
12-volt battery .............................554
Tires.................................................557
Replacing the tire.........................571
Tire inflation pressure .............. 577
Wheels...........................................579
Air conditioning filter ................581
Electronic key battery..............583
Checking and
replacing fuses.........................586
Light bulbs.....................................590
534
IS300h_EE
7-1. Maintenance and care
Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel
wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with
water.
Wipe away any water.
Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.
Self-restoring coat
The vehicle body has a self-restoring coating that is resistant to small surface scratches
caused in a car wash etc.
The coating lasts for 5 to 8 years from when the vehicle is delivered from the plant.
The restoration time differs depending on the depth of the scratch and outside tem-
perature.
The restoration time may become shorter when the coating is warmed by applying
warm water.
Deep scratches caused by keys, coins, etc. cannot be restored.
Do not use wax that contain abrasives.
Automatic car washes
Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle.
Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.
Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your
vehicle’s paint.
High pressure car washes
Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows.
Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed prop-
erly.
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condi-
tion:
535
7-1. Maintenance and care
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
When using a car wash (vehicles with entry function)
If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the
door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction proce-
dures to wash the vehicle:
Place the key in a position 2 m (6 ft.) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehi-
cle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart entry & start system.
(P. 167)
Aluminum wheels
Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent.
Wash detergent off with water immediately after use.
To protect the paint from damage, make sure to observe the following precautions.
Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive detergent
Do not use hard brushes
Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, such as after driving or park-
ing in hot weather
Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
Front side windows water-repellent coating
The following precautions can extend the effectiveness of the water-repellent coating.
Remove any dirt, etc. from the front side windows regularly.
Do not allow dirt and dust to accumulate on the windows for a long period.
Clean the windows with a soft, damp cloth as soon as possible.
Do not use wax or glass cleaners that contain abrasives when cleaning the windows.
Do not use any metallic objects to remove condensation build up.
When the water-repellent performance has become insufficient, the coating can be
repaired. Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
536
7-1. Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
WARNING
When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the
electrical components etc. to catch fire.
When cleaning the windshield (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is
touched by hand
When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor
If something bumps against the windshield
If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the raindrop
sensor
Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes
Exhaust gases cause the exhaust pipes to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes until they have cooled suf-
ficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes can cause burns.
Precaution regarding the rear bumper with Blind Spot Monitor (if equipped)
If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may malfunction. If
this occurs, consult any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
Set the wipers to the intermittent windshield
wipers. (P. 280)
If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may
operate unexpectedly in the following situa-
tions, and may result in hands being caught or
other serious injuries and cause damage to the
wiper blades.
537
7-1. Maintenance and care
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum
wheels etc.)
Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
After driving near the sea coast
After driving on salted roads
If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface
After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron pow-
der or chemical substances
If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low
humidity when storing the wheels.
Cleaning the exterior lights
Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
When using an automatic car wash (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
Set the wipers to the intermittent windshield wipers. (P. 280)
If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be dam-
aged.
When using a high pressure car wash
When washing the vehicle, do not spray the camera or its surrounding area directly
with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the
device to not operate normally.
Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured cover), con-
nectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact
with high-pressure water.
Traction related parts
Steering parts
•Suspension parts
Brake parts
538
7-1. Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth
dampened with lukewarm water.
If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral
detergent diluted to approximately 1%.
Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining
traces of detergent and water.
Remove dirt using a soft cloth or synthetic chamois dampened in a baking
soda (sodium bicarbonate) solution.
Use a solution of approximately 9% baking soda dissolved in water.
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture.
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted
detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remain-
ing traces of detergent.
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture.
Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to
approximately 1%.
Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining
traces of detergent and water.
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and keep it
in top condition:
Protecting the vehicle interior
Cleaning the areas with satin-finish metal accents
Cleaning the leather areas
Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
539
7-1. Maintenance and care
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain
the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to
apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let
them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts
periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
When cleaning the carpeted portions of the glove box, console box, etc.
If a strong adhesive tape is used, there is a possibility that the surface of the carpet could
be damaged.
WARNING
Water in the vehicle
Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor, in the hybrid battery
(traction battery) air vents, and in the trunk.
Doing so may cause the hybrid battery, electrical components, etc. to malfunction or
catch fire.
Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 44)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly,
resulting in death or serious injury.
Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the wind-
shield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
540
7-1. Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
Cleaning detergents
Do not use the following liquids, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause
streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
Audio system screen: Organic substances such as benzine or gasoline, alkaline
solutions, and alcohol
Seats: Alkaline solutions, organic substances such as thinner or benzine, and alco-
hol
Other parts: Organic substances such as benzine or gasoline, alkaline or acidic
solutions, dye, and bleach
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior part’s
painted surface may be damaged.
Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather
surfaces:
Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the
vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they
may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact
with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the
vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
When cleaning the inside of the windshield (vehicles with Lexus Safety System +)
Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens. (P. 291)
Cleaning the inside of the rear window
Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the
rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with luke-
warm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running
parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
541
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
7-2. Maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to
the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Lexus Service Book-
let” or “Lexus Warranty Booklet”.
What about do-it-yourself maintenance?
Many of the maintenance items are easy to do yourself if you have a little mechanical
ability and a few basic automotive tools.
Note, however, that some maintenance tasks require special tools and skills. These
are best performed by qualified technicians. Even if you’re an experienced do-it-your-
self mechanic, we recommend that repairs and maintenance be conducted by any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer. Any
authorized Lexus retailer or repairer will keep a record of maintenance, which could
be useful should you ever require Warranty Service. Should you choose to select a
qualified and equipped professional other than an authorized Lexus repairer to ser-
vice or maintain your vehicle, we recommend that you request that a record of main-
tenance be kept.
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular mainte-
nance are essential. Lexus recommends the following maintenance:
Scheduled maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance
542
7-2. Maintenance
IS300h_EE
Where to go for maintenance service?
In order to maintain your vehicle in the best possible condition, Lexus recommends that
maintenance service operations as well as other inspections and repairs be carried out
by authorized Lexus retailers or Lexus authorized repairers, or any reliable repairers. For
repairs and services covered by your warranty, please visit an authorized Lexus retailer
or repairer, who will use genuine Lexus parts in repairing any difficulties you may
encounter. There can also be advantages in utilizing authorized Lexus retailers or repair-
ers for non-warranty repairs and services, as members of the Lexus network will be able
to expertly assist you with any difficulties you may encounter.
Your authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer will
perform all of the scheduled maintenance on your vehicle reliably and economically due
to their experience with Lexus vehicles.
Does your vehicle need repairs?
Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and visual tip-offs that indicate
service is needed. Some important clues are:
Engine missing, stumbling or pinging
Appreciable loss of power
Strange engine noises
A fluid leak under the vehicle (However, water dripping from the air conditioning sys-
tem after use is normal.)
Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide leak. Drive
with the windows open and have the exhaust system checked immediately.)
Flat-looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering, uneven tire wear
Vehicle pulls to one side when driven straight on a level road
Strange noises related to suspension movement
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal, pedal almost touches the floor,
vehicle pulls to one side when braking
Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal (P. 113)
If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer as soon as possible. Your vehicle may
need adjustment or repair.
WARNING
If your vehicle is not properly maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible
death or serious injury.
Handling of the 12-volt battery
12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling.
(P. 554)
543
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct proce-
dure as given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
12-volt battery con-
dition (P. 554)
•Grease
Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
Engine/power con-
trol unit coolant level
(P. 551)
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality
ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite
and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid
technology
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50%
coolant and 50% deionized water.
Funnel (used only for adding coolant)
Engine oil level
(P. 548)
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
•Rag or paper towel
Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)
Fuses (P. 586) Fuse with same amperage rating as original
Light bulbs
(P. 590)
Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original
Phillips-head screwdriver Flathead screwdriver
•Wrench
Radiators and con-
denser (P. 553)
Tire inflation pres-
sure (P. 577) Tire pressure gauge Compressed air source
Washer fluid
(P. 553)
Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)
544
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
WARNING
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly,
become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe
the following precautions.
When working on the engine compartment
Make sure that the “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION ON” on the multi-information
display and the “READY” indicator are both off.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc.
right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine
compartment.
Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are flamma-
ble.
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted sur-
faces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean
water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, consult a doctor.
When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Be sure the power switch is off.
With the power switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to
run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P. 553)
Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in
your eyes.
NOTICE
If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt
in the air.
If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when
the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
545
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and
lift the hood.
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
1
2
WARNING
Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause
an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
546
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
Front
Rear
Positioning a floor jack
When using a floor jack, follow the instructions in the manual provided with
the jack and perform the operation safely.
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
547
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
12-volt battery
P. 554
Engine compartment
Power control unit coolant reser-
voir (P. 551)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 548)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 551)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 549)
Fuse box (P. 586)
Washer fluid tank (P. 553)
Electric cooling fans
Condenser (P. 553)
Power control unit coolant
radiator (P. 553)
Engine coolant radiator
(P. 553)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
548
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on
the dipstick.
Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning
off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into
the bottom of the engine.
Holding a rag under the end, pull
the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull
the dipstick out and check the oil
level.
Low
Normal
Excessive
The shape of the dipstick may dif-
fer depending on the type of vehi-
cle or engine.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Engine oil
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
6
549
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the
low level mark, add engine oil of the
same type as that already in the
engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding
oil.
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations,
oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil
maintenance intervals.
When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after
replacing the engine
If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, when towing, or when driving
while accelerating or decelerating frequently
When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through
heavy traffic
After changing the engine oil
The engine oil maintenance data should be reset. Perform the following procedures:
Select on the multi-information display. (P. 128)
Press the or meter control switch on the steering wheel to select “Vehicle
Settings” then “Oil Maintenance”. (To confirm setting, press .)
Select “Yes” and then press .
A message is displayed on the multi-information display.
Engine oil selection P. 686
Oil quantity (Low Full) 1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp. qt.)
Items Clean funnel
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
550
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Used engine oil
Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin dis-
orders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid pro-
longed and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of
used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or
disposal.
Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
When replacing the engine oil
Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
551
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Engine coolant reservoir
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on
the reservoir when the hybrid system is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the “LOW”
line, add coolant up to the “FULL”
line. (P. 674)
Power control unit coolant reservoir
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reser-
voir when the hybrid system is cold.
Reservoir cap
“F” line
“L” line
If the level is on or below the “L” line,
add coolant up to the “F” line.
(P. 674)
Coolant
1
2
3
1
2
3
552
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water.
(Minimum temperature: -35C [-31F])
For more details about coolant, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus autho-
rized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiators, hoses, engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps,
drain cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer, test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.
WARNING
When the hybrid system is hot
Do not remove the engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps or water filler cap.
(P. 674)
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and
antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cool-
ing. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.
553
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Check the radiators and condenser and clear away any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condi-
tion, have your vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the multi-
information display, the washer tank
may be empty. Add washer fluid.
Radiators and condenser
WARNING
When the hybrid system is hot
Do not touch the radiators or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries,
such as burns.
Washer fluid
WARNING
When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the hybrid system is hot or operating as washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as well as damaging
the pump leading to problems of the washer fluid not spraying.
Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.
554
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
The 12-volt battery is located on the
left-hand side of luggage compart-
ment.
Remove the 12-volt battery cover.
Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and that there are
no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
12-volt battery
Location
Removing the 12-volt battery cover
Exterior
1
2
555
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Before recharging
When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before recharging:
If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the
ground cable.
Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting
the charger cables to the 12-volt battery.
After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery
The hybrid system may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Open and close any of the doors.
Restart the hybrid system.
Unlocking the doors using the smart entry & start system may not be possible immedi-
ately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote
control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
Start the hybrid system with the power switch in ACCESSORY mode. The hybrid sys-
tem may not start with the power switch turned off. However, the hybrid system will
operate normally from the second attempt.
The power switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt battery is reconnected,
the vehicle will return the power switch mode to the status it was in before the 12-volt
battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the power switch before disconnecting
the 12-volt battery. Take extra care when connecting the 12-volt battery if the power
switch mode prior to the 12-volt battery being disconnected is unknown.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts at all the methods above, contact
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
1
2
3
556
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Chemicals in the 12-volt battery
The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious
injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the 12-volt battery:
Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools.
Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery.
Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery.
Keep children away from the 12-volt battery.
Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery
Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt battery in
a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
How to recharge the 12-volt battery
Only perform a slow charge (4 A — 5 A). The 12-volt battery may explode if charged at
a quicker rate.
Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical
attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to
the nearest medical facility.
If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention
immediately.
If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and fol-
low the procedure above if necessary.
If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immedi-
ately.
When replacing the 12-volt battery
Use a 12-volt battery designed for this vehicle. Failure to do so may cause gas (hydro-
gen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explosion.
For replacement of the 12-volt battery, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
NOTICE
When recharging the 12-volt battery
Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating. Also, be sure
all accessories are turned off.
557
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check the tires
for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread.
Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.
New tread
Worn tread
Treadwear indicator
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a “TWI” or “” mark, etc., molded
into the sidewall of each tire.
Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and tread-
wear.
Checking tires
1
2
3
558
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
Rotate the tires in the order shown.
To equalize tire wear and help extend tire life, Lexus recommends that tire rota-
tion is carried out approximately every 10000 km (6000 miles).
Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation.
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pres-
sure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before
serious problems arise.
If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by a
warning light. (P. 614)
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID
codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire
pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter ID codes registered by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer. (P. 559)
Tire rotation
Vehicles with front and rear tires of
the same size
Vehicles with front and rear tires of
differing sizes
Front
Front
Tire pressure warning system
559
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circum-
stances:
When rotating the tires.
When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing
traveling speed or load weight.
When changing the tire size.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation
pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the power switch off.
Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure
level. (P. 691)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure
level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.
Turn the power switch to ON mode.
Press and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times.
Wait for a few minutes with the power switch in ON mode and then turn
the power switch off.
Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID
code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is nec-
essary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
1
2
3
4
5
560
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and
bulges indicating internal damage
A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of
a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer.
Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire
pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 10 minutes, the
tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunc-
tion.
Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom
or never been used or damage is not obvious.
Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks.
Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.
Low profile tires (except 16-inch tires)
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be
reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use
snow tires or tire chains
*
on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appro-
priate for road and weather conditions.
*
: Tire chains cannot be mounted on the 18-inch tires. Snow tires should be used instead.
If the tread on snow tires wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
561
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly
In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.
A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.
A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.
Tire chains etc. are equipped.
An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped.
If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel
housings.
If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified level.
If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.
If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered
in the tire pressure warning computer.
Performance may be affected in the following situations.
Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, air-
port or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless
communication device
When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off could be
extended.
When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has burst, the
warning may not function.
The initialization operation
Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire inflation pres-
sure adjustment.
If you have accidentally turned the power switch off during initialization, it is not neces-
sary to press the reset switch again as initialization will restart automatically when the
power switch has been turned to ON mode for the next time.
If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary, adjust the
tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold, and conduct initial-
ization again.
Warning performance of the tire pressure warning system
The warning of the tire pressure warning system will change in accordance with the con-
ditions under which it was initialized. For this reason, the system may give a warning even
if the tire pressure does not reach a low enough level, or if the pressure is higher than the
pressure that was adjusted to when the system was initialized.
562
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the set-
tings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated
attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light
does not blink 3 times.
After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1
minute then stays on after driving for 20 minutes.
Registering ID codes
The ID codes of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters for two sets of wheels
can be registered.
It is not necessary to register the ID codes when replacing normal tires with snow tires, if
the ID codes for the wheels of both normal tires and snow tires are registered before-
hand.
For information about changing ID codes, ask any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
563
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Certification for tire pressure warning system
564
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
565
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
566
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
567
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
568
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
569
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
WARNING
When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drivetrain as well as dangerous han-
dling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
Vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit: Do not tow anything if a tire that
has been repaired using the emergency tire puncture repair kit is installed. The load
on the tire may cause unexpected damage to the tire.
When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may
not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire
inflation pressure is actually normal.
570
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and
tire valve caps
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be dam-
aged if not handled correctly.
Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water
could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning valves
could be bound.
When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified.
The cap may become stuck.
To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and trans-
mitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer or other qualified
service shop as soon as possible. After use of liquid sealant, make sure to replace the
tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when repairing or replacing the tire.
(P. 558)
Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning
ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires
themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
Low profile tires (except 16-inch tires)
Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when sustain-
ing impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention to the following:
Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be
damaged more severely.
Avoid potholes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so
may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
571
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Stop the hybrid system.
Replacing the tire (vehicles with a jack)
When raising your vehicle with a jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
Before jacking up the vehicle
Location of the jack and tools
Jack
Jack handle
Screwdriver
Towing eyelet
Wheel nut wrench
1
2
3
4
5
572
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
Remove the 12-volt battery cover. (P. 554)
Take out the jack.
For tightening
For loosening
If the jack is too tightly installed to be
removed by hand, insert a tool, such
as the screwdriver included with the
vehicle, into the hole of the jack (por-
tion “A”) and loosen the jack.
WARNING
Using the tire jack
Observe the following precautions.
Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading
to death or serious injury.
Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and
removing tire chains.
Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on
this vehicle.
Put the jack properly in its jack point.
Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.
Do not start the hybrid system or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by
the jack.
Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there
are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.
Taking out the jack
1
2
1
2
573
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Chock the tires.
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by hand
until the notch of the jack is in con-
tact with the jack point.
The jack point guides are located under
the rocker panel. They indicate the jack
point positions.
Replacing a tire
1
Tire Wheel chock positions
Front Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire
Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Rear Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire
Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire
2
3
574
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
When resting the tire on the ground,
place the tire so that the wheel design
faces up to avoid scratching the wheel
surface.
4
5
WARNING
Replacing a tire
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 103 N•m (10.5 kgf•m, 76
ft•lbf) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheel may
fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the
vehicle is moving.
575
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel contact
surface, the wheel nuts may loosen
while the vehicle is in motion, causing
the tire to come off.
Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approxi-
mately the same amount.
Turn the wheel nuts until the washers
come into contact with the disc
wheel.
Lower the vehicle.
Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or
three times in the order shown in the
illustration.
Tightening torque:
103 N•m (10.5 kgf•m, 76 ft•lbf)
Stow the jack and all tools.
Installing the tire
1
2
Disc wheel
Washer
3
4
5
576
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
Certification for the jack
577
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
Reduced fuel economy
Reduced driving comfort and poor handling
Reduced tire life due to wear
Reduced safety
Damage to the drivetrain
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than
1.5 km or 1 mile, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
Always use a tire pressure gauge.
It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance.
It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated
in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
Tire inflation pressure
Make sure to maintain proper tire inflation pressure. Tire inflation pressure
should be checked at least once per month. However, Lexus recommends
that tire inflation pressure be checked once every two weeks. (P. 691)
578
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated.
If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could
lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
Poor handling
Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
Air leaking from between tire and wheel
Wheel deformation and/or tire damage
Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards, expansion
joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)
NOTICE
When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air
leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.
579
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent
to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset
*
.
Replacement wheels are available at any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
*
: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Lexus does not recommend using the following:
Wheels of different sizes or types
Used wheels
Bent wheels that have been straightened
Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your alumi-
num wheels.
When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are
still tight after driving 1600 km (1000 miles).
Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.
Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber
hammer when balancing your wheels.
When replacing wheels
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event
of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 558)
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Other-
wise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.
Wheel selection
Aluminum wheel precautions
580
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
WARNING
When replacing wheels
Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s
Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing
so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
NOTICE
Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer or other qualified service shop. In
addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genu-
ine wheels.
581
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Turn the power switch off.
Open the glove box. Lift up the side
with the stay, disconnect the stay
tabs and remove the partition by
pulling horizontally.
Press the tabs and remove the filter
cover.
Press the tabs and remove the filter
case.
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air condi-
tioning efficiency.
Removal method
1
2
3
4
582
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
Remove the air conditioning filter
from the filter case and replace it
with a new one.
The “UP” marks shown on the filter
and the filter case should be pointing up.
Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In
dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For
scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Lexus Service Booklet” or
“Lexus Warranty Booklet”.)
If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
Air conditioning filter with deodorizing function
When fragrances are placed in your vehicle, the deodorizing effect may become signifi-
cantly weakened in a short period.
When an air conditioning odor comes out continuously, replace the air conditioning filter.
5
NOTICE
When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.
583
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Flathead screwdriver
Small flathead screwdriver
Lithium battery CR2032
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key, wrap the
tip of the screwdriver with tape.
Remove the battery cover.
To prevent damage to the key, wrap the
tip of the screwdriver with tape.
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
You will need the following items:
Replacing the battery
1
2
3
584
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+” termi-
nal facing up.
Use a CR2032 lithium battery
Batteries can be purchased at any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
When the card key battery needs to be replaced (if equipped)
The battery for the card key is available only at your Lexus dealer. Your Lexus dealer can
replace the battery for you.
If the electronic key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
The smart entry & start system and wireless remote control will not function properly.
The operational range will be reduced.
Certification for the key battery
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
4
585
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Removed battery and other parts
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Keep away
from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.
Lithium battery precautions
CAUTION:
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS
NOTICE
For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
586
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
Turn the power switch off.
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment:
Remove the clips.
Push the tabs on either side to
detach the lock and lift the lid off
while pulling the lock plate.
When installing the lid, check that the
lock plate and the tabs on either side
are connected correctly.
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If
this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
1
2
587
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Remove the fuse with the pullout
tool.
Only type A fuses can be removed
using the pullout tool.
Left side instrument panel (left-hand
drive vehicles)
Left side instrument panel (right-
hand drive vehicles)
Remove the lid. Remove the lid.
3
588
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
Check if the fuse is blown.
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Type A and B:
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
Type C and D:
Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
4
1
2
Type A
Type B
Type C
Type D
589
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
After a fuse is replaced
If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need
replacement. (P. 590)
If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
When replacing light bulbs
Lexus recommends that you use genuine Lexus products designed for this vehicle.
Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent overload, non-gen-
uine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unusable.
WARNING
To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.
Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other
object in place of a fuse.
Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.
Fuse box near the power control unit
Never check or replace the fuses as there are high voltage parts and wiring near the
fuse box.
Doing so may cause electric shock, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer as soon as possible.
590
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P. 693)
Front
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of replace-
ment varies depending on the bulb. As there is a danger that components may
be damaged, we recommend that replacement is carried out by any autho-
rized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Preparing for light bulb replacement
Bulb locations
Front turn signal light (bulb type)
Outer foot light
1
2
591
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Rear
Rear turn signal light
1
592
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
Front turn signal lights (bulb type)
For the left side only: Pinch the
clip to remove the washer fluid
filler opening.
Turn the bulb base
counterclockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
Install a new light bulb then install
the bulb base to the light unit by
inserting it and turning the bulb
base clockwise.
After installing the light bulb, turn on
the front turn signal light to visually
check that there is no light leaking
from the bulb base.
After replacing the left side bulb, install the washer fluid filler opening to its
original position.
Replacing light bulbs
1
2
3
4
5
593
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Rear turn signal lights
Open the trunk, and remove the
cover.
Remove the 2 screws.
Push and pull the light unit toward
the rear of the vehicle as shown in
the illustration to remove it.
Apply protective tape to the periph-
eral of the light unit installation sur-
face on the vehicle body, such as the
rear bumper, to protect the vehicle
from damage.
Pushing on the portion A in the illus-
tration toward the rear of the vehicle
will make disengagement of the tabs
easier.
Turn the bulb base
counterclockwise.
1
2
3
4
594
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
Remove the light bulb.
Install a new light bulb then install
the bulb base to the light unit by
inserting it and turning the bulb
base clockwise.
After installing the light bulb, turn on
the rear turn signal light to visually
check that there is no light leaking
from the bulb base.
Align the tabs and push the light
unit toward the front of the vehicle
to install it.
Remove the protective tape applied
to the peripheral of the light unit
installation surface on the vehicle
body.
Install the 2 screws and cover.
5
6
7
8
595
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Outer foot lights
Press the upper part of the out-
side rear view mirror to tilt the
mirror face upward, and apply
protective tape to the lower part
of the mirror cover.
Insert 2 flathead screwdrivers
wrapped in protective tape, and
disconnect the tabs behind the
mirror.
Pry the mirror out toward you, dis-
connecting the tabs 2 at a time.
Work carefully, ensuring that you do
not drop the mirror.
Disconnect the connectors
behind the mirror, and remove
the mirror.
When removing the thin connectors,
make sure to mark one of the con-
nectors with a piece of tape, to avoid
mixing them up when reinstalling.
Work carefully, ensuring that you do
not drop the mirror.
When handling the mirror, do not touch the parts applied with grease.
The number of connectors equipped differs by vehicle specification.
Remove the 5 screws and take off
the mirror’s outer cover and the
cover behind the mirror.
1
2
3
4
596
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
Turn the bulb base
counterclockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
Install a new light bulb then install
the bulb base to the light unit by
inserting it and turning the bulb
base clockwise.
When inserting the socket, align the
marks printed on the light body and
the socket.
5
6
7
597
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Install the visor cover on the mir-
ror frame, secure it with a screw,
and install the side turn signal light
and outer foot light.
Use only the screw position shown in
the illustration.
Align the tabs on the side turn signal
light unit and the cover and install it.
Interlock the groove of the outer foot
light unit with the tabs on the cover
and secure it.
After installing the outer foot light
unit, turn on the outer foot light to
visually check that there is no light
leaking from the bulb base.
Disconnect the tabs, and sepa-
rate the top and bottom of the
outer cover of the mirror.
8
9
598
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
Install the outer cover of the mir-
ror by installing the lower side
first, then installing the upper side.
When installing the lower side of the
cover, insert the side turn signal light
pin into the hole in the cover.
Secure the cover with screws and
reconnect the connectors back
together.
Secure the wire harness by reinstall-
ing it to the hooks on the back side of
the mirror surface as it was.
Align the tabs, and secure the
mirror by pushing in each diago-
nally-opposite pair of tabs in
order.
Make sure to insert the tabs in order
as shown in the illustration, and push
them in until a click is heard.
If you do not hear the click, do not
force the tabs in. Instead, remove the
mirror and check that the tabs are
aligned.
After securing the mirror, remove the
protective tape applied to the lower
part of the mirror cover.
10
11
12
599
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
IS300h_EE
Replacing the following bulbs
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by any autho-
rized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Headlights
Front position lights and daytime running lights
Front turn signal lights (LED type)
Side turn signal lights
Stop/tail lights
Tail lights
Back-up light
Rear fog light
High mounted stoplight
License plate lights
LED Lights
The lights other than the front turn signal lights (bulb type), rear turn signal lights and
outer foot lights each consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your
vehicle to any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer to have the light replaced.
Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a
malfunction. Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer for more information in the following situations:
Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
Water has built up inside the headlight.
When replacing the front turn signal lights (bulb type)
When the washer fluid filler opening is removed with a large amount of washer fluid con-
tained in the washer tank, washer fluid may spill onto the vehicle and cleaning may be
required.
When replacing light bulbs
P. 589
600
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Replacing light bulbs
Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the
lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is unavoid-
able to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth to avoid getting
moisture and oils on the bulb.
Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may result
in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the head-
lights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.
NOTICE
When replacing the outer foot lights
If the front window is stopping you from conducting the replace operation properly,
open the window on the side you are working on to allow you enough space to work.
Continuing the operation without giving yourself enough space to work could lead you
to scratch the vehicle.
601
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ..................602
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency................................ 603
If the vehicle is trapped in
rising water ................................604
8-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed................................605
If you think something
is wrong........................................610
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds.............................................611
If a warning message
is displayed .................................618
If you have a flat tire
(vehicles with emergency
tire puncture repair kit)........648
If you have a flat tire
(vehicles with
run-flat tires)..............................663
If the hybrid system
will not start................................664
If the electronic key does
not operate properly.............666
If the 12-volt battery
is discharged.............................669
If your vehicle overheats......... 674
If the vehicle
becomes stuck.........................679
602
IS300h_EE
8-1. Essential information
Press the switch.
All the turn signals will flash.
To turn them off, press the switch once
again.
Emergency flashers
If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the hybrid system is not operat-
ing (while the “READY” indicator is not illuminated), the 12-volt battery may discharge.
Emergency flashers
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has
to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.
603
8-1. Essential information
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to
slow the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Stop the hybrid system.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as
much as possible.
To stop the hybrid system, press and
hold the power switch for 2 consec-
utive seconds or more, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in succes-
sion.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in
the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
1
2
3
4
3
Press and hold for 2 seconds or more
or press briefly 3 times or more
4
WARNING
If the hybrid system has to be turned off while driving
Power assist for the steering wheel will be lost, making the steering wheel heavier to
turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the hybrid system.
5
604
8-1. Essential information
IS300h_EE
Remove the seat belt first.
If the door can be opened, open the door and exit the vehicle.
If the door can not be opened, open the window using the power window
switch and exit the vehicle through the window.
If the window can not be opened using the power window switch, remain
calm, wait until the water level inside the vehicle rises to the point that the
water pressure inside of the vehicle equals the water pressure outside of the
vehicle, and then open the door and exit the vehicle.
If the vehicle is trapped in rising water
In the event the vehicle is submerged in water, remain calm and perform the
following.
WARNING
Using an emergency hammer
*
for emergency escape
The front side windows and rear side windows, as well as the rear window can be shat-
tered with an emergency hammer
*
used for emergency escape. However, an emer-
gency hammer can not shatter the windshield as it is laminated glass.
*
: Contact your Lexus dealer or aftermarket accessory manufacturer for further infor-
mation about an emergency hammer.
Escaping the vehicle from the window
There are cases where escaping the vehicle from the window is not possible due to
seating position, passenger body type, etc.
When using an emergency hammer, consider your seat location and the size of the
window opening to ensure that the opening is accessible and large enough to escape.
605
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer or
commercial towing service before towing.
A warning message for the hybrid system is shown on the multi-information
display and the vehicle does not move.
The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Do not tow with a sling-type truck to
prevent body damage.
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer or commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or flatbed
truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and
local laws.
Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing
Towing with a sling-type truck
606
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
If your vehicle is transported by a flat-
bed truck, it should be tied down at the
locations shown in the illustration.
If you use chains or cables to tie down
your vehicle, the angles shaded in black
must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs or
the vehicle may be damaged.
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
From the front
From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
Use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.
Using a flatbed truck
607
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily
towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency towing eyelets. This
should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for short distances at under 30
km/h (18 mph).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s
wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
Take out the towing eyelet. (P. 571)
Remove the eyelet cover using a
flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a rag
between the screwdriver and the vehi-
cle body as shown in the illustration.
Insert the towing eyelet into the hole
and tighten partially by hand.
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut wrench
or hard metal bar.
Emergency towing
Emergency towing procedure
1
2
3
4
608
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Securely attach cables or chains to the towing eyelet.
Take care not to damage the vehicle body.
Enter the vehicle being towed and start the hybrid system.
If the hybrid system does not start, turn the power switch to ON mode.
Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake.
When the shift lever cannot be shifted: P. 263
While towing
If the hybrid system is off, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function,
making steering and braking more difficult.
Wheel nut wrench
Wheel nut wrench is installed in the trunk. (P. 571)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
When towing the vehicle
While towing
When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place excessive
stress on the towing eyelets, cables or chains. The towing eyelets, cables or chains
may become damaged, broken debris may hit people, and cause serious damage.
Do not turn the power switch off.
There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be operated.
Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing.
5
6
7
Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four
wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is
towed with the tires contacting the ground, the
drivetrain and related parts may be damaged,
an accident may occur due to a change in
direction of the vehicle or electricity generated
by the operation of the motor may cause a fire
to occur depending on the nature of the dam-
age or malfunction.
609
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the power switch is off. The steering lock
mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.
When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the oppo-
site end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be dam-
aged while being towed.
To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing
Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.
610
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than nor-
mal.
Changes in exhaust sound
Excessive tire squeal when cornering
Strange noises related to the suspension system
Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system
Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
Appreciable loss of power
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus autho-
rized repairer, or any reliable repairer as soon as possible.
Visible symptoms
Audible symptoms
Operational symptoms
611
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer
sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or
flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessar-
ily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur,
have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus autho-
rized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Warning light and warning buzzer list
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
Brake system warning light
Indicates that:
The brake fluid level is low; or
The brake system is malfunctioning
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dan-
gerous.
Brake system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
The regenerative braking system; or
The electronically controlled brake system
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
(If equipped)
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
The hybrid system;
The emission control system (on some models);
The electronic engine control system; or
The electronic throttle control system
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
612
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
The SRS airbag system; or
The seat belt pretensioner system
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
•The ABS; or
The brake assist system
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
Parking brake warning light (warning buzzer)
*
1
Indicates that the parking brake is engaged
Release the parking brake.
Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) sys-
tem
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
(If equipped)
LDA (Lane Departure Alert) indicator
If the LDA indicator is illuminated:
Indicates a malfunction in the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with
steering control) system.
Check the warning message displayed on the multi-information
display. (P. 618)
If the LDA indicator flashes:
Indicates that the vehicle has deviated from the lane (while the
LDA [Lane Departure Alert with steering control] system is oper-
ating)
Check the area around the vehicle and return the vehicle to
between the lane lines.
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
613
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
(Flashes or illuminates)
(If equipped)
PCS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or that
the system is temporarily unavailable due to the vehicle being
extremely hot/cold, or dirt around a front sensor, etc.
(P. 311, 630)
Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information dis-
play. (P. 311, 630)
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability Con-
trol) system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illuminate.
P. 311
Slip indicator
Indicates a malfunction in:
The VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system;
The TRC (Traction Control) system; or
The hill-start assist control system
The light will flash when the VSC, the TRC or the ABS system is
operating.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
Open door warning light (warning buzzer)
*
2
Indicates that a door or the trunk is not fully closed
Check that all the doors and the trunk are closed.
Low fuel level warning light
Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 10 L (2.6 gal., 2.2 Imp.
gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
614
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
*
1
: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
P. 624
*
2
: Open door warning buzzer:
P. 621
*
3
: Seat belt warning buzzer:
The seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver, front passenger and rear pas-
sengers that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds for 30 seconds
after the vehicle reaches a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph). Then, if the seat belt is still
unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 90 more seconds.
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warning
buzzer)
*
3
Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts
Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front passenger’s
seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light
(warning buzzer) turn off.
Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights (warning buzzer)
*
3
Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts
Fasten the seat belt.
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to
indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunc-
tion.
P. 618
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure such as
Natural causes (P. 615)
Flat tire (P. 648, 663)
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level.
The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case the light does
not turn off even if the tire inflation pressure is adjusted, have the
system checked by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system
Have the system checked by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
615
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer
If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor
may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passen-
ger is not sitting in the seat.
If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warn-
ing light may not operate properly.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
For some models, the malfunction indicator lamp will come on if the fuel tank becomes
completely empty. If the fuel tank is empty, refuel the vehicle immediately. The malfunc-
tion indicator lamp will go off after several trips.
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer as soon as possible.
Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops,
the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer
may sound.
When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Carry out the following procedure after the tire temperature has lowered sufficiently.
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.
If the warning light does not go out even after several minutes, check that the tire infla-
tion pressure is at the specified level and carry out initialization.
The warning light may come on again if the above operations are conducted without first
allowing the tire temperature to lower sufficiently.
The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air
leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting
the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly
P. 561
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when the
power switch is turned to ON mode, have it checked by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location or audio
sound.
616
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
WARNING
If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer. The vehicle will become
extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS system may fail, which could cause an
accident resulting in death or serious injury.
When the electric power steering system warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
When steering wheel operations are heavier than usual, grip the steering wheel firmly
and operate it using more force than usual.
If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of
vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
Vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit
Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure
immediately.
If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust-
ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, repair the
flat tire by using emergency tire puncture repair kit.
Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose
control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
Vehicles with run-flat tires
Decelerate to the lowest appropriate speed as soon as possible. Do not drive over 60
km/h (37 mph).
Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.
If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust-
ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Have the tire replaced by the nearest
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose
control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
617
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly
Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning
system may not operate properly.
618
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Master warning light
The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message
is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.
Multi-information display
If any of the warning lights come on again after the following actions have been
performed, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
If a warning message is displayed
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform
the following actions:
Except F SPORT models
F SPORT models (when the main
meter is in the center position)
F SPORT models (when the main
meter is in the right-side position)
1
2
619
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Warning message and warning buzzer list
Warning message Details/Actions
(If equipped)
Indicates that there is a high possibility of a frontal colli-
sion, or that the pre-collision braking function is operat-
ing
A buzzer also sounds.
Avoid the collision by decelerating using the brakes
or taking other evasive actions.
Indicates that the hybrid system was stopped with the
shift lever not in P
A buzzer also sounds.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Indicates that the hybrid system was stopped while driv-
ing
A buzzer also sounds.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place such as the shoulder
of a road.
(If equipped)
Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle ahead
(in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
A buzzer also sounds.
Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
620
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
(If equipped)
Indicates that the vehicle has deviated from the lane
(while the LDA [Lane Departure Alert with steering con-
trol] system is operating)
The lane line on the side the vehicle has deviated from
flashes in amber.
A buzzer also sounds.
Check around the vehicle and back to inside of the
lane lines.
Indicates that:
The brake fluid level is low; or
The brake system is malfunctioning
A buzzer also sounds.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and
contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer. Con-
tinuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
Indicates a malfunction in the hybrid system
A buzzer also sounds.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and
contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
621
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed
The system also indicates which doors are not fully
closed.
If the vehicle reaches a speed of 5 km/h (3 mph),
flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that
the door(s) are not yet fully closed.
Make sure that all the doors are closed.
Indicates that the hood is not fully closed
If the vehicle reaches a speed of 5 km/h (3 mph),
flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that
the hood is not yet fully closed.
Close the hood.
Indicates that the trunk is not fully closed
If the vehicle reaches a speed of 5 km/h (3 mph),
flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that
the trunk is not yet fully closed.
Close the trunk.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the Lexus parking assists-sen-
sor
The assist-sensors flash.
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Warning message Details/Actions
622
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
(If equipped)
Indicates that a Lexus parking assist-sensor is dirty or
covered with ice
A buzzer also sounds.
Clean the sensor.
Indicates that the accelerator pedal is depressed while
the shift position is in N
A buzzer also sounds.
Release the accelerator pedal and shift the shift
lever to D, S or R.
Indicates that the accelerator pedal is depressed to stop
the vehicle on an upward slope, etc.
A buzzer also sounds.
Release the accelerator pedal and depress the
brake pedal.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
623
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Indicates that the hybrid battery (traction battery) power
has dropped because a long period of time has elapsed
after shifting the shift lever to N
A buzzer also sounds.
When operating the vehicle, shift to P and restart
the hybrid system.
Indicates a malfunction in the hybrid system
A buzzer also sounds.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and
contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Indicates that the hybrid battery (traction battery) is low
A buzzer also sounds.
As the hybrid battery (traction battery) can not be
charged when the shift lever is in N, shift the shift
lever to P when the vehicle is stopped.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
624
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steer-
ing) system
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Indicates that the vehicle is being driven at 5 km/h (3
mph) or more with the parking brake still engaged
A buzzer also sounds.
Release the parking brake.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
625
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Indicates that the shift position was changed and Drive-
Start Control was operated while depressing the accel-
erator pedal
A buzzer also sounds.
Momentarily release the accelerator pedal.
(If equipped)
Indicates that the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steer-
ing control) system has determined that the driver does
not have the hands on the steering wheel while the steer-
ing control function is on
If the driver operates the steering wheel only a small
amount, the system may be unable to detect the steer-
ing wheel operations and this warning may be dis-
played.
A buzzer also sounds. (For Israel)
Firmly hold the steering wheel.
(If equipped)
Except for Israel: Indicates that steering control function
is temporarily canceled due to the LDA (Lane Departure
Alert with steering control) system determining that the
driver does not have the hands on the steering wheel
while the steering control function is on
If the driver operates the steering wheel only a small
amount, the system may be unable to detect the steer-
ing wheel operations and this warning may be dis-
played.
Firmly hold the steering wheel.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
626
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Indicates an engine malfunction
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Indicates an engine malfunction
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Indicates an engine malfunction
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Indicates a malfunction in:
The SRS airbag system; or
The seat belt pretensioner system
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Warning message Details/Actions
627
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Indicates a malfunction in:
•The ABS; or
The brake assist system
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is too high
A buzzer also sounds.
P. 674
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and
contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer. Con-
tinuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
Warning message Details/Actions
(F SPORT
models)
628
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
(If equipped)
Indicates that the radar sensor is dirty or covered with
ice
A buzzer also sounds.
Clean the sensor.
(If equipped)
Indicates that the dynamic radar cruise control system
cannot be used temporarily due to bad weather
A buzzer also sounds.
Use the dynamic radar cruise control system when
it becomes available again.
(If equipped)
Indicates that:
The grille shutter system cannot operate; or
The grille shutter is dirty or covered with ice
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Indicates a malfunction in the smart entry & start system
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Warning message Details/Actions
629
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
(If equipped)
Indicates that a Blind Spot Monitor sensor or the sur-
rounding area on the bumper is dirty or covered with ice
A buzzer also sounds.
Clean off the dirt, snow, ice, etc. and drive the vehi-
cle with the operation conditions of the BSM func-
tion (P. 374) satisfied for approximately 10
minutes. If the warning message does not disappear,
the sensor may be misaligned. Have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system (if
equipped) or dynamic radar cruise control system (if
equipped)
Press the “ON/OFF” button once to deactivate the
system, and then press the button again to reactivate
the system.
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the LDA (Lane Departure
Alert with steering control) system
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Warning message Details/Actions
630
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
(If equipped)
The operation conditions of the camera sensor are not
met.
The following systems may be suspended until the
problem shown in the message is resolved.
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)
Dynamic radar cruise control
Automatic High Beam
RSA (Road Sign Assist)
P. 311
(If equipped)
Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable due
to a malfunction in a sensor other than the camera sen-
sor
A buzzer also sounds.
Turn the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering
control) system off, wait for a little while, and then
turn the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering
control) system back on.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision Sys-
tem)
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Warning message Details/Actions
631
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
system
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Indicates abnormal engine oil pressure
A buzzer also sounds.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and
contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Indicates a malfunction in:
The regenerative brake system; or
The electronically controlled brake system
A buzzer also sounds.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and
contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Indicates that the Pop Up Hood system has operated
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Warning message Details/Actions
632
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Indicates a malfunction in the Pop Up Hood system
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
(If equipped)
Indicates that the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steer-
ing control) system cannot be used as the vehicle speed
is approximately 50 km/h (32 mph) or less
Drive the vehicle at approximately 50 km/h (32
mph) or more.
Indicates that the hybrid system was stopped while driv-
ing
A buzzer also sounds.
Operate the steering wheel with more force than
usual.
Indicates that the power switch is turned off or turned to
ACCESSORY mode and the driver’s door is opened
while the lights are turned on
A buzzer also sounds.
Turn the lights off.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
633
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
(If equipped)
Indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed (with the
power switch off, and the driver’s door open)
A buzzer also sounds.
Close the moon roof.
Indicates that the windows are not fully closed (with the
power switch off, and the driver’s door open)
A buzzer also sounds.
Close all the windows.
(If equipped)
Indicates that the windows and the moon roof are not
fully closed (with the power switch off, and the driver’s
door open)
A buzzer also sounds.
Close all the windows and the moon roof.
Indicates a malfunction in the Drive-Start Control
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer immediately.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
634
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Indicates a malfunction in the Brake Override System
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer immediately.
Indicates that engine oil level is low
This message may appear if the vehicle is stopped on a
slope. Move the vehicle to a level surface and check to
see if the message disappears.
Check the level of engine oil, and add if necessary.
Indicates that the hybrid system has overheated
This message may be displayed when driving under
severe operating conditions. (For example, when driv-
ing up a long steep hill.)
A buzzer also sounds.
Stop and check. (P. 674)
Warning message Details/Actions
635
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Indicates a malfunction in:
The automatic headlight leveling system; or
The Automatic High Beam system (if equipped); or
The LED headlight system
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the RSA (Road Sign Assist)
A buzzer also sounds
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Indicates that the accelerator and brake pedal are being
depressed simultaneously, and the Brake Override Sys-
tem is operating.
Release the accelerator pedal and depress the
brake pedal.
Indicates that the washer fluid level is low
Add washer fluid.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
636
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 10 L (2.6
gal., 2.2 Imp. gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
Indicates that the outside temperature is approximately
3C (37F) or lower
A buzzer also sounds.
Drive carefully, as the road may be icy.
Indicates that the TRC (Traction Control) system has
been deactivated
Turn the TRC on. (P. 387)
Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed.
(The indicator will not work properly unless the message
has been reset.)
Check the engine oil, and change if necessary.
After changing the engine oil, the message should
be reset.
Indicates that the engine oil should be changed. (After
the engine oil is changed and the message has been
reset.)
Check and change the engine oil, and oil filter by
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer. After changing the
engine oil, the message should be reset.
Warning message Details/Actions
637
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
(If equipped)
Indicates that the Automatic High Beam switch is
pressed while the headlights are in low beam.
Turn the high beam on and press the Automatic
High Beam switch again.
(If equipped)
Indicates that, since the VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
system was turned off, the pre-collision braking and pre-
collision brake assist are stopped (The pre-collision
warning function will be operational)
Turn the VSC on. (P. 387)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the PCS (Pre-Collision System) is tempo-
rarily unavailable
When conditions improve, the system resumes
operation. If this message is displayed continuously,
have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Indicates that operation of large electricity consuming
systems such as the air conditioning system are sus-
pended
Stop using unnecessary electric components to
reduce electricity consumption. Wait a while until
the electric power supply is restored.
If this message is frequently displayed, have the
vehicle inspected at by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer immediately.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
638
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Carrying out the corresponding action turns the messages off.
(If equipped)
Indicates that part of the PCS (Pre-Collision System)
sensor is dirty, covered with ice, etc.
Remove any dirt, ice, etc.
Other displayed messages
Warning message Details/Actions
Warning message Details/Actions
Maintenance of the hybrid battery (traction battery)
cooling component is required
The filter may be clogged, the air intake vent may be
blocked or there may be a gap in the duct.
Have maintenance performed on the hybrid battery
(traction battery) cooling component by any autho-
rized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer.
639
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Indicates that the EV drive mode is not available
*
The reason the EV drive mode is not available (the
vehicle is idling, hybrid battery [traction battery]
charge is low, speed is higher than the EV drive mode
operating speed range, accelerator pedal is
depressed too much) may be displayed.
A buzzer also sounds.
Use the EV drive mode when it becomes available.
Warning message Details/Actions
640
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
*
: For the EV drive mode operating conditions: P. 256
Indicates that the EV drive mode has been automatically
canceled
*
The reason the EV drive mode is not available (the
hybrid battery [traction battery] charge is low, speed is
higher than the EV drive mode operating speed
range, accelerator pedal is depressed too much) may
be displayed.
A buzzer also sounds.
Drive the vehicle for a while.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Except F
SPORT models)
(F SPORT
models)
(Flashes) (Flashes)
641
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Warning messages
The warning message illustrations used are intended as examples, and may differ from
the image that is actually displayed on the multi-information display.
Warning message in radar cruise mode (if equipped)
In the following cases, the warning message may not be displayed even if vehicle-to-vehi-
cle distance decreases:
When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the vehicle
ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle
When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed
Immediately after cruise control speed is set
At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed
The LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) lane departure warning func-
tion (if equipped)
In the following situations, the warning message will not be displayed even if a lane line is
crossed.
When the vehicle speed deviates from the operating range of the LDA system func-
tions (P. 317)
When the lane lines cannot be recognized (P. 319)
Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required
Make sure to reset the oil change system. (P. 549)
Warning buzzer
P. 615
642
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details/Actions
Con-
tinuous
The driver’s door was opened when
the shift lever was not in P and the
power switch was not turned off.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Con-
tinuous
Con-
tinuous
The driver’s door was opened and
closed while the electronic key was
not in the vehicle, the shift lever was
not in P and the power switch was
not turned off.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Bring the electronic key back
into the vehicle.
Once
The electronic key is not detected
when an attempt is made to start the
hybrid system.
Start the hybrid system with the
electronic key present.
(Flashes)
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)
643
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Once Con-
tinuous
An attempt was made to exit the
vehicle with the electronic key and
lock the doors without first turning
the power switch off when the shift
lever was in P.
Turn the power switch off and
lock the doors again.
Once 3 times
The electronic key was carried out-
side the vehicle and a door other
than the driver’s door was opened
and closed while the power switch
was in a mode other than off.
Bring the electronic key back
into the vehicle.
The driver’s door was opened and
closed while the electronic key was
not in the vehicle, the shift lever was
in P and the power switch was not
turned off.
Turn the power switch off.
Bring the electronic key back
into the vehicle.
9 times
An attempt was made to drive when
the electronic key was not inside the
vehicle.
Confirm that the electronic key
is inside the vehicle.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details/Actions
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)
644
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Con-
tinuous
An attempt was made to lock the
doors using the smart entry & start
system while the electronic key was
still inside the vehicle.
Retrieve the electronic key
from the vehicle and lock the
doors again.
Once Con-
tinuous
An attempt was made to lock either
front door by opening a door and
putting the inside lock button into
the lock position, then closing the
door by pulling on the outside door
handle with the electronic key still
inside the vehicle.
Retrieve the electronic key
from the vehicle and lock the
doors again.
Once The electronic key has a low battery.
Replace the electronic key bat-
tery. (P. 583)
Once
The steering lock could not be
released within 3 seconds of the
power switch being pressed.
Press the power switch while
depressing the brake pedal and
moving the steering wheel left
and right.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details/Actions
(Vehicles with the entry function)
(Flashes)
645
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Once
When the doors were unlocked
with the mechanical key and then
the power switch was pressed, the
electronic key could not be
detected in the vehicle.
The electronic key could not be
detected in the vehicle even after
the power switch was pressed two
consecutive times.
Touch the electronic key to the
power switch while depressing
the brake pedal.
Once
During a hybrid system starting pro-
cedure in the event that the elec-
tronic key was not functioning
properly (P. 667), the power
switch was touched with the elec-
tronic key.
Press the power switch within 10
seconds of the buzzer sounding.
Indicates that:
With the power switch off, the
doors were unlocked and then the
driver’s door was opened and
closed.
The power switch was turned to
ACCESSORY mode without
starting the hybrid system.
The shift lever was shifted to P
from another position with the
power switch in ON mode.
Press the power switch while
depressing the brake pedal.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details/Actions
646
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Once
The power switch has been turned
off with the shift lever in a position
other than P.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Once
After the power switch has been
turned off with the shift lever in a
position other than P, the shift lever
has been shifted to P.
Turn the power switch off.
Power was turned off due to the
automatic power off function.
Next time when starting the
hybrid system, increase the
engine speed slightly and main-
tain that level for approximately
5 minutes to recharge the 12-
volt battery.
Con-
tinuous
Indicates that the hybrid system was
stopped in an emergency while driv-
ing
To restart the hybrid system,
shift the shift lever to N and turn
the power switch to ON mode.
*
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
647
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
*
: The hybrid system may not be restarted depending on the vehicle condition.
Warning messages
P. 641
Warning buzzer
P. 615
Once
Indicates that the power switch has
been pressed while driving
Except when emergency stop-
ping of the vehicle is needed,
immediately release the power
switch.
Once
An attempt was made to start the
engine with the shift lever in an
incorrect position.
Shift the shift lever to P and start
the engine.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
648
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
If you have a flat tire (vehicles with emergency tire
puncture repair kit)
Your vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire, but instead is equipped with an
emergency tire puncture repair kit.
A puncture caused by a nail or screw passing through the tire tread can be
repaired temporarily with the emergency tire puncture repair kit.
WARNING
If you have a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond
repair, which could result in an accident.
649
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Stop the hybrid system.
Turn on the emergency flashers. (P. 602)
Check the degree of the tire damage.
A tire should only be repaired with
the emergency tire puncture repair
kit if the damage is caused by a nail
or screw passing through the tire
tread.
Do not remove the nail or screw
from the tire. Removing the
object may widen the opening
and disenable emergency repair
with the kit.
To avoid sealant leakage, move the vehicle until the area of the puncture, if
known, is positioned at the top of the tire.
A flat tire that cannot be repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit
In the following cases, the tire cannot be repaired with the emergency tire puncture
repair kit. Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reli-
able repairer.
When the tire is damaged due to driving without sufficient air pressure
When the tire lost air pressure due to a crack or damage in the tire sidewall
When the tire is visibly separated from the wheel
When the cut or damage to the tread is 4 mm (0.16 in.) long or more
When the wheel is damaged
When two or more tires have been punctured
When there is more than one hole or cut in the damaged tire
Before repairing the vehicle
650
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Location of the emergency tire puncture repair kit
Emergency tire puncture repair kit components
Hose
Air release cap
Air pressure gauge
Compressor switch
Power plug
Stickers
1
2
3
4
5
6
651
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Remove the 12-volt battery cover.
Remove the band and take out the
emergency tire puncture repair kit.
Taking out the emergency tire puncture repair kit
1
2
652
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Take out the repair kit from the tool box.
Remove the valve cap from the valve
of the punctured tire.
Remove the protective film from the
bottle and extend the hose. Remove
the air release cap from the hose.
Attach the sticker enclosed with the bot-
tle on the specified locations. (See step
9.)
You will use the air release cap again.
Therefore keep it in a safe place.
Connect the hose to the valve.
Screw the end of the hose clockwise as
far as possible.
Emergency repair method
1
2
3
4
653
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Make sure that the compressor
switch is off.
Remove the power plug from the
compressor.
Connect the power plug to the
power outlet socket. (P. 529)
5
6
7
654
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Remove the sticker.
Attach the 2 stickers as shown.
Remove any dirt and moisture from the
wheel before attaching the label. If it is
impossible to attach the label, make sure
to tell any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reli-
able repairer when you have them
repair and replace the tire that sealant is
injected.
8
9
655
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Connect the bottle to the compres-
sor.
As shown in the illustration, insert the
bottle vertically into the compressor to
connect making sure that the claw on
the bottle's neck is hooked onto the cut-
out of the compressor case.
Check the specified tire inflation pressure.
Tire inflation pressure is specified on the label as shown. (P. 691)
10
11
Left-hand drive vehicles
Right-hand drive vehicles
656
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Start the hybrid system.
To inject the sealant and inflate the
tire, turn the compressor switch on.
Inflate the tire until the specified air
pressure is reached.
The sealant will be injected and
the pressure will surge and then
gradually decrease.
The air pressure gauge will dis-
play the actual tire inflation pres-
sure about 1 minute (5 minutes at
low temperature) after the switch
is turned on.
Inflate the tire until the specified
air pressure.
Turn the compressor switch off
and then check the tire infla-
tion pressure. Being careful
not to over inflate, check and
repeat the inflation procedure
until the specified tire inflation
pressure is reached.
If the tire inflation pressure is still lower than the specified point after
inflation for 35 minutes with the switch on, the tire is too damaged to be
repaired. Turn the compressor switch off and contact any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
If the tire inflation pressure exceeds the specified air pressure, let out
some air to adjust the tire inflation pressure. (P. 660, 691)
12
13
14
1
2
3
657
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
With the compressor switch off, disconnect the hose from the valve on the tire
and then pull out the power plug from the power outlet socket.
Some sealant may leak when the hose is removed.
Install the valve cap onto the valve of the emergency repaired tire.
Attach the air release cap to the end
of the hose.
If the air release cap is not attached, the
sealant may leak and the vehicle may
get dirty.
Temporarily store the bottle in the luggage compartment while it is connected
to the compressor.
To spread the liquid sealant evenly within the tire, immediately drive safely for
about 5 km (3 miles) below 80 km/h (50 mph).
After driving for about 5 km (3
miles), stop your vehicle in a safe
place on a hard, flat surface and
remove the air release cap from the
hose before reconnecting the repair
kit.
15
16
17
18
19
20
658
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Turn the compressor switch on and
wait for an approximately 5 seconds,
and then turn it off. Check the tire
inflation pressure.
If the tire inflation pressure is
under 130 kPa (1.3 kgf/cm
2
or
bar, 19 psi): The puncture cannot
be repaired. Contact any autho-
rized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reli-
able repairer.
If the tire inflation pressure is 130 kPa (1.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 19 psi) or higher,
but less than the specified air pressure: Proceed to .
If the tire inflation pressure is the specified air pressure (P. 691): Pro-
ceed to .
Turn the compressor switch on to inflate the tire until the specified air pressure
is reached. Drive for about 5 km (3 miles) and then perform .
Attach the air release cap to the end
of the hose.
If the air release cap is not attached, the
sealant may leak and the vehicle may
get dirty.
Store the bottle in the luggage compartment while it is connected to the com-
pressor.
Taking precautions to avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration and sharp
turns, drive carefully at under 80 km/h (50 mph) to the nearest authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer for tire
repair or replacement.
21
1
2
3
23
22
20
23
24
25
659
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Emergency tire puncture repair kit
The sealant has a limited lifespan. The expiry date is marked on the bottle. The sealant
should be replaced before the expiry date. Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer for replacement.
The sealant stored in the emergency tire puncture repair kit can be used only once to
temporarily repair a single tire. If the sealant in the bottle and other parts of the kit have
been used and need to be purchased, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
The sealant can be used when the outside temperature is from -30C (-22F) to 60C
(140F).
The kit is exclusively designed for size and type of tires originally installed on your vehi-
cle. Do not use it for tires that a different size than the original ones, or for any other
purposes.
If the sealant gets on your clothes, it may stain.
If the sealant adheres to a wheel or the surface of the vehicle body, the stain may not be
removable if it is not cleaned at once. Immediately wipe away the sealant with a wet
cloth.
During operation of the kit, a loud operation noise is produced. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
After a tire is repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter should be replaced.
Even if the tire inflation pressure is at the recommended level, the tire pressure warning
light may come on/flash.
Note for checking the emergency tire puncture repair kit
Check the sealant expiry date occasionally.
The expiry date is shown on the bottle. Do not use sealant whose expiry date has already
passed. Otherwise, repairs conducted using the emergency tire puncture repair kit may
not be performed properly.
660
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
If the tire is inflated to more than the recommended level
Disconnect the hose from the valve.
Disconnect the hose from the valve, remove the air release cap from the hose and then
reconnect the hose.
Turn the compressor switch on and wait for several seconds, then turn it off. Check that
the air pressure indicator shows the recommended level. (P. 691)
If the air pressure is lower than the recommended level, turn the compressor switch on
again and repeat the inflation procedure until the recommended pressure is reached.
Install the air release cap to the end of the
hose and push the protrusion on the air
release cap into the valve to let some air out.
WARNING
Caution while driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause an accident.
The emergency tire puncture repair kit is made exclusively for your vehicle. Do not
use it on other vehicles.
Do not use the emergency tire puncture repair kit for tires that are a different size
than the specified ones or for any other purpose. Doing so may cause the tires to not
be repaired properly.
Precautions for use of the sealant
Ingesting the sealant is hazardous to your health. If you ingest sealant, consume as
much water as possible, then immediately consult a doctor.
If sealant gets in eyes or adheres to skin, immediately wash it off with water. If discom-
fort persists, consult a doctor.
1
2
3
4
661
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
WARNING
When fixing the flat tire
Stop your vehicle in a safe and flat area.
Do not touch the wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle
has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven, the wheels and the area around the brakes may be
extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts may result in
burns.
Connect the valve and hose securely with the tire installed on the vehicle.
If the hose is not properly connected to the valve, air leakage may occur or sealant
may be sprayed out.
If the hose comes off the valve while inflating the tire, there is a risk that the hose will
move abruptly due to air pressure.
After inflation of the tire has completed, the sealant may splatter when the hose is dis-
connected or some air is let out of the tire.
Follow the operation procedure to repair the tire. If the procedure is not followed, the
sealant may spray out.
Keep back from the tire while it is being repaired, as there is a chance of it bursting
while the repair operation is being performed. If you notice any cracks or deforma-
tion of the tire, turn off the compressor switch and stop the repair operation immedi-
ately.
The kit may overheat if operated for a long period of time. Do not operate the com-
pressor continuously for more than 10 minutes.
Parts of the kit become hot during operation. Be careful handling the kit during and
after operation.
Do not attach the vehicle speed warning sticker to an area other than the one indi-
cated. If the sticker is attached to an area where an SRS airbag is located, such as the
pad of the steering wheel, it may prevent the SRS air bag from operating properly.
Driving to spread the liquid sealant evenly
Drive the vehicle carefully at a low speed. Be especially careful when turning and cor-
nering.
If the vehicle does not drive straight or you feel a pull through the steering wheel, stop
the vehicle and check the following:
Tire condition. The tire may have separated from the wheel.
Tire inflation pressure. If tire inflation pressure is 130 kPa (1.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 19 psi)
or below, this may indicate severe tire damage.
662
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
When performing an emergency repair
Perform the emergency repair without removing the nail or screw that has punctured
the tread of the tire. If the object that has punctured the tire is removed, repair by the
emergency tire puncture repair kit may not be possible.
The kit is not waterproof. Make sure that the kit is not exposed to water, such as when
it is being used in the rain.
Do not put the kit directly onto dusty ground such as sand at the side of the road. If the
kit vacuums up dust etc., a malfunction may occur.
Use the kit with the top facing upward. The kit cannot work properly if it is laid on its
side.
Handling the emergency tire puncture repair kit
The compressor power source should be 12 V DC suitable for vehicle use. Do not
connect the compressor to any other source.
If gasoline splatters on the kit, the kit may deteriorate. Take care not to allow gasoline
to contact it.
Store the kit in its assigned place out of reach of children.
Do not disassemble or modify the kit. Do not subject parts such as the air pressure
indicator to impacts. This may cause a malfunction.
To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and trans-
mitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer as soon as possible.
After use of liquid sealant, make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when repairing or replacing the tire. (P. 558)
663
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Run-flat tires (A “RFT” or “DSST” mark is molded on the sidewall)
Take your vehicle to the nearest
Lexus dealer or authorized tire
dealer as soon as possible if any tire
goes flat.
The vehicle can be driven for a maxi-
mum of 300 km (186 miles) at a
speed below 60 km/h (37 mph)
after the tire pressure warning light
comes on. (P. 614)
In some conditions (such as at high temperatures)
You cannot continue driving for up to 300 km (186 miles).
For the detailed information on run-flat tires
See the tire warranty booklet.
If you have a flat tire (vehicles with run-flat tires)
Your vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire, but instead you can continue
driving the vehicle with run-flat tires even if any tire goes flat.In this case, slow
down and drive with extra caution.
NOTICE
When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and trans-
mitter, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reli-
able repairer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not
handled correctly.
When driving over bumps
If a vehicle has a flat tire, the vehicle height will be lower than usual. Ensure that nothing
strikes the bottom of the vehicle.
To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and trans-
mitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer or other qualified
service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 558)
664
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
The electronic key may not be functioning properly. (P. 667)
There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (P. 86)
There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
The hybrid system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such
as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However, depending on
the type of malfunction, an interim measure is available to start the hybrid sys-
tem. (P. 665)
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 669)
The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
(P. 554)
If the hybrid system will not start
Reasons for the hybrid system not starting vary depending on the situation.
Check the following and perform the appropriate procedure:
The hybrid system will not start even though the correct starting proce-
dure is being followed. (P. 251)
The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or
sounds at a low volume.
665
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 669)
One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be disconnected.
(P. 554)
Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.
When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be used as an
interim measure to start the hybrid system if the power switch is functioning nor-
mally.
Do not use this starting procedure except in cases of emergency.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY mode.
Press and hold the power switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the
brake pedal firmly.
Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the system may
be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not
sound.
Emergency start function
1
2
3
4
666
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Doors
Use the mechanical key (P. 147) in
order to perform the following oper-
ations:
Locks all the doors
Closes the windows and moon
roof (turn and hold)
*
Unlocks all the doors
Opens the windows and moon roof (turn and hold)
*
*
: This setting must be customized at any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus autho-
rized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Trunk
Turn the mechanical key clockwise
to open. (P. 102)
If the electronic key does not operate properly
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (P.
167) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the
smart entry & start system and wireless remote control cannot be used. In
such cases, the doors and trunk can be opened and the hybrid system can be
started by following the procedure below.
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked
functions
1
2
3
4
667
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.
Touch the Lexus emblem side of the
electronic key to the power switch.
When the electronic key is detected, a
buzzer sounds and the power switch will
turn to ON mode.
When the smart entry & start system is
deactivated in customization setting, the
power switch will turn to ACCESSORY
mode.
Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that is shown on the multi-
information display.
Press the power switch.
In the event that the hybrid system still cannot be started, contact any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Starting the hybrid system
1
2
3
4
668
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Stopping the hybrid system
Shift the shift lever to P and press the power switch as you normally do when stopping the
hybrid system.
Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic
key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (P. 583)
Alarm (if equipped)
Using the mechanical key to lock the doors will not set the alarm system.
If a door is unlocked using the mechanical key when the alarm system is set, the alarm
may be triggered.
Changing power switch modes
Release the brake pedal and press the power switch in step above.
The hybrid system does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is
pressed. (P. 252)
When the electronic key does not work properly
Make sure that the smart entry & start system has not been deactivated in the
customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.
(Customizable features: P. 696)
Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (P. 167)
WARNING
When using the mechanical key and operating the power windows or moon roof
Operate the power window or moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no
possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window or
moon roof.
Also, do not allow children to operate the mechanical key. It is possible for children and
other passengers to get caught in the power window or moon roof.
3
669
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt
battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below.
Confirm that the electronic key is
being carried.
When connecting the jumper (or
booster) cables, depending on the situa-
tion, the alarm may activate and doors
locked. (
P. 102)
Open the hood (P. 545) and fuse
box cover.
Remove the clips.
Push the tabs on either side to
detach the lock and lift the lid off
while pulling the lock plate.
If the 12-volt battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if the 12-volt
battery is discharged.
You can also call any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
1
2
1
2
670
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
Open the exclusive jump starting
terminal cover.
Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:
Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the exclusive jump starting ter-
minal on your vehicle.
Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the positive (+)
battery terminal on the second vehicle.
Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal on the
second vehicle.
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a solid, station-
ary, unpainted metallic point away from the exclusive jump starting terminal
and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration.
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and
maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt bat-
tery of your vehicle.
Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the power switch off.
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
671
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the hybrid system
of your vehicle by turning the power switch to ON mode.
Make sure the “READY” indicator comes on. If the indicator does not come
on, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact
reverse order from which they were connected.
Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle inspected at any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer as soon as
possible.
Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged
The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting.
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is off.
Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low
speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
Charging the 12-volt battery
The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle
is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appli-
ances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the 12-volt battery may discharge, and the
hybrid system may be unable to start. (The 12-volt battery recharges automatically while
the hybrid system is operating.)
When recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery
In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart entry & start
system when the 12-volt battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the
mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
The hybrid system may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt battery has
recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.
The power switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the 12-volt battery is
reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the 12-volt battery was
discharged. Before disconnecting the 12-volt battery, turn the power switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the power switch was in before the 12-volt battery dis-
charged, be especially careful when reconnecting the 12-volt battery.
7
8
9
672
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
WARNING
Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas
that may be emitted from the 12-volt battery:
Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not
unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to come
into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or
unpainted metal.
Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each
other.
Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the 12-volt
battery.
12-volt battery precautions
The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related
parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when han-
dling the 12-volt battery:
When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not
to allow any 12-volt battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the
vehicle body.
Do not lean over the 12-volt battery.
In the event that 12-volt battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immedi-
ately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.
Always wash your hands after handling the 12-volt battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery.
After recharging the 12-volt battery
Have the 12-volt battery inspected at any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus autho-
rized repairer, or any reliable repairer as soon as possible.
If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt battery to
emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of passengers.
When replacing the 12-volt battery
P. 556
673
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the
cooling fans or belt.
Exclusive jump starting terminal
The exclusive jump starting terminal is intended to charge the 12-volt battery on your
vehicle from another vehicle in an emergency. Do not use the exclusive jump starting
terminal to jump start another vehicle.
674
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (P. 113) enters the red
zone or a loss of hybrid system power is experienced. (For example, the vehi-
cle speed does not increase.)
“Engine Coolant Temp High Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s Manual” or
“Hybrid System Overheated Reduced Output Power” is shown on the multi-
information display.
Steam comes out from under the hood.
If the needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and
then stop the hybrid system.
If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
After the hybrid system has
cooled down sufficiently, inspect
the hoses and radiator core (radi-
ator) for any leaks.
Radiator
Cooling fans
If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact any autho-
rized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reli-
able repairer.
If your vehicle overheats
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.
Correction procedures
1
2
3
1
2
675
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
The coolant level is satisfactory if
it is between the “FULL” and
“LOW” lines on the reservoir.
Reservoir
“FULL”
“LOW”
Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency
if coolant is unavailable.
Start the hybrid system and turn the air conditioning system on to check
that the radiator cooling fans operate and to check for coolant leaks from
the radiator or hoses.
The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a
cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by checking the fan sound and air
flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off
repeatedly.
(The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.)
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the hybrid system immediately and contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
If the fans are operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
4
1
2
3
5
6
7
676
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
If “Hybrid System Overheated Reduced Output Power” is shown on the
multi-information display
Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Stop the hybrid system and carefully lift the hood.
After the hybrid system has
cooled down, inspect the hoses
and radiator core (radiator) for
any leaks.
Radiator
Cooling fans
If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact any autho-
rized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reli-
able repairer.
The coolant level is satisfactory if
it is between the “F” and “L” lines
on the reservoir.
Reservoir
“F”
“L”
Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency
if coolant is unavailable.
1
2
3
1
2
4
1
2
3
5
677
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Start the hybrid system and check if “Hybrid System Overheated Reduced
Output Power” is shown on the multi-information display.
If the message does not disappear:
Stop the hybrid system and contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
If the message is not displayed:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
WARNING
When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.
If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam
has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.
After the hybrid system has been turned off, check that the “READY” indicator is off.
When the hybrid system operating, the gasoline engine may automatically start, or
the cooling fan may suddenly operate even if the gasoline engine stops. Do not touch
or approach rotating parts such as the belt and fan, which may lead to fingers or
clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) getting caught, resulting in serious
injury.
6
Do not loosen the coolant reservoir caps or
water filler cap while the hybrid system and
radiator are hot.
High temperature steam or coolant could
spray out.
678
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
When adding engine/power control unit coolant
Add coolant slowly after the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool
coolant to a hot hybrid system too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid system.
To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).
Do not use any coolant additive.
679
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
IS300h_EE
Stop the hybrid system. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear wheels.
Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear wheels to help pro-
vide traction.
Restart the hybrid system.
Shift the shift lever to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while exer-
cising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.
When it is difficult to free the vehicle
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes
stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
Press to turn off TRC.
1
2
3
4
5
680
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS300h_EE
WARNING
When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding
area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also
lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.
When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an acci-
dent resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than nec-
essary.
If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle
may require towing to be freed.
681
9
Vehicle specifications
IS300h_EE
9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)..................682
Fuel information..........................694
9-2. Customization
Customizable features............696
9-3. Initialization
Items to initialize.........................705
682
IS300h_EE
9-1. Specifications
*
1
: Unladen vehicle
*
2
: Vehicles with 255/35R18 tires
*
3
: AVE30L-AEXEHW and AVE30R-AEXEHW models
*
4
: AVE30L-AEXLHW and AVE30R-AEXLHW models
The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label. (P. 683)
*
5
: Vehicles with a towing package
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
Overall length 4680 mm (184.3 in.)
Overall width 1810 mm (71.3 in.)
Overall height
*
1
1430 mm (56.3 in.)
Wheelbase 2800 mm (110.2 in.)
Tread
*
1
Front 1535 mm (60.4 in.)
Rear 1550 mm (61.0 in.)
1540 mm (60.6 in.)
*
2
Gross vehicle mass
*
5
2130 kg (4696 lb.)
*
3
2145 kg (4729 lb.)
*
4
Maximum permissi-
ble axle capacity
*
5
Front 1090 kg (2403 lb.)
Rear 1200 kg (2646 lb.)
Drawbar load
*
5
75 kg (165 lb.)
Towing capacity
*
5
With brake 750 kg (1653 lb.)
Without brake 750 kg (1653 lb.)
683
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
IS300h_EE
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in register-
ing the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel and in the
engine compartment.
This number is also on the manufac-
turer’s label.
Engine number
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown.
Vehicle identification
684
9-1. Specifications
IS300h_EE
Engine
Model 2AR-FSE
Type 4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 90.0 98.0 mm (3.54 3.86 in.)
Displacement 2494 cm
3
(152.2 cu. in.)
Valve clearance
(engine cold) Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type
When you find these types of fuel label at the gas sta-
tion, use only the fuel with one of the following labels.
EU area:
Unleaded gasoline conforming to European standard
EN228 only
Except EU area:
Unleaded gasoline only
Research Octane Number 95 or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 66 L (17.4 gal., 14.5 Imp. gal.)
685
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
IS300h_EE
Electric motor (traction motor)
Type Permanent magnet synchronous motor
Maximum output 105 kW
Maximum torque 300 N•m (30.6 kgf•m, 221.3 ft•lbf)
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
Type Nickel-Metal hydride battery
Voltage 7.2 V/module
Capacity 6.5 Ah (3HR)
Quantity 32 modules
Overall voltage 230.4 V
686
9-1. Specifications
IS300h_EE
Oil capacity (Drain and refill [Reference*])
*
: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine
oil. Warm up the engine and turn off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes, and
check the oil level on the dipstick.
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Lexus recom-
mends the use of approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”. Another motor oil of
matching quality can also be used.
Oil grade:
0W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30:
API grade SL “Energy-Conserving”, SM “Energy-Conserving” or SN
“Resource-Conserving”; or ILSAC multigrade engine oil
15W-40:
API grade SL, SM or SN multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
SAE 0W-20 is filled into your Lexus
vehicle at manufacturing, and the
best choice for good fuel economy
and good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 oil is not available,
SAE 5W-30 oil may be used. How-
ever, it should be replaced with SAE
0W-20 at the next oil change.
If you use SAE 10W-30 or a higher
viscosity engine oil in extremely low
temperatures, the engine may
become difficult to start, so SAE
0W-20 or 5W-30 engine oil is rec-
ommended.
Lubrication system
With filter 4.5 L (4.8 qt., 4.0 Imp. qt.)
Without filter 4.1 L (4.3. qt., 3.6 Imp. qt.)
Temperature range anticipated before
next oil change
Preferred
687
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
IS300h_EE
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold
startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of
the engine in cold weather.
The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the
oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher
value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or
under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container labels:
Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.
API Service Symbol
Top portion: “API SERVICE SN”
means the oil quality designation by
American Petroleum Institute (API).
Center portion: “SAE 0W-20”
means the SAE viscosity grade.
Lower portion: “Resource-Conserv-
ing” means that the oil has fuel-saving
and environmental protection capa-
bilities.
ILSAC Certification Mark
The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC) Certifica-
tion Mark is displayed on the front of the container.
1
2
688
9-1. Specifications
IS300h_EE
Cooling system
Engine
Power control unit
Left-hand drive
vehicles
Right-hand drive
vehicles
Capacity
(Reference)
8.2 L (8.7 qt.,
7.2 Imp. qt.)
2.0 L (2.1 qt.,
1.8 Imp. qt.)
2.2 L (2.3 qt.,
1.9 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate,
non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-
life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Ignition system (spark plug)
Make DENSO FK20HBR8
Gap 0.8 mm (0.031 in.)
NOTICE
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
689
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
IS300h_EE
*
: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.
If replacement is necessary, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus autho-
rized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Electrical system
12-volt battery
Open voltage at 20C
(68F):
12.0 V or higher
(Check the voltage 20 minutes after the hybrid system
and all lights are turned off.)
If the voltage is lower than the standard value, charge
the battery.
Charging rates 4 A — 5 A
Hybrid transmission
Fluid capacity
*
3.8 L (4.0 qt., 3.3 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
Hybrid transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may damage the hybrid
transmission of your vehicle.
690
9-1. Specifications
IS300h_EE
Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the factory.
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent oil of
matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer for further details.
*
1
: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 500 N (51.0 kgf, 112.4 lbf)
while the hybrid system is operating.
*
2
: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 300 N (30.6 kgf, 67.4 lbf)
Differential
Oil capacity 1.35 L (1.42 qt., 1.19 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent
Brakes
Pedal clearance
*
1
117 mm (4.6 in.) Min.
Pedal free play 1.0 — 6.0 mm (0.04 — 0.24 in.)
Parking brake pedal travel
*
2
7 - 10 clicks
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3, or
SAE J1704 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 4
Steering
Free play Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
691
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
IS300h_EE
16-inch tires
*
1
: For driving at vehicle speeds of more than 190 km/h (118 mph)
*
2
: For driving at vehicle speeds of 190 km/h (118 mph) or less
*
3
: For optimizing fuel economy, ECO tire pressure is recommended. Tire pressure
affects traveling comfort, road noise and steering characteristics.
Tires and wheels
Tire size 205/55R16 91W
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended
cold tire inflation
pressure)
Normal pressure 260 kPa (2.6 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 38 psi)
*
1
250 kPa (2.5 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 36 psi)
*
2
ECO tire pressure
*
3
270 kPa (2.7 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 39 psi)
Wheel size 16 7J
Wheel nut torque 103 N
m (10.5 kgf
m, 76 ft
lbf)
692
9-1. Specifications
IS300h_EE
17-inch tires
18-inch tires
When towing a trailer (vehicles with a towing package)
Add 20.0 kPa (0.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 3 psi) to the recommended tire inflation pressure, and
drive at speeds below 100 km/h (62 mph).
Tire size 225/45R17 91W, 225/45RF17 91W
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended
cold tire inflation
pressure)
Vehicle speed
Front wheel
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
Rear wheel
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
More than 190 km/h
(118 mph) 290 (2.9, 42) 290 (2.9, 42)
190 km/h (118 mph) or
less 250 (2.5, 36) 250 (2.5, 36)
Wheel size 17 7 1/2J
Wheel nut torque 103 N
m (10.5 kgf
m, 76 ft
lbf)
Tire size 225/40R18 88Y, 255/35R18 90Y
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended
cold tire inflation
pressure)
250 kPa (2.5 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 36 psi)
Wheel size 18 8J (225/40R18), 18 8 1/2J (255/35R18)
Wheel nut torque 103 N
m (10.5 kgf
m, 76 ft
lbf)
693
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
IS300h_EE
Light bulbs
*
1
Light bulbs WType
Exterior
Front turn signal lights (bulb type) 21 A
Rear turn signal lights 21 A
Outer foot lights 5 B
Interior
Door courtesy lights 5 B
Vanity lights 8 B
Interior light 8 B
Personal lights 8 B
Footwell lights 3.8 B
Trunk light
*
2
5 B
A: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
B: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
*
1
: Light bulbs not listed in this table are LED bulbs.
*
2
: If equipped
694
9-1. Specifications
IS300h_EE
Use of ethanol blended gasoline in a gasoline engine
Lexus allows the use of ethanol blended gasoline where the ethanol content is up to 10%.
Make sure that the ethanol blended gasoline to be used has a Research Octane Number
that follows the above.
If your engine knocks
Consult any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driv-
ing uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
Fuel information
When you find these types of fuel label at the gas station, use only the fuel with
one of the following labels.
EU area:
You must only use unleaded gasoline conforming to European standard
EN228.
Select unleaded gasoline with a Research Octane Number of 95 or higher
for optimum engine performance.
Except EU area:
You must only use unleaded gasoline.
Select unleaded gasoline with a Research Octane Number of 95 or higher
for optimum engine performance.
695
9
9-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
IS300h_EE
NOTICE
Notice on fuel quality
Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged.
Do not use gasoline with metallic additives, for example manganese, iron or lead, oth-
erwise it may cause damage on your engine or emission control system.
Do not add aftermarket fuel additives which contain metallic additives.
EU area: Bioethanol fuel sold under names such as “E50” or “E85” and fuel contain-
ing a large amount of ethanol should not be used. The use of these fuels will damage
the vehicle’s fuel system. In case of any doubt, ask any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Except EU area: Bioethanol fuel sold under names such as “E50” or “E85” and fuel
containing a large amount of ethanol should not be used. Your vehicle can use gaso-
line mixed with 10% max ethanol. The use of fuel with more than 10% ethanol content
(E10) will damage the vehicle’s fuel system. You must ensure that refueling is carried
out only from a source where fuel specification and quality can be guaranteed. In case
of any doubt, ask any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
Do not use the methanol blended gasoline such as M15, M85, M100. The use of gas-
oline containing methanol may cause engine damage or failure.
696
IS300h_EE
9-2. Customization
When customizing vehicle features, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a safe
place with the shift lever in P and the parking brake set.
Changing by using the Remote Touch or Lexus Display Audio controller (if
equipped)
Vehicles with a Remote Touch
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.
Select on the “Menu” screen and select .
Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be
changed for details.
Vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio controller
Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller.
Select “Setup” on the “MENU” screen and select “Vehicle”.
Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be
changed for details.
Changing by using the meter control switches
P. 128
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized
to suit your preferences. The settings of these features can be changed by
using the meter control switches, the Remote Touch or Lexus Display Audio
controller or at any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer.
Customizing vehicle features
1
2
1
2
697
9
9-2. Customization
Vehicle specifications
IS300h_EE
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being
customized. Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
Vehicles with a Remote Touch or Lexus Display Audio controller: Settings that
can be changed using the Remote Touch or Lexus Display Audio controller
Settings that can be changed by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus autho-
rized repairer, or any reliable repairer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available
Gauges, meters and multi-information display (P. 113, 119)
*
1
: The default setting varies according to countries.
*
2
: Except F SPORT models
Customizable features
1
2
Function Default setting Customized setting
Units
*
1
km (L/100km)
km (km/L) O—
miles (MPG)
Color
*
2
Color 1 Color 2 O
2
698
9-2. Customization
IS300h_EE
Door lock (P. 152, 159, 666)
Smart entry & start system and wireless remote control (P. 152, 159)
Function Default setting Customized setting
Unlocking using a mechanical key
All doors
unlocked in one
step
Driver’s door
unlocked in one step,
all doors unlocked in
two steps
O
Speed-detecting automatic door
lock function On Off O O
Shifting gears to position other
than P locks all doors Off On O O
Shifting gears to P unlocks all
doors Off On O O
Opening driver’s door unlocks all
doors On Off O O
Locking/unlocking of the trunk
when all doors are locked/
unlocked
On Off O
2
Function Default setting Customized setting
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers) On Off O O
Time elapsed before automatic
door lock function is activated if
door is not opened after being
unlocked
30 seconds
60 seconds
O
120 seconds
Open door warning buzzer On Off O
Welcome light illumination con-
trol On Off O
2
699
9
9-2. Customization
Vehicle specifications
IS300h_EE
Smart entry & start system (P. 152, 159, 165)
*
: If equipped
Wireless remote control (P. 152, 159)
Driving position memory
*
(P. 209)
*
: If equipped
Function Default setting Customized setting
Smart entry & start system On Off O O
Smart door unlocking
*
All the doors Driver’s door O O
Number of consecutive door lock
operations
*
As many as
desired 2 times O
2
Function Default setting Customized setting
Wireless remote control On Off O
Unlocking operation
All doors
unlocked in one
step
Driver’s door
unlocked in one step,
all doors unlocked in
two steps
O O
Trunk unlocking operation Press and hold
(short)
One short press
O
Push twice
Press and hold (long)
Off
2
Function Default setting Customized setting
Driver’s seat movement when
exiting the vehicle Standard Off O O
Partial
Doors linked to the driving posi-
tion memory recall function Driver’s door All doors O
2
700
9-2. Customization
IS300h_EE
Outside rear view mirrors (P. 221)
*
: If equipped
Power windows (P. 225)
Moon roof
*
(P. 229)
*
: If equipped
Function Default setting Customized setting
Automatic mirror folding and
extending operation
*
Linked to the
locking/unlock-
ing of the doors
Off
O
Linked to operation
of the power switch
2
Function Default setting Customized setting
Mechanical key linked operation Off On O
Wireless remote control linked
operation Off On O
Wireless remote control linked
operation signal (buzzer) On Off O
2
Function Default setting Customized setting
Mechanical key linked operation Off On O
Linked operation of components
when mechanical key is used
(open only)
Slide only Tilt only O
Wireless remote control linked
operation Off On O
Linked operation of components
when wireless remote control is
used (open only)
Slide only Tilt only O
Wireless remote control linked
operation signal (buzzer) On Off O
2
701
9
9-2. Customization
Vehicle specifications
IS300h_EE
Turn signal lever (P. 265)
*
1
: After flashing the turn signal lights when turning left or right while this function is off
and the turn signal lever is moved to the first position in the direction of the flashing
light, the turn signal lights can be selected to be flashing or off.
*
2
: The turn signal lights keep flashing if the turn signal lever is moved to the first position
in the direction of flashing light.
*
3
: The turn signal lights will be off if the turn signal lever is moved to the first position in
the direction of flashing light.
Automatic light control system (P. 269)
Function Default setting Customized setting
The number of times the turn sig-
nal lights flash automatically when
the turn signal lever is moved to
the first position during a lane
change
*
1
3
5
O
7
Off
*
2
Off
*
3
2
Function Default setting Customized setting
Light sensor sensitivity Standard -2 to 2 O O
Time elapsed before headlights
automatically turn off 30 seconds
60 seconds
O90 seconds
120 seconds
2
702
9-2. Customization
IS300h_EE
Lexus parking assist-sensor
*
1
(P. 341)
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: When Lexus parking assist-sensor is operating.
Driving mode select switch (P. 381)
*
:
If equipped
Automatic air conditioning system (P. 502)
Function Default setting Customized setting
Detection distance of the front
center sensor Far Near O O
Detection distance of the rear
center sensor Far Near O O
Buzzer volume 31 to 5 O O
Display setting
*
2
All sensors dis-
played Display off O O
2
Function Default setting Customized setting
Powertrain control in customized
mode
*
Normal Power O
Eco
Chassis control in customized
mode
*
Normal Sport O
Air conditioning operation in cus-
tomized mode
*
Normal Eco O
2
Function Default setting Customized setting
Switching between outside air
and recirculated air mode linked
to “AUTO” switch operation
On Off O O
A/C Auto switch operation On Off O O
2
703
9
9-2. Customization
Vehicle specifications
IS300h_EE
Seat heaters
*
(P. 515)
*
:
If equipped
Illumination (P. 517)
Function Default setting Customized setting
Seat heater timer control Off On O O
2
Function Default setting Customized setting
Time elapsed before the interior
lights turn off 15 seconds
Off
O O7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation after the power switch
is turned off On Off O
Operation when the doors are
unlocked On Off O
Operation when you approach
the vehicle with the electronic key
on your person
On Off O
Inside door handle lights On Off O
Time elapsed before the outer
foot lights turn off 15 seconds
Off
O O7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation of the outer foot lights
when you approach the vehicle
with the electronic key on your
person
On Off O
Operation of the outer foot lights
when the doors are unlocked with
the power door lock switch
On Off O
2
704
9-2. Customization
IS300h_EE
Vehicle customization
When the speed-detecting automatic door lock and shift-linked automatic door lock
are both on, the door lock operates as follows.
When shifting the shift lever to any position other than P, all the doors will be locked.
If the vehicle is started with all doors locked, the speed-detecting automatic door
lock will not operate.
If the vehicle is started with any door unlocked, the speed-detecting automatic door
lock will operate.
When the smart entry & start system is off, the entry unlock function cannot be custom-
ized.
When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the timer activated auto-
matic door lock function activates, signals will be generated in accordance with the
operation buzzer volume and operational signal (Emergency flashers) function set-
tings.
Some settings can be changed using a switch or the audio system screen. If a setting is
changed using a switch, the changed setting will not be reflected on the audio system
screen until the power switch is turned off and then to ON mode.
WARNING
During customization
As the hybrid system needs to be operating during customization, ensure that the vehi-
cle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage,
exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the
vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
During customization
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while
customizing features.
705
IS300h_EE
9
Vehicle specifications
9-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
The following item must be initialized for normal system operation after such
cases as the 12-volt battery being reconnected, or maintenance being per-
formed on the vehicle:
Item When to initialize Reference
Engine oil maintenance data After changing the engine oil P. 549
Tire pressure warning system
When rotating the tires
When changing the tire inflation
pressure by changing traveling
speed or load weight, etc.
P. 559
706
9-3. Initialization
IS300h_EE
707
Index
IS300h_EE
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting)...............................708
Alphabetical index...................................712
For vehicles with a 10.3-inch display, refer to “NAVIGATION
AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL” for infor-
mation regarding the equipment listed below.
Navigation system Audio/video system
708
IS300h_EE
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys can be made
by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer. (P. 148)
If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly.
Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer immediately. (P. 151)
Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? (P. 583)
Is the power switch in ON mode?
When locking the doors, turn the power switch off. (P. 252)
Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?
When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your
person.
The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave.
(P. 167)
Is the child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.
Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock.
(P. 156)
If you have a problem, check the following before contacting any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed
You lose your keys
The doors cannot be locked or unlocked
The rear door cannot be opened
709
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
IS300h_EE
The function to prevent the electronic key from being left inside the trunk will
operate and you can open the trunk as usual. Take the key out from the trunk.
(P. 162)
Did you press the power switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal?
(P. 251)
Is the shift lever in P? (P. 253)
Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? (P. 165)
Is the steering wheel unlocked? (P. 254)
Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?
In this case, the hybrid system can be started in a temporary way. (P. 667)
Is the 12-volt battery discharged? (P. 669)
Is the power switch in ON mode?
If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the
power switch in ON mode. (P. 262)
It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (P. 254)
The trunk lid is closed with the electronic key left inside
If you think something is wrong
The hybrid system does not start
The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the brake
pedal
The steering wheel cannot be turned after the hybrid system is stopped
710
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
IS300h_EE
Is the window lock switch pressed?
The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be operated
if the window lock switch is pressed. (P. 225)
The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCES-
SORY or ON mode (the hybrid system is not operating) for a period of time.
(P. 253)
The seat belt reminder light is flashing
Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts? (P. 614)
The parking brake indicator is on
Is the parking brake released? (P. 267)
Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound.
(P. 611, 618)
Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door or anything move inside the vehicle
during setting the alarm?
The sensor detects them and the alarm sounds. (P. 100)
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm:
Unlock the doors or open the trunk using the entry function or wireless
remote control.
Start the hybrid system.
The windows do not open or close by operating the power window
switches
The power switch is turned off automatically
A warning buzzer sounds during driving
An alarm is activated and the horn sounds (if equipped)
711
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
IS300h_EE
Is the message displayed on the multi-information display?
Check the message on the multi-information display. (P. 618)
When a warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed, refer to
P. 611, 618.
Vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and repair the flat tire temporarily with the
emergency tire puncture repair kit. (P. 648)
Vehicles with run-flat tires
Slow down and drive with extra caution. Take your vehicle to the nearest
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer or authorized tire dealer to have the flat tire replaced.
(P. 663)
Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
(P. 679)
A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle
A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed
When a problem has occurred
If you have a flat tire
The vehicle becomes stuck
712
IS300h_EE
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A/C ............................................................502
Air conditioning filter.........................581
Automatic air conditioning
system ..................................................502
Blower customization ........................ 511
S-FLOW mode.................................505
AAC disc ................................................. 427
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)...... 385
Warning light.........................................612
Adaptive Variable Suspension
system ....................................................386
Air conditioning filter ...........................581
Air conditioning system .....................502
Air conditioning filter.........................581
Automatic air conditioning
system ..................................................502
Blower customization ........................ 511
S-FLOW mode.................................505
Airbags ........................................................ 43
Airbag manual on-off system......... 53
Airbag operating conditions ...........49
Airbag precautions for
your child .............................................. 45
Correct driving posture.................... 36
Curtain shield airbag operating
conditions ..............................................49
Curtain shield airbag
precautions...........................................47
General airbag precautions........... 45
Locations of airbags ............................43
Modification and disposal of
airbags.................................................... 48
Side airbag operating
conditions ..............................................49
Side airbag precautions.................... 45
Side and curtain shield airbags
operating conditions........................49
Side and curtain shield airbags
precautions.......................................... 45
SRS airbags..............................................43
SRS warning light ................................ 612
Airbag manual on-off system............. 53
Alarm.......................................................... 100
Anchor brackets.......................................67
Antennas (smart entry &
start system) .........................................165
A
713
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)...... 385
Warning light.........................................612
Approach warning...............................332
Armrest.................................................... 530
ASC (Active Sound Control)..........268
Assist grips ..............................................532
Audio input..............................................406
Audio system......................................... 400
Audio CD player ............................... 427
Audio input .......................................... 406
AUX port/
USB port ........................................... 406
Bluetooth
®
audio................................451
iPod...........................................................433
Optimal use............................................417
Portable music player......................442
Radio........................................................425
Steering wheel audio switch....... 405
USB memory.......................................437
Automatic headlight leveling
system .....................................................271
Automatic High Beam ....................... 272
Automatic light control system ......269
AUX port.................................................406
Average fuel
economy ..............................139, 141, 143
Average vehicle speed ....................... 139
Back-up light
Replacing light bulb .........................599
Battery (12-volt battery) .................... 554
If the 12-volt battery is
discharged ........................................669
Preparing and checking
before winter.................................... 394
Warning light...........................................611
Battery (traction battery) .......................81
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) .............. 366
Blower customization............................511
Bluetooth
®
Audio system.........................................451
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)....................... 452
Bottle holders......................................... 522
Brake
Fluid..........................................................690
Parking brake.......................................267
Regenerative braking..........................79
Warning light...........................................611
Brake assist ............................................385
Break-in tips ...........................................235
Brightness control
Instrument panel light control.........116
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ............... 366
BSM function........................................373
RCTA function.................................... 376
B
714
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
Card key.................................................... 146
Care ...............................................534, 538
Aluminum wheels..............................535
Exterior....................................................534
Interior.................................................... 538
Seat belts................................................539
Cargo hooks...........................................524
Caution label .............................................. 81
CD player ................................................ 427
Chains .......................................................395
Child restraint system............................59
Baby seats, definition ..........................60
Baby seats, installation .......................68
Child seats, definition..........................60
Child seats, installation.......................68
Installing CRS with ISOFIX
rigid anchors.......................................... 71
Installing CRS with seat belts..........68
Installing CRS with top strap ...........72
Junior seats, definition ........................60
Junior seats, installation .....................70
Child safety ................................................58
12-volt battery
precautions...........................556, 672
Airbag precautions ............................. 45
Child restraint system ........................ 59
How your child should
wear the seat belt.............................. 40
Installing child restraints.....................67
Moon roof precautions...................232
Power window lock switch ...........225
Power window precautions......... 228
Rear door child-protectors............156
Removed electronic key
battery precautions.......................585
Seat belt precautions...........................42
Seat heater precautions...................515
Trunk precautions ..............................163
Child-protectors ....................................156
Cleaning....................................... 534, 538
Aluminum wheels..............................535
Exterior................................................... 534
Interior.....................................................538
Seat belts ...............................................539
Clock.........................................................528
Coat hooks..............................................532
C
715
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
Condenser .............................................553
Console box ............................................ 521
Coolant...................................................... 551
Capacity................................................688
Checking ................................................ 551
Preparing and checking
before winter ....................................394
Cooling system.......................................551
Engine overheating ..........................674
Hybrid system overheating..........674
Cruise control
Cruise control .....................................337
Dynamic radar cruise control .....325
Cup holders ............................................522
Current fuel
consumption.......................139, 141, 143
Curtain shield airbags ...........................43
Customizable features.......................696
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcast)..... 425
Daytime running light system ......... 270
Defogger
Outside rear view mirrors..............510
Rear window..........................................510
Windshield .............................................510
Differential...............................................690
Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB)..... 425
Dimensions ............................................. 682
Display
Drive information.................................125
Dynamic radar cruise control..... 325
LDA (Lane Departure Alert
with steering control).....................316
Multi-information display...................119
Warning message ..............................618
Do-it-yourself maintenance............. 543
Door courtesy lights
Location ................................................... 517
Wattage .................................................693
Door lock
Doors.........................................................152
Smart entry & start system .............165
Wireless remote control .................146
D
716
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
Doors.......................................................... 152
Automatic door locking and
unlocking system.............................156
Door lock................................................ 155
Open door warning buzzer ......... 153
Open door warning
light..........................................................613
Outside rear view mirrors...............221
Rear door child-protector ............ 156
Side windows.......................................225
Drive information................................... 125
Drive-Start Control ................. 235, 262
Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt reminder light .................... 614
Driver’s seat position memory ........209
Driving.......................................................234
Break-in tips .........................................235
Correct driving posture....................36
Driving mode select switch........... 381
Hybrid vehicle driving tips ..............391
Procedures...........................................234
Winter drive tips.................................394
Dynamic radar cruise control..........325
E-mail ........................................................460
ECB (Electronically Controlled
Brake System)....................................385
Eco drive mode...................................... 381
Elapsed time ...................................139, 143
Electric motor (traction motor)..........77
Electric Power Steering (EPS) .......385
Warning light......................................... 612
Electronic key ..........................................146
Battery-saving function.................... 167
If the electronic key does not
operate properly............................666
Replacing the battery......................583
E
717
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
Electronically Controlled
Brake System (ECB) ...................... 385
Emergency, in case of
If a warning message is
displayed .............................................618
If the 12-volt battery is
discharged.........................................669
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ............................666
If the hybrid system will not
start........................................................664
If the vehicle is trapped in
rising water....................................... 604
If the warning buzzer sounds......... 611
If the warning light turns on ............. 611
If you have a flat tire.............648, 663
If you think something
is wrong................................................610
If your vehicle becomes stuck.....679
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency......... 603
If your vehicle needs to
be towed............................................ 605
If your vehicle overheats................674
Emergency brake signal....................386
Emergency flashers............................. 602
Emergency tire puncture
repair kit................................................648
Energy monitor .......................................136
Engine .......................................................684
ACCESSORY mode......................252
Compartment..................................... 547
Engine switch ........................................251
Hood .......................................................545
How to start the hybrid
system....................................................251
Identification number.......................683
Ignition switch
(power switch)..................................251
Overheating ........................................ 674
Power switch.........................................251
Engine coolant........................................ 551
Capacity.................................................688
Checking.................................................551
Preparing and checking
before winter.................................... 394
718
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
Engine coolant temperature
gauge.........................................................113
Engine oil..................................................548
Capacity................................................ 686
Checking .............................................. 548
Preparing and checking
before winter ....................................394
Engine oil maintenance data............549
Engine switch .......................................... 251
EPS (Electric Power Steering)....... 385
Warning light.........................................612
EV drive mode.......................................256
EV indicator ...............................................79
First-aid kit storage belt ..................... 524
Flat tire
Vehicles with emergency
tire puncture repair kit.................648
Vehicles with run-flat tires ............663
Floor mats................................................... 34
Fluid
Brake .......................................................690
Hybrid
transmission......................................689
Washer...................................................553
Fog light.....................................................276
Replacing light bulbs .......................599
Switch.......................................................276
Follow me home system .................... 270
Footwell light............................................517
Wattage .................................................693
Front personal lights............................. 518
Wattage .................................................693
Front position lights ............................. 269
Light switch........................................... 269
Replacing light bulbs .......................599
F
719
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
Front seats ...............................................205
Adjustment............................................205
Cleaning................................................ 538
Correct driving posture....................36
Driving position memory...............209
Head restraints......................................214
Power easy access system...........209
Seat heaters........................................... 516
Seat position memory .....................209
Seat ventilators..................................... 516
Front turn signal lights.........................265
Replacing light bulbs........................592
Turn signal lever.................................265
Wattage..................................................693
Fuel .............................................................285
Capacity................................................ 684
Fuel gauge................................................ 113
Information............................................694
Refueling ................................................285
Type......................................................... 684
Warning light.........................................613
Fuel consumption .................................. 139
Average fuel
economy............................139, 141, 143
Current fuel
consumption....................139, 141, 143
Fuel filler door ........................................285
If the fuel filler door
cannot be opened .........................287
Refueling ................................................285
Fuel gauge ..................................................113
Fuses ......................................................... 586
Gauges........................................................113
Glove box..................................................521
Glove box light........................................521
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)........................... 452
Head restraints........................................214
Headlight cleaner..................................277
Headlights ............................................... 269
Automatic High Beam
system...................................................272
Follow me home system................ 270
Light switch........................................... 269
Replacing light bulbs .......................599
Heaters.....................................................502
Air conditioning system.................502
Heated steering wheel .....................515
Outside rear view mirrors..............510
Seat heaters............................................516
High-voltage components ....................81
Hill-start assist control........................385
Hood..........................................................545
Open.......................................................545
Pop Up Hood........................................ 55
G
H
720
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
Hooks
Cargo hooks........................................524
Coat hooks...........................................532
Retaining hooks (floor mat).............34
Horn ............................................................ 218
Hybrid battery (traction battery)........ 81
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
air vents.....................................................82
Hybrid system ............................................77
Emergency shut off system..............82
Energy monitor/
consumption screen.......................136
EV drive mode ...................................256
High voltage components .................81
Hybrid System Indicator....................117
Hybrid system precautions................81
Hybrid vehicle driving tips ..............391
If the hybrid system
will not start .......................................664
Overheating......................................... 674
Power (ignition) switch.....................251
Starting the hybrid system...............251
Hybrid System Indicator.......................117
Hybrid transmission.............................258
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ...................................263
Paddle shift switches........................260
S mode......................................................261
Identification
Engine.....................................................683
Vehicle....................................................683
Ignition switch (power switch) ..........251
Illuminated entry system..................... 518
Immobilizer system................................. 86
Indicators .................................................... 110
Initialization
Engine oil maintenance data.......549
Moon roof............................................... 231
Multi-information display.................128
Power windows ..................................226
Tire pressure warning
system..................................................559
Inside door handle lights .....................517
Inside rear view mirror.........................219
Instrument panel light control ............ 116
Interior lights.............................................517
Wattage .................................................693
Intrusion sensor and tilt sensor........ 103
ISOFIX rigid anchors .............................67
I
721
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
Jack
Positioning the jack...........................546
Vehicle-equipped jack .....................571
Jack handle............................................... 571
Jam protection function
Moon roof.............................................230
Power window....................................226
Keyless entry
Smart entry & start
system .........................................152, 159
Wireless remote control.......152, 159
Keys............................................................. 146
Battery-Saving Function ..................167
Electronic key........................................146
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ............................666
Key number plate................................146
Keyless entry...............................152, 159
Mechanical key.....................................147
Power switch .........................................251
Replacing the battery...................... 583
Warning buzzer.................................. 153
Wireless remote control..................146
Knee airbags..............................................43
Lane Departure Alert
with steering control (LDA) ..........312
Language
(multi-information display)..............128
LDA (Lane Departure Alert
with steering control) .......................312
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever.........................545
Hood lock release lever ................545
Shift lever ...............................................258
Turn signal lever................................. 265
Wiper lever ...........................................277
Lexus Display Audio controller...... 402
Lexus Display Audio system............400
Lexus parking assist-sensor...............341
Lexus parking assist monitor ...........350
Lexus Safety System +........................289
Automatic High Beam...................272
Dynamic radar cruise control.... 325
LDA (Lane Departure Alert
with steering control)..................... 312
PCS (Pre-Collision System)........301
RSA (Road Sign Assist)................ 320
License plate lights .............................. 269
Light switch........................................... 269
Replacing light bulbs .......................599
J
K
L
722
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
Light bulbs
Replacing...............................................592
Wattage..................................................693
Lights
Automatic High Beam
system ...................................................272
Fog light switch...................................276
Follow me home system................270
Headlight switch.................................269
Illuminated entry system.................. 518
Interior light............................................ 518
Interior lights list....................................517
Personal lights...................................... 518
Replacing light bulbs........................592
Trunk light................................................162
Turn signal lever.................................265
Vanity lights ..........................................527
Wattage..................................................693
Lock steering column .........................254
Low profile tire.......................................560
Luggage security system......................161
Luggage under tray .............................525
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance.........543
Maintenance data .............................682
Maintenance requirements............541
Malfunction indicator lamp ................. 611
Master warning light .............................614
Meter
Changing the display..........................116
Indicators.................................................. 110
Instrument panel light control.........116
Meters.........................................................113
Multi-information display...................119
Warning lights ......................................109
MirrorLink...........................................486
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror .....................219
Outside rear view mirror
defoggers ............................................510
Outside rear view mirrors.............. 221
Vanity mirrors......................................527
M
723
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
MMS (Multimedia messaging
service) ..................................................460
Moon roof................................................229
Door lock linked moon roof
operation............................................230
Jam protection function..................230
Operation..............................................229
MP3 disc.................................................. 427
Multi-information display .....................119
Audio system-linked ........................... 119
Drive information.................................125
Dynamic radar cruise
control..................................................325
Energy monitor.....................................137
LDA (Lane Departure Alert
with steering control) ....................316
Navigation system-linked................. 119
Settings..................................................... 128
Warning message..............................618
Navigation system*
Odometer .................................................. 113
Oil
Differential oil.......................................690
Engine oil...............................................686
Opener
Hood .......................................................545
Trunk..........................................................159
Outer foot lights
Location ................................................... 517
Replacing light bulbs .......................595
Wattage .................................................693
Outside rear view mirrors..................221
Adjusting and folding ........................ 221
BSM (Blind Sport Monitor).........366
Linked mirror function
when reversing ................................223
Mirror position memory ................209
Outside rear view mirror
defoggers ...........................................510
Outside temperature.............................113
Overheating............................................674
N
O
*
: For vehicles with a 10.3-inch display, refer to
“NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
724
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
Paddle shift switches ...........................260
Parking assist sensors.......................... 341
Parking brake......................................... 267
PCS (Pre-Collision System) .............301
Warning light.........................................613
Personal lights.........................................518
Wattage..................................................693
Pollen removal mode...........................510
Pop-up display........................................ 128
Pop Up Hood............................................55
Power control unit.................................... 81
Power control unit coolant ................551
Capacity................................................688
Checking ................................................ 551
Preparing and checking before
winter....................................................394
Power easy access system...............209
Power outlet ........................................... 529
Power steering (Electric power
steering system).................................385
Warning light......................................... 612
Power switch............................................251
Power windows..................................... 225
Door lock linked window
operation.............................................227
Jam protection function..................226
Operation ..............................................225
Window lock switch.........................225
Pre-Collision System (PCS)............. 301
Warning light.........................................613
Radar cruise control (dynamic
radar cruise control)........................ 325
Radiator....................................................553
Radio.......................................................... 425
Rear Crossing Traffic Alert.............. 366
Rear fog light...........................................276
Replacing light bulb .........................599
Switch.......................................................276
Rear passengers’ seat belt
reminder lights .....................................614
Rear seat.................................................. 207
Fold down the seatback ................ 207
Luggage security system ..................161
P
R
725
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
Rear personal lights..............................518
Wattage..................................................693
Rear sunshade ...................................... 530
Operation............................................. 530
Reverse operation feature ........... 530
Rear turn signal lights..........................265
Replacing light bulbs....................... 599
Turn signal lever.................................265
Rear view mirror
Inside rear view mirror......................219
Outside rear view mirrors...............221
Rear view monitor system................ 350
Rear window defogger ......................510
Refueling ..................................................285
Capacity................................................ 684
Fuel types.............................................. 684
If the fuel filler door cannot
be opened .........................................287
Opening the fuel tank cap ............287
Regenerative braking ............................ 79
Remote Touch*....................................496
Replacing
Electronic key battery..................... 583
Fuses ....................................................... 586
Light bulbs............................................ 590
Tires ............................................................571
Rev indicator..............................................115
Rev peak......................................................115
Road accident cautions.........................84
RSA (Road Sign Assist) ....................320
Run-flat tires............................................663
Seat belt reminder light .......................614
Seat belts..................................................... 38
Adjusting the seat belt ....................... 39
Child restraint system
installation............................................. 68
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belt.......................................539
Emergency Locking
Retractor (ELR)................................. 40
How to wear your seat belt ............38
How your child should wear
the seat belt.......................................... 40
Pregnant women, proper
seat belt use........................................... 41
Reminder light and
buzzer....................................................614
Seat belt pretensioners...................... 39
SRS warning light ................................ 612
Seat heaters..............................................516
Seat position memory.........................209
Seat ventilators........................................516
S
*
: For vehicles with a 10.3-inch display, refer to
“NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
726
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
Seats, Front..............................................205
Adjustment............................................205
Adjustment precautions.................206
Child seats/child restraint
system installation ............................. 67
Cleaning................................................ 538
Driving position memory...............209
Head restraints......................................214
Power easy access system...........209
Properly sitting in the seat................36
Seat heaters........................................... 516
Seat position memory .....................209
Seat ventilators..................................... 516
Seats, Rear...............................................207
Fold down the seatback.................207
Luggage security system..................161
Sensor
Automatic headlight system.........270
Inside rear view mirror....................220
Intrusion sensor and tilt sensor.... 103
LDA (Lane Departure Alert
with steering control).....................312
Lexus parking assist-sensor...........341
Radar sensor..............................291, 372
Rain-sensing windshield
wipers...................................................283
Service plug.................................................81
Service reminder indicators ............. 108
S-FLOW mode.....................................505
Shift lever .................................................258
Hybrid transmission.........................258
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P................................... 263
Shift lock system ................................... 262
Shift position and shift range............... 113
Side airbags ............................................... 43
Side mirrors ..............................................221
Adjusting and folding ........................ 221
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)...........366
Linked mirror function when
reversing .............................................223
Mirror position memory ................209
Side turn signal lights .......................... 265
Replacing light bulbs .......................599
Turn signal lever................................. 265
Side windows ......................................... 225
Slip indicator.............................................613
Smart entry & start system .................165
Antenna location .................................165
Entry functions ........................... 152, 159
Starting the hybrid system ..............251
727
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
SMS (Short message service).........460
Snow mode .............................................259
Snow tires.................................................396
Spark plug............................................... 688
Specifications .........................................682
Speech command system ................492
Speedometer ............................................113
Sport mode...............................................381
Steering lock...........................................254
Column lock release........................254
Steering wheel.........................................217
Adjustment..............................................217
Audio switches................................... 405
Heated steering wheel..................... 515
Power easy access system...........209
Steering wheel position
memory...............................................209
Stop lights
Emergency brake signal............... 386
Replacing light bulbs....................... 599
Storage feature......................................520
Stuck
If the vehicle becomes stuck........679
Sun visors .................................................527
Sunshade
Rear ......................................................... 530
Roof ..........................................................230
Switches
ASC (Active Sound Control).....268
Audio remote control
switches ..............................................405
Automatic High Beam switch......272
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
switch...................................................366
Cruise control
switch....................................... 325, 337
Door lock switches.............................155
Driving mode select switch............381
Driving position memory
switches ..............................................209
Emergency flashers switch........... 602
EV drive mode switch.................... 256
Fog light switch....................................276
Heated steering wheel
switch.....................................................515
Ignition switch ....................................... 251
LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
switch.....................................................315
Lexus parking assist-sensor
switch.....................................................341
Light switch........................................... 269
Meter control switches..................... 122
Moon roof switches..........................229
Outside rear view mirror
switches ................................................ 221
728
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
Paddle shift switches........................260
Power door lock switch .................. 155
Power switch .........................................251
Power window switches................225
Rear sunshade switch..................... 530
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers
switch.....................................................510
Seat heater switches ......................... 516
Seat ventilator switches................... 516
Snow mode switch ...........................259
Talk switch.............................................463
Telephone switches..........................463
Tilt and telescopic steering
control switch.....................................217
Tire pressure warning reset
switch................................................... 559
Trunk opener main switch ............... 161
Trunk opener switch ......................... 159
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
switch......................................................331
VSC OFF switch ...............................387
Window lock switch.........................225
Windshield wiper
and washer switch..........................277
Windshield wiper de-icer
switch....................................................... 511
Tachometer ...............................................113
Tachometer settings .............................128
Tail lights................................................... 269
Light switch........................................... 269
Replacing light bulbs .......................599
Talk switch............................................... 463
Telephone switches............................. 463
Theft deterrent system
Alarm........................................................ 100
Double locking system...................... 99
Immobilizer system .............................86
Intrusion sensor and tilt sensor.....103
Tire inflation pressure..........................577
Maintenance data ...............................691
Tire pressure warning system.....558
Warning light.........................................614
Tire pressure warning system.........558
Initializing...............................................559
Installing tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters ...............558
Registering ID codes.......................559
Tire pressure warning reset
switch...................................................559
Warning light.........................................614
T
729
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
Tires............................................................557
Chains .....................................................395
Checking ...............................................557
Emergency tire puncture
repair kit............................................. 648
If you have a flat tire.............648, 663
Inflation pressure................................. 691
Replacing.................................................571
Rotating tires .......................................558
Size............................................................. 691
Snow tires..............................................396
Tire pressure warning system.... 558
Warning light.........................................614
Tools............................................................ 571
Top strap ..................................................... 72
Towing.......................................................605
Emergency towing........................... 605
Towing capacity .................................682
Towing eyelet ......................................607
Trailer towing....................................... 243
Traction battery (hybrid battery)........ 81
Traction Control (TRC) .................... 385
Traction motor (electric motor) .........77
Trailer towing .........................................243
Transmission...........................................258
Driving mode select switch............381
Hybrid transmission.........................258
Paddle shift switches........................260
S mode ..................................................... 261
TRC (Traction Control).....................385
Trip meters.................................................113
Trunk............................................................159
Luggage security system ..................161
Smart entry & start system .............159
Trunk features ..................................... 524
Trunk grip................................................160
Trunk light ...............................................162
Trunk opener main switch................161
Trunk opener switch..........................159
Wireless remote control .................160
Trunk light..................................................162
Wattage .................................................693
Turn signal lights ................................... 265
Replacing light bulbs...........592, 599
Turn signal lever................................. 265
Wattage .................................................693
730
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
Units ............................................................ 128
USB device ................................. 437, 490
Connecting.......................................... 406
USB audio.............................................437
USB photo........................................... 490
USB video............................................. 437
USB port...................................................406
Vanity lights............................................. 527
Vanity lights ..........................................527
Wattage..................................................693
Vanity mirrors ........................................527
VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics
Integrated Management) ..............386
Vehicle identification number.........683
Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) ................................................... 385
Ventilators (seat ventilators)............. 516
VSC (Vehicle Stability
Control)................................................ 385
Warning buzzers
Approach warning ........................... 332
Downshifting.........................................262
Driver’s and front
passenger’s seat belt
reminder.............................................. 614
Lexus parking assist-sensor ..........341
Open door .............................................613
Pre-Collision braking...................... 302
Rear passengers’ seat belt
reminder...............................................614
Warning lights ........................................ 109
ABS............................................................612
Brake system...........................................611
Charging system...................................611
Driver’s and front
passenger’s seat belt
reminder light.....................................614
Electric power steering
system....................................................612
Low fuel level.........................................613
Malfunction indicator lamp ..............611
Master warning light..........................614
Open door .............................................613
Pre-Collision System ........................613
Rear passengers’ seat belt
reminder lights ..................................614
Slip indicator..........................................613
SRS ............................................................. 612
Tire pressure..........................................614
U
V
W
731
Alphabetical index
IS300h_EE
Warning messages ............................... 618
Warning reflector storage belt.......526
Washer...................................................... 277
Checking ...............................................553
Preparing and checking
before winter ....................................394
Switch .......................................................277
Washing and waxing...........................534
Weight.......................................................682
Wheels ...................................................... 579
Replacing...............................................579
Size............................................................. 691
Window lock switch ............................225
Windows ..................................................225
Power windows..................................225
Rear window defogger....................510
Windshield wiper de-icer.....................511
Windshield wipers................................ 277
Intermittent windshield wipers
with interval adjuster......................277
Rain-sensing windshield
wipers................................................... 279
Winter driving tips................................394
Wireless remote control..................... 146
Battery-Saving Function ..................167
Locking/Unlocking .................152, 159
Replacing the battery...................... 583
WMA disc ............................................... 427
732
IS300h_EE
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever Trunk opener Fuel filler door
P. 545 P. 159 P. 285
Hood lock release lever Tire inflation pressure
P. 545 P. 691
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 66 L (17.4 gal., 14.5 Imp. gal.)
Fuel type
EU area: Unleaded gasoline conforming to European
standard EN228 only
Except EU area: Unleaded gasoline only
P. 684
Cold tire inflation
pressure P. 691
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill —
reference)
P. 686
Engine oil type P. 686
1

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Lexus IS 300h - 2018 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Lexus IS 300h - 2018 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 176.19 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Lexus IS 300h - 2018

Lexus IS 300h - 2018 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 732 pagina's

Lexus IS 300h - 2018 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 764 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info